Input Formats and Specifications of the National Geodetic Survey Data Base Volume I. Horizontal Control Data Silver Spring, MD 20910 September 1994 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration National Ocean Service Coast and Geodetic Survey Input Formats and Specifications of the National Geodetic Survey Data Base Volume I. Horizontal Control Data RADM J. Austin Yeager, NOAA Chairperson, Federal Geodetic Control Subcommittee Federal Geodetic Data Committee Silver Spring, MD 20910 September 1994 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE Ronald H. Brown, Secretary National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration Dr. D. James Baker, Administrator National Ocean Service Dr. W. Stanley Wilson, Assistant Administrator Coast and Geodetic Survey RADM J. Austin Yeager, Director PREFACE "Input Formats and Specifications of the National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Data Base," commonly called the "Blue Book," is a user's guide for preparing and submitting geodetic data for incorporation into NGS' data base. Survey data that are entered into NGS' data base become part of the National Spatial Reference System (NSRS), formerly the National Geodetic Reference System. The guide comprises three volumes. Volume I covers classical horizontal geodetic and Global Positioning System (GPS) data, volume II covers vertical geodetic data, and volume III covers gravity data. Beginning with this edition, the three formerly separate volumes are distributed as a set, since a great deal of information is common to each volume. Because some of the chapters and annexes are identical in all three volumes, the original numbering design has been retained. The formats and specifications are consistent with the aims of the Executive Office of the President, Office of Management and Budget's (OMB) Circular A-16, as revised in 1990. A major goal of the circular, which is titled "Coordination of Surveying, Mapping, and Related Spatial Data Activities," is to develop a national spatial data infrastructure with the involvement of Federal, state, and local governments, and the private sector. This multilevel national information resource, united by standards and criteria established by the Federal Geodetic Control Subcommittee (FGCS) of the Federal Geographic Data Committee (FGDC), will enable the sharing and efficient transfer of geospatial data between producers and users. Survey data that are submitted to NGS for incorporation into NSRS should be properly formatted and supply minimum accuracies of: First-order horizontal accuracy standards for GPS and conventional horizontal surveys; Second-order, class II vertical accuracy standards for conventional leveling; Third-order gravity standards for gravity surveys. Effective July 1, 1995, survey project data must meet the above minimum accuracy standards to be accepted for inclusion into the NGS data base. Surveys that are of lower order than given above will be accepted only in exceptional cases approved by the Chief, NGS. In addition, these data standards and accuracies should be verified and the survey data contributed for inclusion into the NGS data base should be processed and adjusted by the provider, using currently available NGS software, before submitting the survey project to NGS. At this time, NGS provides review, archiving, and distribution functions free of charge for survey data submitted in the proper format. These surveys must contain connections to NSRS in accordance with FGCS Standards and Specifications and they must contribute to the public good. The production of the Blue Book entailed significant contributions from a number of NGS employees. Notable among these are D. Sherrill Snellgrove for his revision of Volume I, originally prepared by then-Commander Ludvik Pfeifer, NOAA (Ret.); Nancy L. Morrison and Commander Pfeifer, for their contributions to preparing Volume II; and then-Lieutenant Warren T. Dewhurst, NOAA, for his preparation of Volume III. This publication and most of the documents referenced herein may be obtained from: NOAA, National Geodetic Survey, N/CG174 1315 East-West Highway, Station 9202 Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282 Telephone: (301) 713-3242; Fax: (301) 713-4172 Monday through Friday, 7:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Eastern Time. CONTENTS - VOLUME I Chapter 1 - HORIZONTAL CONTROL (HZTL) DATA Chapter 2 - HORIZONTAL OBSERVATION (HZTL OBS) DATA Chapter 3 - GEODETIC CONTROL DESCRIPTIVE (GEOD DESC) DATA ANNEX A - NGS STATE AND COUNTRY CODES ANNEX B - STATE PLANE COORDINATES (SPC) ZONE CODES ANNEX C - CONTRIBUTORS OF GEODETIC CONTROL DATA ANNEX D - GUIDELINES FOR GEODETIC CONTROL POINT DESIGNATIONS ANNEX E - STATION ORDER-AND-TYPE (OT) CODES ANNEX F - NGS SURVEY EQUIPMENT CODES ANNEX G - ELLIPSOID HEIGHT ORDER-AND-CLASS (OC) CODES ANNEX H - STANDARD TIME ZONES ANNEX I - SUMMARY OF CODES USED IN GEODETIC SURVEY POINT DESCRIPTIONS ANNEX K - PROJECT REPORT INSTRUCTIONS ANNEX L - GUIDELINES FOR SUBMITTING GPS RELATIVE POSITIONING DATA ANNEX N - GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM DATA TRANSFER FORMAT iii CONTENTS - VOLUME I PAGE Chapter 1 - HORIZONTAL CONTROL (HZTL) DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 MEDIA FOR SUBMITTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 FIGURE 1-1 - Station serial numbers assigned to control points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 FIGURE 1-2 - Station serial numbers assigned to control points and to peripheral points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 CODING, KEYING, AND DATA VERIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 SPECIAL CHARACTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 SEQUENTIAL RECORD NUMBERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Chapter 2 - HORIZONTAL OBSERVATION (HZTL OBS) DATA . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 HZTL OBS DATA SET RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 TABLE 2-1 - Horizontal Observation Data Set Records . . . . . 2-2 STRUCTURE OF THE HZTL OBS DATA SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 TABLE 2-2 - HZTL OBS Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 PROJECT DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Project Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Survey Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Order and Class of Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 DATE AND TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 TABLE 2-3 - U.S. Navy Time Zone Designations . . . . . . . . . 2-8 OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Standpoint and Forepoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Station Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Weather Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 TABLE 2-4 - Weather Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Job-Specific Instrument Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Height of Instrument and Height of Target . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Visibility Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 iv CONTENTS - VOLUME I PAGE ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Control Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Peripheral Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Method A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Method B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Number of Replications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Rejection Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Internal Consistency Sigma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 External Consistency Sigma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 HORIZONTAL DIRECTION DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Set Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Number of Objects Sighted in This Set . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Job-Specific Data Media Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 HORIZONTAL ANGLE DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Set Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Number of Angles Observed in This Set . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 VERTICAL ANGLE/ZENITH DISTANCE DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Set Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Number of VAs or ZDs Observed in This Set . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Angle Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 LEVEL DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Number of Replications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 DISTANCE DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Distance Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 AZIMUTH DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Origin of Azimuth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 SURVEY EQUIPMENT DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 NGS Survey Equipment Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Resolution of the Instrument and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 v CONTENTS - VOLUME I PAGE SURVEY POINT DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Station Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30 Name or Designation of RM or AZ MK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32 Name or Designation of Bench Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33 Geodetic Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Elevation and Elevation Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 Station Order and Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 TABLE 2-5 - Allowable Order Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 TABLE 2-6 - Allowable Type Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Geoid Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38 Deflection of Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 FIXED CONTROL DATA RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 RECORD FORMATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Required Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Data Set Identification Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Project Data (*10*-Series) Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43 Horizontal Direction Data (*20*-Series) Records . . . . . . . 2-46 Global Positioning System Data Records . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Horizontal Angle Data (*30*-Series) Records . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Vert Angle/Level Data (*40*-Series) Records . . . . . . . . . 2-59 Distance Data (*50*-Series) Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Azimuth Data (*60*-Series) Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73 Survey Equipment Data (*70*) Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Survey Point Data (*80*-Series) Records . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77 Fixed Control Data (*90*) Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86 Data Set Termination Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87 FORMAT DIAGRAMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 Chapter 3 - GEODETIC CONTROL DESCRIPTIVE (GEOD DESC) DATA . . . . . . 3-1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 WRITING DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 STRUCTURE OF THE GEOD DESC DATA SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 RECORD DEFINITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 TITLE AND COMMENT RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 CODE *00* - *04* (PROJECT AND TITLE INFORMATION RECORDS) . . . . . 3-2 CODE *05* (COMMENT RECORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 DESCRIPTION RECORDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 vi CONTENTS - VOLUME I PAGE CODE *10* (STATION LOCATION RECORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Station Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 DR Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Recovery Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Approximate Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Approximate Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Quad Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 FIGURE 3-1 (Quad Identifier Graphic Format). . . . . . . . . . 3-5 State/Country Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 County . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Special Application Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Permanent Identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 CODE *13* (STATION IDENTIFICATION RECORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Underground Marker Type/Magnetic Property Code . . . . . . . . 3-7 Setting Code (Underground Marker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Transportation Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Backpack-Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 CODE *15* (ALIAS RECORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 CODE *20* (MONUMENTED/RECOVERED RECORD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Monumenting Agency Group Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Monumenting Agency Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Year Monumented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Chief of Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Recovering Agency Group Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Recovering Agency Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Date Recovered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Chief of Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Recovery Condition Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 CODE *26* (SETTING RECORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Setting Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Surface Marker Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Magnetic Code (Surface Marker) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Vertical Stability Override Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Marker Inscription . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 CODE *28* (STAMPING RECORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 CODE *29* (ROD/PIPE RECORD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 CODE *30* (TEXT RECORDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 SAMPLE DESCRIPTION DATA SETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 FORMAT DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 vii CONTENTS - VOLUME I PAGE ANNEX A - NGS STATE AND COUNTRY CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1 ANNEX B - STATE PLANE COORDINATES (SPC) ZONE CODES . . . . . . . . . . B-1 ANNEX C - CONTRIBUTORS OF GEODETIC CONTROL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 ANNEX D - GUIDELINES FOR GEODETIC CONTROL POINT DESIGNATIONS . . . . . D-1 ANNEX E - STATION ORDER-AND-TYPE (OT) CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 ANNEX F - NGS SURVEY EQUIPMENT CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1 ANNEX G - ELLIPSOID HEIGHT ORDER-AND-CLASS (OC) CODES . . . . . . . . G-1 ANNEX H - STANDARD TIME ZONES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1 ANNEX I - SUMMARY OF CODES USED IN GEODETIC SURVEY POINT DESCRIPTIONS I-1 ANNEX K - PROJECT REPORT INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1 ANNEX L - GUIDELINES FOR SUBMITTING GPS RELATIVE POSITIONING DATA . . L-1 ANNEX N - GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM DATA TRANSFER FORMAT . . . . . . . N-1 viii Chapter 1 HORIZONTAL CONTROL (HZTL) DATA INTRODUCTION For coding and processing purposes, data associated with geodetic horizontal control (HZTL data) have been divided into two groups. These two groups are (1) field observations (OBS data) and (2) descriptions and recovery notes (DESC data). Detailed instructions and formats for coding and keying horizontal control OBS and DESC data sets are contained in Chapters 2 and 3. The treatment of all data normally generated in the conduct of a classical horizontal control survey (triangulation, trilateration, and/or traverse) is described. Although both types of data are normally generated in a horizontal control survey, OBS and DESC data must be submitted to NGS in separate data sets. These will be inserted in the National Geodetic Survey Data Base. The foregoing implies that every horizontal control survey project (or several small projects submitted as one "job" - see below) will be received at NGS as two distinct data sets HZTL OBS and GEOD DESC data sets. The two data sets created for each horizontal control job must be submitted at the same time. JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING The basic unit or group of data is given the name "job." A horizontal control job can contain the data for a maximum of 9999 survey points - see the definition of "survey point" below. If the number of survey points in a horizontal control survey project exceeds this limit, the data must be divided and submitted in multiple jobs. A job will normally contain the data collected for one project (i.e., one unit of field work); however, several small projects can be included in one job, even though they may have no points in common. The preferred determining factor in selecting several small horizontal control survey projects for inclusion in any one job is geographic proximity. A two-character alphanumeric job code must be assigned to each horizontal control job submitted by an organization. The job code, along with the data set type, the name of the submitting agency, and the data set creation date will serve to uniquely identify each data set received by NGS. The first character of the two-character job code must always be a letter; the second character may be either a letter or a number (1 through 9). The preferred method of assigning job codes is to begin with Al and end with ZZ, i.e., Al, A2, ..., A9, Bl, ..., Zl, ..., Z9, AA, AB, ..., ZZ. This allows for a total of 910 uniquely-identified horizontal control jobs to be submitted by any one organization. Should this sequence be exhausted, the job codes may then be assigned again from the beginning - Al, A2, etc. 1-1 A horizontal control point is defined as any survey point whose position has been previously determined and is in the NGS Data Base, whose position is to be determined in an adjustment of the submitted HZTL OBS data, or whose (adjusted) position is available from another source. A survey point is defined as any point which has one or more directions, angles (horizontal or vertical), distances or vectors measured to it or from it. A survey point may be a monumented (or otherwise permanently marked) control point, a reference mark or azimuth mark, a temporary point (not permanently marked and therefore non- recoverable) such as an auxiliary point, or an unmonumented recoverable landmark (usually an intersection station) such as a flagpole or church spire. An eccentric instrument setup and eccentric target (or reflector) also qualify as survey points under this definition. Each survey point in a horizontal control job must be assigned a unique four-digit station serial number within the range 0001 through 9999. A unique station serial number not only identifies the various observations within the HZTL OBS data set but is the project specific link between data in the HZTL OBS data set and data in the GEOD DESC data set. Normally there are many survey points in a horizontal control job which are not intended as control points. These points are, by their nature, peripheral to a control point. Examples of peripheral points are unoccupied reference and azimuth marks. Eccentric instrument setups and eccentric targets (or reflectors) are treated as peripheral points if the respective eccentric observations are to be reduced to center. This is usually the case when the eccentric point is not permanently marked. But, if an eccentric point is offset more than 10 meters from the control point to which it belongs (even though it may be unmarked), or if the eccentric point is permanently marked (e.g., a reference mark is occupied), then the respective eccentric observations should not be reduced to center, and the eccentric point should be treated as another control point. When an eccentric instrument setup is utilized in a field project, whose offset distance from the respective control point does not exceed 10 meters, the respective eccentric observations should be reduced to center by the submitting organization and coded in the HZTL OBS deck as if the control station had been occupied. If, for any reason, this is not desired, the eccentric point in question must be carried as a control point and must be assigned a four-digit station serial number of its own. An unoccupied reference or azimuth mark has one or more directions, angles, and/or distances measured to it but not from it. A reference mark or azimuth mark which is occupied as a part of the survey scheme (e.g., as an eccentric occupation of the respective control point) should always be treated as a distinct control point. However, a reference or azimuth mark with directions, angles, and/or distances measured from it (as well as to it) for the purpose of verifying and/or supplementing the observations which tie together the control point and its peripheral points may remain a peripheral point. The observations (directions, angles, and/or distances) which link the peripheral points with the respective control points must appear in the appropriate subset of the HZTL OBS data set (see Chapter 2). 1-2 Figures 1-1 and 1-2 illustrate an assignment of station serial numbers to control points and to their peripheral points (reference marks, azimuth marks, and/or eccentric points). The numbering system provides unique identifiers for all the survey points. An AZ MK or RM which is being treated as a control point must not also be identified as a peripheral point in the OBS data set. The same station serial number must be consistently used throughout the OBS or DESC data set of a horizontal control job. As stated in the INTRODUCTION, a horizontal control job consists of two separate data sets - the HZTL OBS data set and the GEOD DESC data set. The HZTL OBS data set may contain a greater number of points than the corresponding GEOD DESC data set. This might occur when there is no descriptive data for the peripheral points and for unmarked (auxiliary) points. Station descriptions or recovery notes are required only for recoverable survey points. Apart from the peripheral points, there may be a number of nonrecoverable control points (either originally unmarked or confirmed lost) which must be carried along in the OBS data set for network integrity purposes. There may also be recovery notes for stations not used or found destroyed in a survey. Observations for such stations would not be in the OBS data set. In isolated instances, there may be recoverable control points for which no descriptive data are available. In these instances the submitting organization should write a description for each recoverable control point and include it in the GEOD DESC data set. When recording data on magnetic tape or floppy disks (see MEDIA FOR SUBMITTING DATA), the two data sets of a horizontal control job must be submitted in separate files. These files may be on the same disk/reel of tape or on different disks/reels. In any case, the first record of every data set (see Chapters 2 and 3) must contain information positively identifying the data and project: the job code, the data set type, the name of the submitting agency, and the data set creation date. MEDIA FOR SUBMITTING DATA Although, in principle, any computer-readable, general-purpose data-recording medium can be handled, the two media currently acceptable to NGS are the 5 1/4 inch and 3 1/2 inch floppy disk and the standard 1/2 inch magnetic tape. Magnetic tape should be used only as the medium for submitting large volumes of data. Floppy disks are preferred when submitting a single job or jobs which contain small to medium amounts of data. When data are submitted on floppy disks, the files must be created using an MS DOS operating system and be in ASCII character format. The following information must be provided for each floppy disk submitted: 1. Complete name and address of the submitting agency. 2. Number of files and the name of each file on the disk. 3. Method of keying data and machine used (e.g., MTEN on the IBM PC). 4. Disk format (360 k, 750 k, 1.2 m, or 1.4 m are acceptable). 5. Name and telephone number of the person to be contacted in case of difficulty with the data. 1-3 This information should be furnished in a letter of transmittal. A copy should be packed with the data set. When the data are submitted as files of formatted records on magnetic tape, the following information is expected to be given for each reel of tape: 1. Name and address of the submitting agency. 2. Reel number or identification symbol assigned by the submitting agency. 3. Number of files and contents of each file by job code and data type (e.g. Al HZTL OBS, XX GEOD DESC, etc.). 4. Computer system on which the tape was created (e.g., IBM 360/XXX, CDC 6600, etc.) 5. Internal label information (e.g. non-labeled, standard IBM label, etc.). 6. Number of tracks (7 or 9) and parity (even or odd). 7. Recording density (556, 800 or 1600 BPI). 8. Record length (LRECL) and block size (BLKSIZE). 9. Character representation code (BCD, EBCDIC, etc.) and keytape equipment designation, if applicable. 10. Name and phone number of person to be contacted in case of difficulty with the data. This information should be furnished in a letter of transmittal. A copy should be packed with the data set. A letter describing and itemizing the data transmitted should always be prepared for each data shipment. One copy should be enclosed with the data shipment, one sent by separate mail to NGS, and another copy retained by the sender. See ANNEX K for current mailing instructions. In every case, the submitting organization should retain a backup copy of all the data shipped until NGS acknowledges receipt of the data. CODING, KEYING, AND DATA VERIFICATION All data submitted to NGS for insertion into the National Geodetic Survey Data Base must be coded and keyed in strict conformity with the formats and specifications contained in this publication. In addition, the keying of all data must be verified. 1-6 Detailed formats and specifications for the coding and keying of horizontal control jobs are contained in Chapter 2 (HZTL OBS data) and in Chapter 3 (GEOD DESC data). The formats were designed to allow the keying and verification of the data to be accomplished on standard computer equipment, hence the 80-character record was adopted as the standard for all applications. When coding and keying the data entries, carefully insure that alphabetic characters (letters) will be keyed using the alphabetic keys, and that numeric characters (numbers) will be keyed using the numeric keys. In particular, miscoding and miskeying the following characters must be avoided: 0 - number "zero" 1 - number "one" 2 - number "two" 0 - letter "0" L - letter "L" Z - letter "Z" SPECIAL CHARACTERS In addition to the alphabetic characters (letters A through Z) and the numeric characters (numbers 0 through 9), only the following special characters are allowed: (*) asterisk (+) plus sign ( ) blank or space (-) minus sign or hyphen (,) comma (=) equal sign (.) period or (/) slash or solidus decimal point (() left parenthesis ($) dollar sign ()) right parenthesis SEQUENTIAL RECORD NUMBERING The first six characters of every record are reserved for a record sequence number. The purpose of numbering records sequentially is to insure that the proper sequence of individual records in a data set can be verified and, if necessary, restored. The sequencing numbers must be assigned in ascending order, starting with the first record (the Data Set Identification Record) and ending with the last record (the Data Set Termination Record). The preferred assignment of sequence numbers starts with 000010 on the first record in the data set (the Data Set Identification Record) and increments by 10 on each successive record. This numbering system allows up to nine records to be inserted between any two originally numbered records without the necessity of renumbering any records in the data set. Even when a large block of omitted records must be inserted, only a few of the existing records will have to be renumbered. To allow for the detection of missing records, all insertions and/or deletions which deviate from the basic 000010, 000020, 000030, etc. "increment-by-ten" record sequence must be accounted for in the letter of transmittal. Discounting any after-the-fact insertions, the above-described sequential numbering system will permit a maximum of 99,999 uniquely-numbered records in any one data set. Should there ever be a need for a greater number of records in a data set, retain only the last six digits of the higher sequence numbers, i.e., ... 999980, 999990, 000000, 000010, etc. 1-7 INTENTIONALLY BLANK 1-8 Chapter 2 HORIZONTAL OBSERVATION (HZTL OBS) DATA INTRODUCTION The purpose of this chapter is to provide detailed specifications and instructions for the coding and keying of an observation data set for a horizontal control job. As explained in Chapter 1, a horizontal control job consists of two distinct data sets which must be submitted together. The companion data set to the horizontal observation (HZTL OBS) data set discussed in this chapter is the data set which contains descriptions and/or recovery notes for the control points in the horizontal control job. The descriptive (GEOD DESC) data set is discussed in Chapter 3. HZTL OBS DATA SET RECORDS The data which constitute an HZTL OBS data set are organized into ten categories, which are as follows: Project Data Horizontal Direction Data Global Positioning System Data Horizontal Angle Data Vertical Angle/Zenith Distance/Level Data Distance Data Azimuth Data Survey Equipment Data Control Point Data Fixed Control Data Within these categories, the data have been grouped into one or more logical units called "records." A record is a string of characters containing data coded according to a specific format. Every record in an HZTL OBS data set consists of 80 characters or "columns" (standard punched card image). Within each record, the 80 columns are divided into fixed-length "character fields," each field reserved for a specific data item. Accordingly, for every desired data item, a field of appropriate length exists into which the data item is entered. The set of rules by which the specific data items are converted into strings of alphanumeric characters is known as the "format" of that record. The types of records which may appear in an HZTL OBS data set are listed in Table 2-1 on the following page. Each type of record has been given a name. A block diagram portraying the data fields and a brief description of each data field in that record can be found in the FORMAT DIAGRAMS. 2-1 TABLE 2-1 HORIZONTAL OBSERVATION DATA SET RECORDS 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 � [FIRST RECORD] � � *aa* - Data Set Identification Record � � *10* - Project Title Record � � *11* - Project Title Continuation Record � � *12* - Project Information Record � � *13* - Geodetic Datum and Ellipsoid Record � � *20* - Horizontal Direction Set Record � � *21* - Horizontal Direction Comment Record (Optional) � � *22* - Horizontal Direction Record � � *25* - GPS Occupation Header Record � � *26* - GPS Occupation Comment Record (optional) � � *27* - GPS Occupation Measurement Record � � *28* - GPS Clock Synchronization Record � � *29* - GPS Clock Synchronization Comment Record (optional) � � *30* - Horizontal Angle Set Record � � *31* - Horizontal Angle Comment Record (Optional) � � *32* - Horizontal Angle Record � � *40* - Vertical Angle Set Record � � *41* - Vertical Angle Comment Record (Optional) � � *42* - Vertical Angle Record � � *45* - Observed Difference of Elevation Record � � *46* - Observed Difference of Elevation Comment Record (optional) � � *47* - Observed Difference of Elevation Continuation Record � � *50* - Taped Distance Record � � *51* - Unreduced Distance Record � � *52* - Reduced Distance Record � � *53* - Unreduced Long Line Record � � *54* - Reduced Long Line Record � � *55* - Distance Comment Record (Optional) � � *60* - Laplace / Astronomic Azimuth Record � � *61* - Geodetic Azimuth Record � � *70* - Instrument Record � � *80* - Control Point Record � � *81* - Control Point Record (UTM/SPC) � � *82* - Reference or Azimuth Mark Record � � *83* - Bench Mark Record [discontinued-Use *86* record instead] � � *84* - Geoid Height Record (Optional) [discontinued-Use *86*] � � *85* - Deflection Record (Optional) � � *86* - Orthometric Height, Geoid Height, Ellipsoid Height Record � � *90* - Fixed Control Record � � [LAST RECORD] � � *aa* - Data Set Termination Record � 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 ______________________________________________________________________ Note: The symbol "aa" denotes the two-character job code assigned by the submitting organization - see Chapter 1. 2-2 Except for the first and last records of the data set, the second character field of each record (columns 7-10) contains a two-digit numerical data code, preceded and followed by an asterisk, which specifies the format type for that record (*10*,*11*,...,*90* - see Table 2-1). In the first and last records of the data set (the Data Set Identification Record and the Data Set Termination Record) the second character field (columns 7-10) contains the two-character alphanumeric job code assigned by the submitting organization (*A1*,*A2*,...., *ZZ* - see Chapter 1). The first character field of every record (columns 1-6) is reserved for the respective record sequence number - see Chapter 1. The remaining portion of each record (columns 11-80) contains character fields which are unique to each type of record. STRUCTURE OF THE HZTL OBS DATA SET The first record of an HZTL OBS data set must be the Data Set Identification Record. It contains the required information to identify the data set and to correlate it with its companion GEOD DESC data set - job code, data type (HZTL OBS), name of submitting organization, and date the data set was created. The last record of the data set must be the Data Set Termination Record. It is the only other record in the data set containing the job code that appears in the same field (columns 7-10) on the Data Set Identification Record. The HZTL OBS data set is bracketed by these two delimiting records. The data in between may pertain to one or more units of field work. The field observation data for several horizontal control survey projects may be submitted in one HZTL OBS data set under the same job code, provided that the total number of control points does not exceed 9999 (see Chapter 1). When two or more projects are included in one job, each project must be grouped to form a complete unit. Each project must begin with a *10* record, contain any number of the other types of records in proper sequence, and terminate with one or more *90* records. TABLE 2-2 - HZTL OBS STRUCTURE � Data Set Identification Record � � *10* record � � � :::: � First Project � � *90* record � � � *10* record � � � :::: � Second Project � � *90* record � � � � � � :::: � :::: � � � � � *10* record � � � :::: � Last Project � � *90* record � � � Data Set Termination Record � 훤袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� 2-3 A horizontal control survey project is defined as a unit of field work containing a number of survey points (control points and peripheral points - see Chapter 1) which are connected by observations - horizontal directions, horizontal angles, vertical angles, distance measurements, and/or Global Positioning System (GPS) phase measurements. When coded as a part of an HZTL OBS data set, a project is a block of records comprising record groups arranged in the following order: Project Data (*10*-Series) Records: *10*,*11*,*12*,*13* records Horizontal Direction Data (*20*-Series) Records: *20*,*21*,*22*,...,*22* for first set of horizontal directions *20*,*21*,*22*,...,*22* for second set of horizontal directions :::: *20*,*21*,*22*,...,*22* for last set of horizontal directions Global Positioning Systems Data (*20*-Series) Records: *25*,*26*,*27*,*27* for first set of GPS data *25*,*26*,*27*,*27* for second set of GPS data :::: *25*,*26*,*27*,*27* for last set of GPS data *28*,*29* for each clock synchronization (These records may be in any order within the GPS data series records) Horizontal Angle Data (*30*-Series) Records: *30*,*31*,*32*,...,*32* for first set of horizontal angles *30*,*31*,*32*,...,*32* for second set of horizontal angles :::: *30*,*31*,*32*,...,*32* for last set of horizontal angles Vertical Angle/Zenith Distance/Level Data (*40*- Series) Records: *40*,*41*,*42*,...,*42* for first set of vertical angles *40*,*41*,*42*,...,*42* for second set of vertical angles :::: *40*,*41*,*42*,...,*42* for last set of vertical angles *45*,*46*,*47* for first elevation difference *45*,*46*,*47* for second elevation difference *45*,*46*,*47* for last elevation difference Distance Data (*50*-Series) Records: *50*,*55* for each taped distance *51*,*55* for each unreduced line-of-sight distance *52*,*55* for each reduced line-of-sight distance *53*,*55* for each unreduced long-line distance *54*,*55* for each reduced long-line distance 2-4 Azimuth Data (*60*-Series) Records: *60* for each observed astronomic/Laplace azimuth in the project *61* for each geodetic azimuth used in the project Survey Equipment Data (*70*) Records: *70* for each item of survey equipment used in the project Survey Point Data (*80*-Series) Records: *80* or *81* for first control point *82* for each peripheral RM or AZ MK at first control point *85*,*86*, as applicable, for first control point *80* or *81* (possibly *82*) for second control point *82* for each peripheral RM or AZ MK at second control point *85*,*86*, as applicable, for second control point :::: *80* or *81* (possibly *82*) for last control point *82* for each peripheral RM or AZ MK at last control point *85*,*86*, as applicable, for last control point Fixed Control Data (*90*) Records: *90* for each control point published by the NGS. PROJECT DATA RECORDS *10* - Project Title Record *11* - Project Title Continuation Record *12* - Project Information Record *13* - Geodetic Datum and Ellipsoid Record The project data records, identified by *10*-series data codes, are listed above. The *10* record which contains the title of the project is always required; a *11* record is required only if the project title exceeds the 70-character field allowed on the *10* record. Do not divide words between the *10* and *11* records. The *12* record, which contains the date and general location of the survey, the survey method employed and the order classification of the survey, is always required. The *13* record defines the geodetic datum with respect to which geodetic positions, deflections of vertical, geoid heights, and/or ellipsoidal distances given in this project are specified. This record is required only if the geodetic datum is other than the North American Datum of 1983 (NAD 83). The entries on these records (see FORMAT DIAGRAMS) are self- explanatory; however, the following data items will be explained in greater detail: Project Title: The elements of a good horizontal control survey project title should include (1) the order of accuracy of the survey, (2) the type of the survey, and (3) the geographic locality of the survey. Since the first two elements are coded elsewhere (*12* record), only the geographic locality of the survey needs to be spelled out in the title. The use of geographic locality alone for the title of a horizontal control survey project has traditionally been the practice of NGS and its predecessors. 2-5 In general, the title by which the project is known to the submitting agency should be used, supplemented to reflect geographic locality, as required. If the project is best described as covering an area network (triangulation or trilat- eration), give the geographic locality covered by the survey (e.g., KING COUNTY). If the project is generally linear such as an arc of triangulation or trilateration, or a traverse which is not confined within one locality, then give the geographic localities of its endpoints, in the order of the progress of the survey (e.g., CHARLESTON TO CAPE ROMAIN). Unless it is a part of the geographic locality name, omit the state or country designation if only one state or country is involved. This information will be coded on the *12* record. Otherwise, use abbreviations listed in ANNEX A. Omit commas, periods, etc., and abbreviate in the interest of fitting the entire title on the *10* record, if possible. Survey Method: A one-digit code is provided on the *12* record to specify the survey method used - triangulation (1), trilateration (2), traverse (3), or GPS (4). For horizontal control survey projects in which more than one survey method is prominent, enter the code for that survey method which best character-izes the project as a whole. Order and Class of Survey: A two-digit code is provided on the *12* record to specify the order of accuracy of the survey. The first digit of this code reflects the order and the second digit the class of the survey in accordance with the Standards and Specifications for Geodetic Control Networks, prepared and published by the Federal Geodetic Control Committee (FGCC), Rockville, MD (September 1984). In addition to the five horizontal control survey categories defined in this publication, two other survey categories need to be considered - surveys of the Trans-Continental Traverse (TCT) type, and surveys of lower-than-third-order accuracy. The respective two-digit codes are as follows: AA - AA Order Interferometric Positioning A0 - A Order Interferometric Positioning B0 - B Order Interferometric Positioning 00 - Trans-Continental Traverse 10 - First Order 21 - Second Order Class I 22 - Second Order Class II 31 - Third Order Class I 32 - Third Order Class II 40 - Lower Than Third Order The order-and-class code assigned to a horizontal control survey project should reflect the procedures and specifications by which the main-scheme network was observed. It is understood that many times there are supplemental control points and intersected landmarks to which observations of a lesser order of accuracy are made. When well-defined parts of a project fall into different order- and-class categories, consideration should be given to dividing the project accordingly and submitting the parts as individual projects. If this is not practical, assign an order-and-class code to the entire project which corresponds to the highest order of accuracy observed (i.e., if networks of both lst Order and 2nd Order Class I appear in a horizontal control survey project, assign order-and- class code 10 to the project as a whole). In this case, however, special care 2-6 must be taken to correctly identify the order and type of each horizontal control point on the corresponding *80* or *81* record, according to which order of accuracy main-scheme network the control point belongs - see section entitled SURVEY POINT DATA RECORDS and also see ANNEX E. DATE AND TIME The date the HZTL OBS data set was created must appear on the Data Set Identification Record, and the dates on which survey operations commenced and terminated must be entered on one of the project data records (*12* record). In addition, character fields for the date and time of observation are provided on all observation data records. Throughout the HZTL OBS data set, date and time are to be coded as follows: Date: The full date is coded as an eight-digit integer number consisting of four two-digit groups denoting (from left to right) the last whole century, number of full years since the last turn of century, month of the year, and day of the month (CCYYMMDD). When the century is omitted, the date is coded as a six-digit integer number denoting the year, month, and day (YYMMDD). If the day is not known, leave the last two columns of the field blank; if the month is not known, leave the last four columns of the field blank. For example, 8 February 1970 would be coded as follows: 1. Full date is known: 19700208 or 7002 08 2. Day of the month is not known: 197002 or 7002 3. Month of the year is not known: 1970 or 70 NOTE: The full date for GPS data will be coded as a six- digit integer number containing three two-digit groups denoting (left to right) the number of full years since the last turn of the century, month of the year, and the day of the month (YYMMDD). Time: A five-character field is reserved for the time of day on each observation data record. The time of day is coded as a four-digit integer number consisting of two two-digit groups denoting (from left to right) the hours and minutes of a 24-hour clock (HHMM), to be entered in the leftmost four columns of the field. The last column of the five-character time field is reserved for the appropriate one-letter time zone designation(see below). Except for GPS observations, the local zone time is to be used; in this manner ambiguities are avoided concerning the date, which is always assumed to be the "local" date (i.e., the date changes at local midnight). NOTE: The time of GPS data must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC), otherwise known as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or ZULU time. Time Zone: A time zone is a geographic region in which uniform time differing by an integer number of hours from the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) is maintained by law. In theory, a time zone extends 7-1/2 degrees in longitude east and west of a "time meridian" whose longitude is a multiple of 15 degrees (since the Earth rotates 360 degrees in 24 hours, 15 degrees of longitude difference equals one hour of time difference). In practice, the lines which separate adjacent time zones follow political boundaries and are therefore rather irregular. Associated with every time zone is a "time zone description" - an integer number positive west of Greenwich and negative east of Greenwich - 2-7 which represents the number of hours which must be added (algebraically) to the local zone time in order to obtain the corresponding GMT. The time zone description is reduced by one hour when the standard zone time is changed to daylight-saving time. Instead of the numerical time zone descriptions, it is more convenient to use the U.S. Navy one-letter codes which uniquely identify every time zone around the world. In this system, GMT is the "Z" (Zulu) Time Zone. Time zones east of Greenwich are identified by letters A,B,C, etc., through L, with the letter J omitted. Time zones west of Greenwich are identified by letters N,O,P, etc., through X. The letter Y is used to designate the western half of the time zone centered on the meridian of longitude 180 degrees (International Date Line), and the letter M is used to designate the eastern half of this zone. The worldwide use of the time zone descriptions and of the U.S. Navy one-letter designations is illustrated in ANNEX H. In the continental United States (US), Alaska (AK), and Hawaii (HI) the time zones are as follows: TABLE 2-3 - U.S. NAVY TIME ZONE DESIGNATIONS � STANDARD � DAYLIGHT � TIME 쿟IME ZONE � U.S. NAVY � � TIME � TIME � MERIDIAN 쿏ESCRIPT'N쿏ESIGNATION � � Atlantic AST 쿐astern EDT � 60W � +4 � Q (Quebec) � � Eastern EST 쿎entral CDT � 75W � +5 � R (Romeo) � � Central CST 쿘ountain MDT � 90W � +6 � S (Sierra) � � Mountain MST 쿛acific PDT � 105W � +7 � T (Tango) � � Pacific PST 쿧ukon YDT � 120W � +8 � U (Uniform)� � Yukon YST 쿌K/HI HDT � 135W � +9 � V (Victor) � � AK/HI HST 쿍ering BDT � 150W � +10 � W (Whiskey)� 훤袴袴袴袴袴袴賈袴袴袴袴袴袴賈袴袴袴袴袴鳩袴袴袴袴賈袴袴袴袴袴袴� If the time zone cannot be reliably ascertained, leave the last column of the time field blank. In this case, the time coded into the first four columns of the time field will be interpreted as the standard time in a zone determined on the basis of the longitude of the survey point from which the respective observation was taken. OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS In connection with classical survey operations, the term "observation" is used to denote one of many angular and linear measurements accomplished to quantify geometric relationships among survey points. In this context, the observations which occur in a horizontal control survey project can be classified as (1) horizontal directions, (2) horizontal angles, (3) vertical angles/zenith distances/leveling, and (4) distance measurements. Astronomic and geodetic azimuths used for orientation control may also be regarded as a type of observation. The HZTL OBS data set records which pertain to these observations are categorized as follows: *20*-Series Records - Horizontal Direction/GPS Data *30*-Series Records - Horizontal Angle Data *40*-Series Records - Vertical Angle/Zenith Distance/Level Data *50*-Series Records - Distance Data *60*-Series Records - Azimuth Data 2-8 Although the GPS data records are not observations as defined here, they are used in conjunction with observational phase measurements to derive the Data Transfer Records (ANNEX N). The basic element of an observation is a numerical value expressing the measured quantity in appropriate units of measurement. The units of measurement used consistently for all observations in the HZTL OBS data set are (1) sexagesimal degrees, minutes, seconds, and decimals of a second of arc for angular observations, and (2) meters and decimals of a meter for distance measurements. In addition to the respective measured quantity, other elements necessary to describe a horizontal control survey observation are (1) the type of observation, (2) the identity of the survey points from which and to which the observation is taken (standpoint and forepoint - see below), and (3) an estimate of the accuracy of the measured quantity. At times, auxiliary information such as the time of the observation and the height of the instrument and/or target are required in order to obtain proper spacial relationships. The type of observation is specified by the data code of the record. The survey points associated with an observation are identified by unique, job-specific station serial numbers (see below). A reliable, specific estimate of the overall accuracy of a horizontal control survey observation is rarely at hand. However, a generalized accuracy estimate can be inferred from several data items which are normally available - the order and class of survey, the type of survey equipment used, the number of replications (independent measurements) taken, and the rejection limit enforced. With the exception of the Job-Specific Instrument Number (see below), the observation data items related to the estimate of accuracy of a horizontal control survey observation will be treated in the section entitled ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. Several data items which appear on the observation records are treated below. Detailed explanation of other observation data items is given elsewhere in this chapter. Standpoint and Forepoint: In connection with a horizontal control survey observation, the point from which the observation is taken (e.g., the point which is occupied with a surveying instrument) will be referred to as the "standpoint" or "instrument station." The point to which the observation is taken (e.g., the point to which the foresight is directed) will be referred to as the "forepoint" or "target station." Station Serial Number: For the purpose of identifying the standpoint and forepoint on the observation records in a concise manner, each survey point (control point or peripheral point) is assigned a job-specific station serial number in the range 0001 to 9999. See Chapter 1 for a detailed explanation of the survey point numbering system. See also the next section entitled ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS. 2-9 Weather Code: Where applicable, five adjacent integer fields have been reserved on the observation records for one-digit codes. These will be referred to collectively as the "weather code." The first of these codes is a general problem indicator, which should be the digit "0" under normal conditions or the digit "1" if a problem was encountered during an observation, in which case the problem must be explained on one or more comment records to immediately follow the observation record. The other four one- digit codes are indicators of visibility, temperature, cloud cover, and wind, in that order. These indicators may assume the values 0, 1, or 2 (see Table 2-4 below). Any one of these five indicators may be left blank if the condition it represents is either not known or not applicable. TABLE 2-4 - WEATHER CODE �袴袴袴袴袴袴袴佶袴袴袴袴袴袴袴佶袴袴袴袴袴袴袴佶袴袴袴袴袴袴敲 � CODE *** � 0 � 1 � 2 � 勁袴袴袴袴袴袴曲袴袴袴袴袴袴袴曲袴袴袴袴袴袴袴曲袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� � PROBLEM � No Problem � See � Not � � INDICATOR � Encountered � Comment � Used � 픔컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� � VISIBILITY � Good � Fair � Poor � � INDICATOR � (Over 15MI) � (7MI to 15MI) � (Under 7MI) � 픔컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� � TEMPERATURE � Normal Range � Hot � Cold � � INDICATOR � (32~F to 80~F)� (Over 80~F) � (Below 32~F) � 픔컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� � CLOUD COVER � Clear � Partly Cloudy � Overcast � � INDICATOR � (Below 20%) � (20% to 70%) � (Over 70%) � 픔컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� � WIND � Calm � Moderate * � Strong ** � � INDICATOR � (Under 5MPH) �(5MPH to 15MPH)� (Over 15MPH) � 훤袴袴袴袴袴袴賈袴袴袴袴袴袴袴賈袴袴袴袴袴袴袴賈袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� *No effect on observations. **Possibly affecting observations. ***Blank if the condition is not known or not applicable. Job-Specific Instrument Number: The instrument used to accomplish a horizontal control survey observation must be known; the type of survey equipment (i.e., its resolution and expected accuracy) will be used to compute a standard error for the observation. In order to identify the instrument on the respective observation record in a concise manner, a unique three-digit number in the range 001 to 999 is to be assigned to each item of survey equipment used in the job. In cases where this may be impractical, a three-digit instrument number may be assigned to a class of survey equipment (e.g., all 100-foot uncalibrated steel tapes could be treated as one "instrument"), it being understood that such a class label must correctly reflect the type, resolution, and expected accuracy of all instruments covered by it. In a manner analogous to the assignment of station serial numbers, the instrument numbers are to be unique throughout a job, i.e., an item of survey equipment which appears in more than one project in the job must be consistently identified by the same number, while different items of survey equipment must be identified by different numbers throughout the HZTL OBS data set. A *70* record must be prepared for each item of survey equipment which has been assigned an instrument number - see SURVEY EQUIPMENT DATA RECORDS. 2-10 Height of Instrument and Height of Target: Horizontal control survey measurements are seldom observed literally mark-to-mark between the survey points involved. Normally, they are measured from a surveying instrument mounted on a tripod, wooden stand, or survey tower erected over the standpoint to a "target" (e.g., a survey light, retro-reflector, or remote instrument) mounted on a similar structure over the forepoint. The height of instrument (H.I.) is the vertical distance from the top of the occupied survey mark (standpoint) to the optical center of the surveying instrument, positive if the instrument is above the mark, and negative if it is below the mark. This distance is also known as the "height of telescope." Similarly, the height of target (H.T.) is the vertical distance from the top of the survey mark (forepoint) to the point above or below the mark which is used as the target for angular observations, or to the optical center of the retro-reflector (or of the antenna system of the remote instrument) in the case of electronic distance measurements. This distance is also known as the "height of object." Together with the elevation (and geoid height) of the respective survey points, the height of instrument and the height of target are desired data items in some horizontal control survey observations and required in others. For horizontal directions and horizontal angles, the height of instrument and the height of target are desired for the computation of skew normal and deflection corrections. For vertical angles and distances, the height of instrument and the height of target are required for the reduction of instrument-to-target measurements to mark-to-mark values. When the surveying instrument cannot be installed directly over the desired survey point and eccentric observations which are to be reduced to center are submitted, the height of instrument entered on the observation record must be the vertical distance between the top of the survey point mark to which the eccentric observations are to be reduced and the horizontal plane passing through the optical center of the horizontally-offset surveying instrument. The same considerations apply to an eccentric target, retro-reflector, or remote instrument. Visibility Code: Information concerning intervisibility between monumented control points is of great value to the local surveyor, who is not normally prepared to build survey towers over the control points to be occupied or sighted upon. To allow for recording this information, a provision was made for a one-letter visibility code on the observation records which pertains to line- of-sight observations. This code indicates whether or not the forepoint (i.e., a target which might be easily constructed over the forepoint) can be seen from ground level (height of eye) at the standpoint. 2-11 Since reference marks, azimuth marks, and the horizontal control point to which they belong are assumed to be intervisible at ground level, the visibility code is further used to indicate whether the forepoint is an RM or an AZ MK associated with the standpoint. The respective one-letter codes are listed below. If a conflict arises in the assignment of a visibility code, the hierarchy implied by this list should be followed. In each case, "forepoint" is meant to describe either a natural target or a simple target installed at height-of-eye level over the forepoint, and "ground" implies height-of-eye level at the respective standpoint. 1. N - Forepoint is not visible from ground. 2. R - Forepoint is an RM associated with standpoint. 3. Z - Forepoint is an AZ MK associated with standpoint. 4. V - Forepoint is visible from ground. The codes R and Z are to be used only for reference and azimuth marks which are associated with the standpoint, that is, in connection with observations from the respective horizontal control point to its own reference or azimuth marks, or possibly in connection with observations taken among the reference or azimuth marks belonging to the same control point. When the forepoint is an RM or AZ MK which belongs to another control point, the codes N or V, as applicable, should be used. The visibility code field should be left blank if the intervisibility between the respective standpoint and forepoint is not known. ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS The station serial number (SSN) is a four-digit number in the range of 0001 to 9999, used to uniquely identify every survey point which appears in an HZTL OBS data set. The survey point numbering system was explained in detail in Chapter 1. To recapitulate, a survey point is defined as any point in a survey project which has one or more observations to it or from it. In a horizontal control network, a survey point is either a control point or a peripheral point. Control Points: A control point is a survey point whose geodetic position is to be determined by the survey project, or whose position has been determined in a previous survey. Examples of a control point are (1) a monumented (or otherwise permanently marked) triangulation, trilateration, traverse, or GPS station; (2) a recoverable landmark (usually an intersection station) such as a flagpole or church spire; or (3) an unmarked (and hence nonrecoverable) survey point which must be carried as a control point for network integrity purposes. A survey point which cannot be positioned because of insufficient observations, whose geodetic position is not available from other sources, and which does not qualify as a peripheral point (see below) must also be treated as a control point, in that such a survey point must be identified by a unique, station serial number (see *82* record under RECORD FORMATS). Each control point in a horizontal control job must be assigned a unique, four-digit station serial number. When more than one project appears in a job, care must be taken to insure that (1) the same station serial number is assigned to a control point which several of the projects may have in common, and that (2) different control points are assigned different station serial numbers throughout the horizontal control job. The station serial numbers assigned to control points in the OBS data set of a horizontal control job must be the same as those used to identify the same control points in the corresponding DESC data 2-12 set. In particular, any survey point for which a description and/or recovery note is to be submitted in the DESC data set must be identified by a unique, station serial number, i.e., it must be carried as a control point in the corresponding OBS data set. Peripheral Points: Peripheral points are survey points in the vicinity of a control point which are not intended for positioning, such as reference marks and azimuth marks. These points are still identified by unique, four-digit station serial numbers. Unmonumented eccentric instrument setups and eccentric targets/reflectors are also peripheral points if the respective observations are reduced to center. An eccentric point, RM, or AZ MK is not always treated as a peripheral point. If the eccentric instrument setup or target/reflector placement is made over a monumented (or otherwise permanently marked) point which can serve as a control point (e.g., when a reference mark is occupied), in many cases it will be desirable to treat the eccentric point as another control point. In any case, when an eccentric point is offset more than 10 meters from the respective control point, the eccentric observations should not be reduced to center (see next section), and the eccentric point should be treated as a control point, whether it is permanently marked or not. A RM or an AZ MK which has not been occupied (i.e., one which has one or more directions, angles, and/or distances measured to it but not from it) is a peripheral point. But, if it is to be positioned, treat it as another control point. An RM or AZ MK that is occupied as a part of the survey scheme (i.e., as an eccentric occupation of the respective control point) should always be treated as a distinct control point. An RM or AZ MK that has directions, angles, and/or distances measured from it (as well as to it) for the purpose of verifying and/or supplementing the observations which tie together the control point and its peripheral points may remain a peripheral point even though the RM or AZ MK may appear as a standpoint on an observation record in this particular case. The observations which establish the linkage between a peripheral point and its respective control point must appear among the observation data records. As a minimum, the following observations are required: 1. Eccentric Points: At least one angular observation (horizontal direction or horizontal angle) and one distance measurement, either from the eccentric point to the respective control point, or from the control point to the eccentric point. 2. Reference Marks: At least one angular observation (horizontal direction or horizontal angle) and one distance measurement from the respective control point to the RM in question. 3. Azimuth Marks: At least one angular observation (horizontal direction or horizontal angle) and one distance measurement from the respective control point to the AZ MK in question. 2-13 TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS When the surveying instrument cannot be installed directly over the desired control point (i.e., when the control point cannot be "occupied"), observations must be made with the instrument offset a short distance from the intended standpoint. Similarly, when the target, retro-reflector, or remote instrument cannot be installed directly over the intended forepoint, observations are made to a target, retro-reflector, or remote instrument which is offset a short distance from the respective control point. When such a condition exists, the offset point from which and/or to which the observations are actually taken is said to be "eccentric" with respect to the control point in question, which is referred to as the "center." Eccentric observations are normally "reduced to center" as a part of the field computation process. A correction is computed for each eccentric observation from the distance and direction of the offset. After such a correction is applied, the respective observation ceases to be "eccentric." For all practical purposes it is regarded as having been taken from the intended standpoint to the intended forepoint. As a general rule, eccentric observations should be reduced to center by the submitting agency and included in the HZTL OBS data set as normal (i.e., non- eccentric) observations. When eccentric observations are submitted, care must be taken to select one of the two possible methods of handling eccentric observations which is applicable to the eccentric point in question, and to identify the respective eccentric point accordingly - either as a peripheral point if Method A is applicable, or as a control point if Method B is applicable (see preceding section for definitions of "control point" and "peripheral point"). Method A: The eccentric observations are to be reduced to center. In this case, the eccentric point is identified as a peripheral point. When such a peripheral point is encountered as either a standpoint or forepoint on an observation record, the respective observation will be reduced to center, and the original (eccentric) observation will not be retained. This method is applicable only to eccentric points which are offset no more than 10 meters from the respective control point. For offsets of greater than 10 meters Method B is mandatory. Method B: The eccentric point is to be treated as a control point whether permanently marked or not. In this case, no reduction to center is involved, as the respective observations are not regarded as eccentric. The eccentric standpoint or forepoint is identified by a unique, four-digit station serial number just as any other control point (see preceding section). It is given a name (e.g., SMITH ECC, if the name of the respective control point is SMITH), and a *80* or *81* record containing its (approximate) geodetic position and elevation must appear among the *80*-series records. This method should be used for eccentric points which are permanently marked, regardless of the offset distance involved. Method B must always be used for eccentric points which are offset by more than 10 meters from the respective control point, whether the eccentric point is permanently marked or not. 2-14 ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS For every horizontal control survey observation, an estimate of the absolute accuracy of the measured quantity must be available for the purpose of assigning appropriate weight to that observation when it participates in the adjustment of the respective horizontal control network. The absolute accuracy of a measurement is defined as the degree to which the result of that measurement approximates the true value of the measured quantity. Since the true value of a direction, angle, or distance is not known, it then follows that the accuracy of a horizontal control survey observation can only be estimated (1) by comparing the results of different measurements of the same quantity, and (2) by analyzing the misclosures by which the measured quantities fail to satisfy geometric conditions in the respective horizontal control network (e.g., triangle misclosures). A horizontal control survey observation is rarely made as a single, isolated measurement. Once the required surveying equipment is set over the survey points in question, it is a common practice to measure the same quantity (direction, angle, or distance) several times within a short span of time, each complete measurement being carried out according to an observation scheme which has been carefully designed to eliminate instrumental errors (and possibly other constant and systematic errors as well). The advantage of "replication" is that large blunders can be detected and eliminated, and that the resulting group of measurements can be treated statistical as a random sample. Each measurement is corrected for any known constant and/or systematic error. Then the resulting corrected sample elements are screened for outliers (larger-than expected random errors which are suspected to be blunders), usually by the application of a fixed, empirical rejection limit, and the mean of the remaining measurements is used as the best approximation of the true value. Assuming that the blunders and/or outliers have been eliminated, and that constant and/or systematic errors from all known sources have been eliminated either by the observing procedure or by the application of computed corrections, other errors remain, as evidenced by a random disagreement (however small) which still normally exists among "corrected" sample elements. If another sample of measurements of the same quantity is taken with the same type of instrument but under different environmental conditions, the mean value of the second sample will normally differ from the first sample. If many such samples are taken, the mean values of the re-observed samples will be found to disagree in a random manner as well. The errors which remain after the blunders and outliers are eliminated and after the sample elements are corrected for constant and systematic errors are seen as random errors of two different kinds. Random errors of the first kind are those errors which manifest themselves as discrepancies among the elements of a sample. Since the presence and general magnitude of these errors are readily apparent when the elements of the sample are compared, random errors of the first kind are known as "sample-internal" or "internal" errors. Random errors of the second kind are those errors which remain constant for all measurements within a sample but vary in a random manner for samples which are reobserved under different conditions. Since they introduce the same bias into every measurement in the sample, the presence and general magnitude of these errors become apparent only when the mean values of several reobserved samples are compared, or when misclosures of geometric conditions in the 2-15 respective horizontal control network are analyzed. Because of this fact, random errors of the second kind are known as "sample- external" or "external" errors. The accuracy estimate needed to determine the proper weight for a horizontal control survey observation is the standard error (sigma) reflecting the combined effect of the internal and external errors which affect that observation. Such an estimate of the total uncertainty associated with the respective measured quantity is given by the vector sum (square root of the sum of squares) of the one-sigma estimates reflecting the contributions of the corresponding internal and external errors. A direct estimate of the contribution of the respective internal errors (i.e., the Internal Consistency Sigma - see below) can be obtained as the standard deviation of the computed sample mean; a value based upon experience may be given when the sample size is one. If no value is specified on the respective observation record (i.e., the field is left blank), a one-sigma estimate can be obtained as a function of the rejection limit and number of replications, or from a default value based on the type of survey equipment used, number of replications taken, and on the order- and-class of the survey. A direct estimate of the contribution of the respective external errors (i.e., the External Consistency Sigma - see below) is rarely at hand, as horizontal control survey observations are not normally re-accomplished by design under different environmental conditions for the purpose of evaluating the effect of the external errors. A value based on experience may be given; however, if no value is specified on the respective observation record (i.e., the field is left blank), a default value based on the survey equipment used, order-and-class of the survey, and on the type of the survey points involved will be assigned. In connection with triangulation projects, a collective estimate of the external error affecting horizontal directions (or horizontal angles) in that project will be recovered from the set of triangle misclosures when that project is first adjusted by NGS. The data items which pertain to the accuracy estimate of the respective horizontal control survey observation not treated elsewhere in this chapter are defined below. Number of Replications: Number of independent measurements of the same quantity, normally carried out within a short span of time (i.e., under the same environmental conditions) by the same personnel using the same equipment (i.e., sample size). In connection with horizontal control survey observations, it is the number of times a complete measurement procedure (observing scheme) is executed with the objective of obtaining a group of measurements the mean value of which is to be used as the observed quantity (e.g., number of positions in a set of horizontal directions). Rejection Limit: Maximum variation allowed in a group of measurements. The individual measurements which exceed this limit are normally dropped from the sample and hence do not enter into the computation of sample mean. For horizontal directions and horizontal angles, the rejection limit is expressed as the maximum deviation of the individual measurements from the respective sample mean. For vertical angles and for distance measurements, the rejection limit is expressed as the maximum spread between the individual observations included in the sample (i.e., maximum range). 2-16 Internal Consistency Sigma: One-sigma estimate reflecting the contribution of the sample-internal random errors to the total uncertainty associated with a measured quantity. In connection with horizontal control survey observations, a direct estimate of the effect of the respective internal errors is usually available as the standard deviation of the computed sample mean. See discussion above concerning the treatment of the accuracy estimate of an observation for which this data item is missing. External Consistency Sigma: One-sigma estimate reflecting the contribution of the sample-external random errors to the total uncertainty associated with a measured quantity. In connection with horizontal control survey observations, a direct estimate of the effect of the respective external errors is not normally available; however, a value based on experience may be given. See discussion above concerning the treatment of the accuracy estimate of an observation for which this data item is missing. HORIZONTAL DIRECTION DATA RECORDS *20* - Horizontal Direction Set Record *21* - Horizontal Direction Comment Record (Optional) *22* - Horizontal Direction Record The horizontal direction data records, identified by *20*-series data codes, are listed above; the block diagrams depicting the respective formats will be found under FORMAT DIAGRAMS. Since one horizontal direction by itself is meaningless, horizontal directions must be observed in sets of two or more directions. The respective observations are normally recorded in a field record book and later abstracted onto a standard form which is usually referred to as the "abstract of horizontal directions." As recorded on the "abstract," each direction consists of a group of "pointings" observed clockwise from the "initial" (direction to the first object sighted in the observing sequence), which is normally assigned a value of zero. For each forepoint included in the set, the horizontal direction value desired is the mean value of the respective group of pointings (in sexagesimal degrees, minutes, seconds, and decimals of second), corrected for eccentricity of the instrument and/or target, if applicable (see TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS). Each set of horizontal directions is to be submitted as a group of records which must begin with one *20* record. In addition to containing information which pertains to the set as a whole, the *20* record also contains the data items associated with the initial direction. Following the *20* record, there may be one or more *21* comment records. These comment records are optional, except when the problem indicator flag on the *20* record (first digit of the weather code) is "1", in which case at least one *21* record containing an explanation of the problem encountered is required. After the *21* record(s), or immediately after the *20* record if no *21* record(s) are present, one or more *22* records must follow, one for each additional direction observed in the set. Each of these *22* records must have the same standpoint designation and set number (see below) as the *20* record of that horizontal direction set. 2-17 When two or more sets of horizontal directions are observed at the same station, each set must be submitted as a separate, complete group of *20*-series records (i.e., a *20* record, one or more *21* records if applicable, followed by one or more *22* records). All sets observed at the same station must be assigned different set numbers and must appear as consecutive sets in the order of increasing set numbers among the *20*-series records. Set Number: The first set of observations associated with a survey control point is normally coded as 01. Subsequent sets are coded 02, 03, etc. Deviation from this procedure should be explained either in the comment records or in the transmitting letter to prevent someone unfamiliar with the original coding to think that the records were not coded or lost. Sets observed at peripheral eccentric points are considered to belong with the control point and must be numbered as if observed at the control station. Again, the set numbers of successive sets of horizontal directions observed at the same station (including peripheral stations) need not be consecutive, but they must be assembled in increasing order. Number of Objects Sighted in This Set: The number of forepoints to which directions were observed in the set of horizontal directions, including the initial equals the number of objects sighted in the set. This number minus one is equal to the number of *22* records which must appear behind the *20* record in that set. Date and Time: The date of observation is required (at least the year) and must appear on every *20* record. The time of observation, when available, is desired to indicate the approximate time of day; any time associated with the set of horizontal directions (e.g., time of first observation, mean time of the set, etc.) is acceptable. Both date and time become required items when one attempts to set parameters for an adjustment based upon date and time constraints. GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM DATA RECORDS *25* - GPS Occupation Header Record *26* - GPS Occupation Comment Record (Optional) *27* - GPS Occupation Measurement Record *28* - GPS Clock Synchronization Record *29* - GPS Clock Synchronization Comment Record (Optional) The Global Positioning System records, identified by the *25* - *29* data codes, are listed above; the block diagrams illustrating the respective formats will be found under FORMAT DIAGRAMS. Whereas observations of classical survey operations are recorded in ASCII format in this text, GPS observations containing code and phase data are recorded by the GPS receiver in a binary format that is unreadable without a translation (e.g., vector reduction) program. The information on the *25* to *29* records and the GPS code and phase measurements are required to derive the information in the GPS Data Transfer Format file (G-File) records: A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H (ANNEX N). A set of one *25* and two *27* records must exist for each independent occupation of a control point by a GPS receiver. The first *27* record indicates the time data recording was initiated plus associated occupation information; the second *27* indicates the time data recording was completed plus associated occupation information. Record the time and date referenced to UTC (or Greenwich Mean Time). 2-18 A *28* record, used with older receivers which do not recover time from the broadcast GPS signal, is required whenever GPS receivers must be time synchronized to the external time source, e.g., another receiver or a master time source. When using these "codeless" receivers, synchronization must be established between all receivers taking simultaneous measurements. Two synchronizations, normally one before and one after collecting the GPS observations, are required to check receiver clock drift and to verify that no time synchronization errors ("jumps") occurred during the observing period. The *28* record is not required for modern P-code receivers which may be referred to as codeless when in anti-spoofing mode. The station serial number, weather code, and job-specific instrument number fields are required on GPS records. These entries are fully explained in the section, OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS. Other entries in the GPS records are self explanatory. Job-Specific Data Media Data Identifier: Since the GPS observables (code and phase data) can not be practically accommodated in the formats of this text, they must be submitted in manufacturer specific or RINEX (Receiver Independent Exchange) data file formats. Depending upon the receiver type, one or more files may be generated. However, it is still necessary to associate a specific set of data file(s) to a specific occupation. This is done by the user who assigns a 10 character identifier for each station occupation. These identifiers are unique to a specific project and reflect information on the physical or digital labels of the phase data files. The sole function of the data media identifier is to provide to NGS a one-to-one correspondence between a control point occupation and a GPS data file. The standard format for the data media identifier can be found in ANNEX N. Antenna Height: The antenna height is the vertical distance from the indicated point of the occupied survey mark to the L1 phase center of the antenna. Slant, slope or offset heights are not acceptable. HORIZONTAL ANGLE DATA RECORDS *30* - Horizontal Angle Set Record *31* - Horizontal Angle Comment Record (Optional) *32* - Horizontal Angle Record The horizontal angle data records, identified by *30*-series data codes, are listed above; the block diagrams illustrating the respective formats will be found under FORMAT DIAGRAMS. Horizontal angles (clockwise), as opposed to horizontal directions, are normally observed in connection with surveys of low accuracy (e.g., third order or lower) using repeating theodolites and engineer's transits. The characteristic feature of these instruments is the double concentric motion about the vertical axis by means of which the horizontal circle can be set precisely to zero when one of the forepoints is sighted upon, and the desired horizontal angle to another forepoint can be "repeated"; i.e., measured several times in succession, each time allowing the horizontal circle reading to be incremented by the magnitude of the measured angle. The desired angular measure, expressed to a greater precision than the resolution of the respective instrument, is obtained when the total angle accumulated on the horizontal circle is divided by the number of "repetitions." The number of repetitions must not be confused with the number of replications, as one angle measurement by this method, involving any number of repetitions, constitutes but one determination of that angle (i.e., one replication). 2-19 Normally, several such determinations are made; the desired horizontal angle value is the mean value of the respective group of measurements (in sexagesimal degrees, minutes, seconds, and decimals of second), corrected for eccentricity of instrument and/or target, if applicable (see TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS). Two forepoints are involved with every horizontal angle observation; the value given must be the clockwise angle from the first (left) forepoint to the second (right) forepoint. Since a horizontal angle is a complete observation in itself, every horizontal angle may be submitted as a "set of size one," i.e., as a *30* record followed by one or more *31* comment records. These comment records are optional, except when the problem indicator on the *30* record (first digit of the weather code) is 1, in which case at least one *31* record containing an explanation of the problem encountered is required. When more than one angle is measured as a part of the same observing scheme (e.g., angle observation by Schreiber's method), the additional angles in the same set should be submitted as *32* records to follow after the *31* record or records, or immediately after the *30* record if no *31* records are present. In addition to the same standpoint designation, each of these *32* records must bear the same set number (see below) as the *30* record of that horizontal angle set. When two or more sets of horizontal angles are observed at the same station, each set must be submitted as a separate, complete group of *30*-series records (i.e., a *30* record, one or more *31* records if applicable, followed by one or more *32* records). All sets observed at the same station must be assigned different set numbers and must appear as consecutive sets in the order of increasing set numbers among the *30*-series records. If horizontal angles are to be reduced to center, the sets observed at peripheral eccentric points of the same control point must appear as members of the same sequence together with any set or sets observed directly over the corresponding control point. Set Number: Normally coded as 01, unless two or more sets of horizontal angles observed at the same standpoint (either between the same or between different forepoints), in which case these sets must appear adjacent among the horizontal angle data records. The first set in the sequence must be assigned a two-digit set number, e.g., 01, and each additional consecutive set bearing the same standpoint designation must be assigned a higher number, e.g., 02, 03, etc. For this purpose, sets observed at peripheral eccentric points are considered to belong with the respective control point and must be grouped accordingly. The set numbers of successive sets of horizontal angles observed at the same station need not be consecutive; however, they must be increasing. Number of Angles Observed in This Set: Total number of horizontal angles observed as a part of the same observing scheme. This number minus one equals the number of *32* records which must appear behind the respective *30* record in that set. Date and Time: Date of observation is required (at least the year) and must appear on every *30* record. Time of observation, where available, is desired to indicate the approximate time of day; any time associated with the horizontal angle observation (e.g., starting time, mean time, ending time, etc.) is acceptable. Both date and time become required items when one attempts to set parameters for an adjustment based upon date and time constraints. 2-20 VERTICAL ANGLE/ZENITH DISTANCE DATA RECORDS *40* - Vertical Angle Set Record *41* - Vertical Angle Comment Record (Optional) *42* - Vertical Angle Record The vertical angle/zenith distance data records, identified by *40*-series data codes, are listed above; the block diagrams illustrating the respective formats will be found under FORMAT DIAGRAMS. Vertical angles (or zenith distances) are observed in connection with classical horizontal control survey projects for the purpose of obtaining elevation differences between horizontal control points by trigonometric leveling. The elevation of one or more of the survey points involved must be reliably known from some other source. In addition to vertical angles and distances between survey points, the determination of the elevation differences by trigonometric leveling requires a knowledge of the geoid height at every survey point involved and of the deflection of vertical in the direction of each vertical angle observed at every standpoint. Since geoid heights and deflections of the vertical are seldom known, it is a common practice to assume a zero value for these quantities, and therefore only approximate results can normally be obtained. For this reason, vertical control should not be extended by this method without frequent ties to existing bench marks in the project area. Aside from the difficulties mentioned in the preceding paragraph, trigonometric leveling suffers from a large uncertainty due to atmospheric refraction. This uncertainty is brought about by the unpredictable nature of the irregular, preponderantly vertical bending of an optical ray due to the variation of the refraction gradient along its path. This effect of atmospheric refraction is the dominant source of the external random error associated with vertical angle observations. To control the influence of this external error, the magnitude of which grows with the length of the observed line, reciprocal vertical angles are often observed simultaneously or nearly simultaneously from both ends of the respective line. In a manner similar to other types of horizontal control survey observations, a vertical angle is usually measured several times in rapid succession following a standard observing scheme. The desired vertical angle value is the mean value of the respective group of measurements (in sexagesimal degrees, minutes, seconds, and decimals of second) accompanied by the appropriate angle code (see below) which identifies the value given as an elevation angle (E), depression angle (D), or a zenith distance (Z). Since the magnitude of the dominant external error affecting the vertical angle measurement is proportional to the length of the observed line (see above, the respective External Consistency Sigma is expressed as seconds of arc per kilometer.) A vertical angle is a complete observation in itself; hence every vertical angle may be submitted as a "set of size one," i.e., as a *40* record followed by one or more *41* comment records. These comment records are optional, except when the problem indicator on the *40* record (first digit of the weather code) is 1, in which case at least one *41* record containing an explanation of the problem encountered is required. When two or more vertical angles to different forepoints are measured at a station as a part of the same observing scheme, the additional vertical angles in the same set should be 2-21 submitted as *42* records to follow after the *41* record or records, or immediately after the *40* record if no *41* records are present. In addition to the same standpoint designation, each of these *42* records must bear the same set number (see below) as the *40* record of that vertical angle set. When two or more sets of vertical angles are observed at the same station, each set must be submitted as a separate, complete group of *40*-series records (i.e., a *40* record, one or more *41* records if applicable, followed by one or more *42* records). All sets observed at the same station must be assigned different set numbers and must appear as consecutive sets in the order of increasing set numbers among the *40*-series records. For this purpose, sets observed at peripheral eccentric points of the same control point must appear as members of the same sequence together with any set or sets observed directly over the corresponding control point. Set Number: Normally coded as 01, unless there are two or more sets of vertical angles observed at the same standpoint (either to the same or to different forepoints), in which case these sets must appear adjacent among the vertical angle data records. The first set in the sequence must be assigned a two- digit set number, e.g., 01, and each additional consecutive set bearing the same standpoint designation must be assigned a higher number, e.g., 02, 03, etc. For this purpose, sets observed at peripheral eccentric points are considered to belong with the respective control point and must be grouped accordingly. The set numbers of successive sets of vertical angles observed at the same station need not be consecutive; however, they must be increasing. Number of VAs or ZDs Observed in This Set: Number of forepoints to which vertical angles (or zenith distances) were observed as a part of the same observing scheme. This number minus one equals the number of *42* records which must appear behind the respective *40* record in that set of vertical angles. Date and Time: Date of observation is required (at least the year) and must appear on every *40* record. The full date and the time of the vertical angle observation to each forepoint involved should be supplied whenever possible, so that any search based on date and time can be made for simultaneous or nearly simultaneous reciprocal vertical angle observations. For this purpose, a time field appears on the *42* record as well as on the *40* record. Angle Code: Vertical angles are measured with respect to the direction of the gravity vector at the respective standpoint by theodolites or transits equipped with appropriate vertical circles. Depending on the instrument, the origin (zero graduation mark) of the vertical circle points either in a direction perpendicular to that of the gravity vector, in which case the origin of the vertical circle lies in the local astronomic horizon, or else it points in the direction opposite to that of the gravity vector, in which case the origin of the vertical circle indicates the local astronomic zenith. When the zero of the vertical circle defines the astronomic horizon, the vertical angle measured is an "elevation angle" or a "depression angle" depending on whether the object sighted is above or below the astronomic horizon. When the zero of the vertical circle points in the direction of the astronomic zenith, the vertical angle measured is a "zenith distance." The zenith distance of an object above the astronomic horizon will be less than 90 2-22 degrees, while the zenith distance of an object below the astronomic horizon will be greater than 90 degrees. The angle code is a one-letter indicator of the type of the vertical angle given. The three possible codes are as follows: E - elevation angle D - depression angle Z - zenith distance LEVEL DATA RECORDS *45* - Observed Difference of Elevation Records *46* - Observed Difference of Elevation Comment Record *47* - Observed Difference of Elevation Continuation Record The difference of elevation data records, identified by *40*- series data codes, are listed above; the block diagrams illustrating the respective formats will be found under FORMAT DIAGRAMS. Differences of elevation are observed in connection with classical horizontal control survey projects in order to maintain an observed difference of elevation relationship between two horizontal control points for the purpose of data reduction. Both horizontal control points generally do not have established vertical elevations. However, either one of these two control points could already have an established and published elevation. In a manner similar to other types of horizontal control survey observations, a difference of elevation is usually measured at least twice (once in the forward direction and once in the reverse or backward direction) as standard observing practice. The desired difference of elevation is then the mean value of the two respective differences of elevation. However, each level running (i.e., forward and backward) can be considered as an independent observation and can be coded as a separate observed difference of elevation data set. Since a difference of elevation is a complete observation in itself, each observation is submitted as a *45* record, followed by one or more *46* comment records, followed by a *47* record. The comment records are optional, except when the problem indicator on the *45* record (first digit of the weather code) is 1, in which case at least one *46* record containing an explanation of the problem encountered is required. The *47* record must bear the same standpoint designation as the *45* record preceding it. When two or more sets of differences of elevation are observed at the same station, each set must be submitted as a separate, complete group of *40*-series records (i.e., a *45* record, one or more *46* records if applicable, followed by a *47* record). Number of Replications: The number of replications for a single difference of elevation observation is one. If the difference of elevation is the mean value of two level runnings of the same section (i.e., forward and backwards) then the number of replications is coded as 2. 2-23 Date and Time: The date of observation is required (at least the year) and must appear on every *45* record. The full date and time for the leveling observation should be supplied whenever possible. The observation time coded should be the mid-time for the running of the section. DISTANCE DATA RECORDS *50* - Taped Distance Record *51* - Unreduced Distance Record *52* - Reduced Distance Record *53* - Unreduced Long Line Record *54* - Reduced Long Line Record *55* - Distance Comment Record (Optional) The distance data records, identified by *50*-series data codes, are listed above; the block diagrams illustrating the respective formats will be found under FORMAT DIAGRAMS. Submit a *50*, *51*, *52*, *53*, or *54* record, followed by one or more *55* comment records, for every distance determination in the horizontal control survey project. The comment records are optional, except when the problem indicator (first digit of the weather code) is 1, in which case at least one *55* record containing an explanation of the problem encountered must follow the respective *50*, *51*, or *52* distance record. The weather code has been omitted on the *53* and *54* long-line records. In every case, the desired distance value is the mean value of the respective group of replicated measurements to which all corrections applicable to that type of distance measurement have been applied (in meters and decimals of meter), further corrected for eccentric setup at either end of the measured line, if applicable (see TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS). It must be accompanied by the appropriate distance code (see below) which identifies the distance value given as to its type. The *50* record is intended for distances measured with either calibrated or uncalibrated (i.e., standardized or not standardized) steel or invar tapes. Included are distances consisting of any number of segments taped horizontally, taped distances consisting of any number of segments which have all been reduced individually to a common horizontal reference surface (other than the sea level or the ellipsoid), and one-segment unreduced taped distances (less than or equal to one tape length) measured along a slope. The limitation to only one segment in this last case is forced by the additional data items (the elevation difference between the respective marks and the heights of tape supports over the marks) required for each such taped dis- tance segment. Excluded are taped distances which have been reduced to sea level (geoid), to the ellipsoid, or to mark-to- mark, for which the *52* record should be used. In every case, the respective standardization, catenary, and temperature corrections, as applicable to the method of measurement and/or to the equipment used, are assumed to have been applied. The *51* record is intended for unreduced slant-range distances under 100 kilometers measured by electronic distance-measuring equipment (DME). Included are line-of-sight instrument-to-reflector distances measured by electro-optical DME and master-to-remote distances measured by microwave DME with a resolution (i.e., smallest directly readable measurement unit) of 1 centimeter or better. 2-24 Excluded are distances measured to a precision coarser than 1 centimeter (because the respective Rejection Limit, Internal Consistency Sigma, and External Consistency Sigma should be expressed in different units), which may be submitted as *53* records. In every case, the respective instrument and/or reflector calibration corrections and refraction correction, as applicable to the method of measurement and/or to the equipment used, are assumed to have been applied. The *52* record is intended for taped distances, and for distances under 100 kilometers measured by electronic DME with a precision of 1 centimeter or better, which have been reduced (1) to sea level (i.e., to the geoid), (2) to the ellipsoid (either NAD 83 or as specified on the *13* record), or (3) to mark-to-mark. For the same reason given in the preceding paragraph, reduced distances measured to a coarser precision than 1 centimeter should be submitted as *54* records. In every case, the distance given is assumed to be the appropriately reduced value corresponding to the mean of the respective sample of distance measurements to which all applicable corrections have been applied. Among the required data items are elevations (and of the geoid heights, if applicable) which were used in the reduction process (possibly different than those provided on the corresponding *80*-series records). The preponderant external random errors affecting precisely taped distances or line-of-sight distances measured by fine-resolution electronic DME arise out of the inadequacy of the mathematical models used to correct the respective distance measurements for distance-dependent systematic errors, such as the temperature and catenary corrections in case of taped distances, or the refraction correction in case of distances measured by precise electro- optical or electro-magnetic DME. The magnitude of the respective external random errors is therefore also proportional to the length of the measured line. For this reason, the External Consistency Sigma on the *50*, *51*, and *52* records is expressed as a parts-per-million (ppm) value. The *53* and *54* records are counterparts of the *51* and *52* records intended, respectively, for unreduced and reduced long- line distances (100 kilometers and longer) measured with either fine or coarse resolution by an indirect method. Examples of such long-line distances are the antenna-to- antenna spatial chords and the corresponding reduced sea-level (geoidal), ellipsoidal, or mark-to-mark distances derived from line-crossing measurements made with a long-range, airborne electro-magnetic DME (e.g. HIRAN), or obtained by extraterrestrial techniques (e.g., VLBI). These records may also be used, respectively, for unreduced and reduced slant-range distances under 100 kilometers measured directly by a coarse-resolution DME. Since the preponderant external random errors associated with long-line and/or coarse-resolution distance measurements do not normally exhibit any relationship with the length of the respective line, the External Consistency Sigma on the *53* and *54* records is expressed in meters. Date and Time: Date of observation is required (at least the year) and must appear on every distance observation record. Time of observation, where available, is desired to indicate the approximate time of day; any time associated with the distance observation (e.g., starting time, mean time, ending time, etc.) is acceptable. 2-25 Distance Code: A one-letter indicator of the type of distance involved. This indicator must appear immediately following the distance field on the distance observation records. The possible distance codes are as follows: 1. Unreduced Distances: T - distance taped horizontally H - taped distance reduced to horizontal S - slope distance or slant-range distance C - spatial chord distance 2. Reduced Distances: G - sea-level (geoidal) distances E - ellipsoidal distances X - mark-to-mark distances AZIMUTH DATA RECORDS *60* - Laplace/Astronomic Azimuth Record *61* - Geodetic Azimuth Record The azimuth data records, identified by *60*-series data codes, are listed above; the block diagrams illustrating the respective formats will be found under FORMAT DIAGRAMS. A Laplace azimuth is an astronomic azimuth determination (e.g., by observation of the star Polaris) converted to a corresponding geodetic azimuth by the application of the Laplace correction. A data element necessary for the computation of the Laplace correction is the east-west (prime-vertical) component of the deflection of vertical at the respective standpoint. If the deflection component is not known from other sources, an astronomic longitude must also be observed. A horizontal control point at which the prime-vertical component of the deflection of vertical is known, and at which a determination of astronomic azimuth has been made, is called a "Laplace station." Laplace azimuths are the primary means for orienting a survey project if the orientation cannot be obtained with respect to established horizontal control points (e.g., because of intervisibility problems). When a survey project is extended away from existing horizontal control, Laplace stations must be established at regular intervals to guard against the buildup of systematic errors which may cause a gradual swing in the orientation of the network. Submit a *60* record for each astronomic or Laplace azimuth used in the project. If there are two or more sets of astronomic azimuth observations (e.g., sets observed on different nights), submit a separate *60* record for each set. The desired Laplace azimuth is the mean value of the respective set of astronomic azimuth observations to which all applicable corrections, including the Laplace correction, have been applied (in sexagesimal degrees, minutes, seconds, and decimals of second), further corrected for eccentricity of instrument and/or target, if applicable (see TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS). A required data item on the *60* record is the Prime-Vertical Component of 2-26 Deflection (Eta), i.e., the difference between the astronomic and geodetic longitudes of the standpoint, as used in the computation of the expressed Laplace correction. In addition to its absolute numerical value in seconds, the direction of the prime-vertical component of the deflection of vertical, i.e., the Direction of Eta must be specified as "E" or "W" according to whether the astronomic longitude falls east or west of the corresponding geodetic longitude of the standpoint. The results of astronomic observations in the form of an astronomic azimuth or a computed Laplace azimuth and the meridional and prime-vertical components of the deflection of vertical are called for on the *60* and *85* records of the HZTL OBS data set. In addition, the respective astronomic latitude, longitude, and/or azimuth observations should be submitted separately in full detail for rigorous processing and incorporation into the astronomic data file of the National Geodetic Survey Data Base. Geodetic azimuths are used when orientation control for a survey project is obtained with respect to the existing horizontal con- trol network by including an azimuth reference object (e.g., the azimuth mark) among the forepoints to which horizontal directions or horizontal angles are observed at one or more existing horizontal control points. Such control points, occupied for the purpose of establishing connection with the existing horizontal control network, must be identified as "fixed" by means of *90* Fixed Control Records (see FIXED CONTROL DATA RECORDS). Submit a *61* record containing the respective geodetic azimuth value (in sexagesimal degrees, minutes, seconds, and decimals of second) for every azimuth reference object to which a horizontal direction or horizontal angle has been observed for the purpose of providing orientation control for the survey project. But, do not submit a *61* record if the azimuth reference object in question is another control point in the HZTL OBS data set, i.e., if a *80* or *81* record defining its geodetic position appears among the *80*- series records (see SURVEY POINT DATA RECORDS). Instead, if such a control point is used for azimuth reference, it must be identified as "fixed" by means of a *90* Fixed Control Record in the same manner as the respective standpoint (see above). Date and Time: The date of the astronomic azimuth observation is required (at least the year) and must appear on the respective *60* Astronomic/Laplace Azimuth Record. The time of observation is desired to indicate the approximate time; any time associated with the astronomic azimuth observation (e.g., starting time, mean time, ending time, etc.) is acceptable. Date and time have been omitted on the *61* Geodetic Azimuth Record, since one does not observe a geodetic azimuth. It is a computed quantity. Origin of Azimuth: A one-letter code indicating the branch of the meridian (north or south) with respect to which the azimuth given on a *60* or *61* record is specified. The azimuth of a line joining a standpoint and a forepoint is defined as the clockwise horizontal angle (0 to 360 degrees) measured from either the north or the south branch of the meridian at the standpoint to the forepoint in question. Since the azimuth may be defined as either "from the north" or "from the south," the origin of the azimuth must be specified as "N" or "S", whichever applies. In the NAD 27 system of coordinates, astronomic and geodetic azimuths are defined as originating from the south. In the NAD 83 system of coordinates, astronomic and geodetic azimuths are defined as originating from the north. 2-27 SURVEY EQUIPMENT DATA RECORDS *70* - Instrument Record The purpose of the *70* record is to provide descriptive information pertaining to an item of survey equipment which has been identified by a Job-Specific Instrument Number (see under OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS). Submit a *70* record for each item of survey equipment used in the project. Individual *70* records should appear in order of increasing Job-Specific Instrument Numbers (JSIN). More than one *70* record is required for any instrument used for more than one type of measurement. In other words, a theodolite used to measure both horizontal and vertical angles would require two *70* records: one to record the resolution of the horizontal measurements and the other to record the resolution of the vertical measurements. The resolution and units symbol (see below) of these two records would be different but, the JSIN and the NGS Survey Equipment Code would be identical. If a "total station" type instrument is used in a survey, three *70* records may be required (horizontal directions, vertical angles and distance observations) for one JSIN. If this equipment is self-contained, the JSIN and the NGS Survey Equipment Code will be identical in each of the three records as stated above. Refer to the Total Station category (800-860) in ANNEX F. But, if modular type equipment (optional EDM instruments can be mounted on the same "total station" base unit) is used, the NGS Survey Equipment Code in the *70* record, which reflects the resolution of the distance measurements, must be that of the specific EDM instrument used for the observations. (Refer to Distance- Measuring Equipment categories (500-799) in ANNEX F). The equipment code for the other two *70* records would be listed in the Total Station category (861-899) in ANNEX F. Most of the entries on the *70* record (see FORMAT DIAGRAMS) are self-explanatory; however, the following data items will be explained in greater detail: NGS Survey Equipment Code: A three-digit numerical identification code is assigned to the different categories of survey equipment, and within each category to specific instruments or other items of survey equipment commonly used in the United States - see ANNEX F. Resolution of the Instrument and Units: The size of the smallest directly-readable linear or angular measurement unit characteristic of the respective item of survey equipment, followed by a two-letter symbol for the units in which it is expressed: MT - meters HS - horizontal seconds of arc MM - millimeters HM - horizontal minutes of arc FT - feet VS - vertical seconds of arc MF - millifeet VM - vertical minutes of arc The character fields reserved for Resolution of the Instrument and for Units on the *70* record may be left blank if the resolution of the surveying instrument in question cannot be expressed in these units (e.g., if the measurement is obtained in terms of arbitrary "dial" units which do not bear a fixed relationship to the measured quantity). 2-28 SURVEY POINT DATA RECORDS *80* - Control Point Record *81* - Control Point Record (UTM/SPC) *82* - Reference or Azimuth Mark Record *85* - Deflection Record (Optional) *86* - Orthometric Height, Geoid Height, Ellipsoid Height Record The survey point data records, identified by *80*-series data codes, are listed above; the block diagrams illustrating the respective formats will be found under FORMAT DIAGRAMS. Submit a group of *80*-series records for every control point which appears in the horizontal control survey project. See ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS for definition of "control point" and "peripheral point" and for an explanation of the survey point numbering system. Start with the control point identified by the numerically lowest station serial number and continue with control points in the order of their increasing (not necessarily consecutive) station serial numbers. The group of *80*-series records pertaining to a control point will usually consist of either a *80* record or a *81* record followed by as many *82* records as there are peripheral reference marks and/or azimuth marks associated with the horizontal control point in question. Use the *80* record if the geodetic position of the control point (see below) is given in geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude); use the *81* record if the position is given either in the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordi- nates or in State Plane Coordinates (SPC). Following the *80* or the *81* record, submit one *82* record for each peripheral RM or AZ MK of that control point. Do not submit a *82* record for an RM or AZ MK which is being treated as a control point for which a *80* or *81* record appears elsewhere among the survey point data records. After the *82* records, or after the *80* or *81* record if no *82* records are present, a *85* record may follow, followed by a *86* record. A *85* record should be submitted if either one or both the meridional and prime-vertical components of the deflection of vertical are known. Submit a *86* record to provide orthometric height values for all control points, except for unmonumented recoverable landmarks positioned by intersection. The geoid and ellipsoid height values in this record are optional, with one exception. If the submitted orthometric height value was determined by GPS observations, the associated geoid height value is required. Two special cases are recognized, in which a *82* record must be submitted for a control point instead of the usual *80* or *81* record. The first case has to do with survey points which would normally be regarded as horizontal control points (i.e., they do not qualify as peripheral points), which cannot be positioned because of insufficient observations, and whose geodetic position cannot be obtained from other sources. Such a survey point must be identified just as a normal control point, however, since the respective geodetic position is not available; submit a *82* record in lieu of a *80* or *81* record, then proceed as for any other normal control point, i.e., submit additional *82* records, a *85* record, and a *86* record, as applicable. The second case has to do with survey points which are used as vertical control points only, i.e., bench marks or other points to which and/or from which one or more vertical angles and distances have been ob- served, but no horizontal 2-29 directions or angles. Survey points of this kind must also be identified by four-digit station serial numbers. If such a survey point is positionable (e.g. by trilateration), then it should be treated as a normal control point. Otherwise, submit a *82* record for this point in lieu of a *80* or *81* record. A *85* record may follow, if applicable, but a *86* record is required. Additional *82* records are not allowed in this set. Should such a point have any peripheral reference or azimuth marks, then it should be treated as in the first special case, described in the preceding paragraph. For the purpose of easy identification, any *82* records, used in lieu of *80* or *81* records as described in the special cases above, should be grouped together and sequenced to follow all the control points with geodetic positions. The entries on the *80*-series records (see FORMAT DIAGRAMS) are selfexplanatory; however, the following data items will be explained in greater detail: Station Name: In the United States, it has traditionally been the preferred practice at the National Geodetic Survey (NGS) and its predecessors to assign intelligible names as primary identifiers of horizontal control points. Such "station names" have the important advantage of being mnemonic - a quality which pure numbers or arbitrary alphanumeric symbols do not possess. In addition, a properly chosen station name may in itself be descriptive and/or indicative of the general location of the horizontal control point, which is a desirable property. For automatic data processing purposes, however, the use of station names as primary identifiers does pose some difficulty, in that their length must, of necessity, be limited to a specific number of characters, and that, contrary to common usage of intelligible names, exactly the same abbreviation and/or spelling of the respective station name must be used whenever a reference is made to a horizontal control point in computer-readable media. The name of a monumented horizontal control point is usually concise, being limited in length by the space which is available on a standard disk marker for the die-stamping of the respective station name. The usual practice is to stamp the name above the survey point symbol (e.g., triangle) which appears in the center of a standard disk marker, and the year (e.g., 1935) in which the mark was set is usually stamped below the survey point symbol. In addition to this "year mark set" which normally appears stamped on every monumented survey point, another date is associated with every horizontal control point, i.e., with every survey point which is positioned, whether it is a monumented control point or an unmonumented recoverable landmark (see below). Referred to as the "year established," it is the year in which observations were first performed for the purpose of determining the position of that horizontal control point; this is normally also the year in which the original description of that control point was prepared. The "year established" and "year-mark-set" of a monumented horizontal control point are often identical. Another type of horizontal control point is an unmonumented recoverable landmark (usually an intersection station) such as a flagpole or church spire. The name of a horizontal control point of this type must be sufficiently descriptive in 2-30 order to identify the respective landmark (and frequently a specific feature of the landmark) adequately, and for this reason it is usually lengthy. For data processing purposes in HZTL OBS data sets, the length of a station name (including all imbedded blanks) is limited to 30 characters, and the same limit applies to the name or designation of a reference mark (RM) or azimuth mark (AZ MK). Accordingly, the name of every horizontal control point to be entered on the *80* or *81* record (as well as the name or designation of an RM or AZ MK to be entered on the *82* record) must be abbreviated and/or edited if it exceeds 30 characters. Guidelines for survey point names and designations, including recommended abbreviations, are given in ANNEX D. Note that the name or designation of a bench mark (BM) is limited to 25 characters (see Vertical Control Data, Chapters 5, 6, and 7). For some of the lengthier names given to horizontal control points (e.g., those of unmonumented recoverable landmarks) contraction to 30 characters will involve rather drastic abbreviation and editing, in which process much of the desired intelligibility and descriptiveness may be lost. To minimize this effect in connection with geodetic materials which are intended for use by the general public, up to 40 characters are allowed for the name of a horizontal control point in the GEOD DESC data set (see Chap- ter 3). This 40-character station name will be used in the automated publication of geodetic data sheets, station descriptions, and associated indexes. This implies that two versions for every station name which exceeds 30 characters in length can exist - a 30-character version used for data processing purposes, and a 40-character version used for publication purposes. The two versions should differ only as to the manner in which the station name is abbreviated and/or edited. The name of a horizontal control point entered on the *80* or *81* record should be taken as it appears under "Station Name" in the heading of the respective station description and subsequent recovery notes. For monumented horizontal control points, this station name is normally identical to or closely resembles the name stamped above the survey point symbol on the respective disk marker. Note that neither the "year established" nor the "year mark set" normally appears as a part of the station name. While parts of a lengthy station name may be abbreviated or edited out in order to conform to the 30-character limit, nothing should be added, except as necessary to render the station name unique within the job (see below). Parentheses are not permitted to appear in a station name. Other special characters such as periods, commas, etc. (see Chapter 1) - as well as any unnecessary spaces (blanks) - should also be edited out whenever possible. In the same manner as the job-specific station serial number of a horizontal control point, that is unique within a job, it is highly desirable to have a station name that is unique within a job. If two or more control points in a job are found to have identical names, they should be rendered unique by appending to the respective station names, in order of preference: 1. The name of the county (parish, census division) in which the station is located, followed by the symbol CO (PA,CD) - Example: JONES CLALLAM CO and JONES KING CO (SMITH ORLEANS PA and SMITH DE SOTO PA, ROCK KENAI-COOK INLET CD and ROCK ANCHORAGE CD). 2-31 2. The name of a locality other than county, parish, or census division - Example: PIPE SAN ANTONIO and PIPE LACKLAND AFB. The year the mark was set is considered extraneous information and is not to be carried as a part of a control point name. For marks whose names were not altered when they were reset, the word RESET must be appended to the original designations. This also holds true for control points which have been reset more than once. In such cases the year given in the "year monumented" field of the description / recovery note will be used to distinguish the marks. See ANNEX D for additional information and examples. Whenever the name of a horizontal control point is modified in this manner in the HZTL OBS data set for the purpose of making it unique within the respective job, the appended information becomes part of the station name, and care must be taken that exactly the same information is appended to the station name in the heading of the description and of all subsequent recovery notes which are given for that horizontal control point in the companion GEOD DESC data set (see Chapter 3). When the lengthy name of a horizontal control point must be contracted to 30 characters, the abbreviation and/or editing of the station name in question should be accomplished with due regard to the following: First, a 40-character version of the same station name is required in the GEOD DESC data set submitted concurrently with the HZTL OBS data set (see INTRODUCTION). This less drastically contracted version of the station name will be used for publication purposes. Second, the names of reference and azimuth marks are normally formed by appending the symbols RM 1, RM 2, ..., RM 13, etc., and AZ MK (possibly AZ MK 2, AZ MK 3, etc.) to the station name of the control point to which they belong. For this reason, the name of a horizontal control point which has peripheral reference marks and/or azimuth mark(s) may have to be further contracted to 24 characters (and possibly less) in order to allow for the respective reference and azimuth mark names to confirm to the 30- character limit. Name or Designation of RM or AZ MK: Reference marks and azimuth marks are usually identified by standard disk markers which display an arrow as the survey point symbol at their center; the markers are set in such a way that the arrow points toward the associated horizontal control point. Two or more reference marks are normally established in the immediate vicinity of a monumented horizontal control point. The purpose of the reference mark is to act as a "pointer" to the related horizontal control point, thereby aiding in its recovery, and to provide a means of verifying whether or not the station monument has been disturbed. In addition to the reference marks, an azimuth mark may be established at some distance to provide an azimuth reference point which is visible from ground level. Less frequently, more than one azimuth mark is established for the same horizontal control point. The originally established reference marks of a horizontal control point are normally assigned sequential numbers, e.g., NO 1, NO 2, etc. Any subsequently established reference mark should be assigned the next unused number in the sequence, even though one or more of the previously established reference marks may have been destroyed. The standard practice is to stamp the name of the horizontal control point to which a reference mark belongs above the arrow which appears in the center of the respective disk marker, the number of the reference mark (i.e., NO 1, NO 2, etc.) immediately below the arrow, and the year in which the reference mark was set farther below the arrow. The same procedure is 2-32 followed in the case of an azimuth mark, except that a number is normally assigned and stamped on the respective disk marker only if more than one azimuth mark is involved. The name or designation of a reference mark (RM) or an azimuth mark (AZ MK) entered on the *82* record must not exceed 30 characters in length. It should normally consist of the name of the horizontal control point to which the RM or AZ MK belongs, with the symbol RM 1, RM 2, ..., RM 13, etc. appended for reference marks NO 1, NO 2, ..., NO 13, etc. For azimuth marks, the symbol AZ MK is appended if only one azimuth mark is involved, otherwise the symbol AZ MK 2, AZ MK 3, etc. for azimuth marks NO 2, NO 3, etc. In general, nothing else should be added to the name of an RM or AZ MK, except when the numbering system outlined in the preceding paragraph has not been followed, with the result that two or more reference or azimuth marks associated with a horizontal control point are referred to by the same name. Considering that the total length of an RM or AZ MK name must not exceed 30 characters, the name of the horizontal control point to which the RM 1, RM 2, etc., and/or AZ MK symbols are appended must be limited to 24 characters, and may have to be further contracted if a numeral must follow the AZ MK symbol and/or the "year mark set" has to be added. The name of the respective horizontal control point must be taken as it appears on the corresponding *80* or *81* record (see Station Name), except for possible further abbreviation and/or editing which may be required. The same general considerations apply to a reference or azimuth mark which is being treated as a control point (i.e., which is not regarded as a peripheral RM or AZ MK), whose 30-character name is to be entered on the respective *80* or *81* record. Occasionally, an existing monumented survey point of another agency is used for a reference mark or, more frequently, for an azimuth mark. Such a survey point must be treated as a control point, i.e., it must be identified by an four-digit station serial number. If it can be positioned (or if its geodetic position is available from other sources), submit a *80* or *81* record for a control point of this kind; otherwise submit a *82* record to give its name or designation. Name or Designation of Bench Mark: A bench mark (BM) is a monumented (or otherwise permanently marked) vertical control point whose height above mean sea level (MSL) has been determined by differential leveling. Bench marks occur in a horizontal control survey project if (1) a horizontal control point is also a BM in a line of differential leveling connected to the national vertical control network, (2) a spur level line connection exists between a horizontal control point and a nearby BM, or (3) a BM is included as a control point in the project for the purpose of extending vertical control by trigonometric leveling (vertical angles). All bench marks in a project should be positioned, if possible. The name or designation of a bench mark entered on the *80* or *82* record must not exceed 30 characters in length. It should be taken as it appears in the heading of the bench mark description, which normally is identical to or closely resembles the name or designation stamped on the disk. If the name or designation of a bench mark must be contracted in order to conform to the 30- character limit, the same general considerations apply as for the abbreviation and/or editing of the name of a horizontal control point (see Station Name above). If a reference mark disk (RM) for one control station is subsequently used as an azimuth mark for another control station, the name or designation of the mark should reflect the stamping on the mark (original use and not subsequent use). 2-33 Likewise, if a bench mark disk (BM) is used as a reference mark for a control station, the name or designation of the mark should always be that of the bench mark. Geodetic Position: The geodetic position of every horizontal control point for which a *80* or *81* record is submitted must be given to serve either as a fixed position or as a preliminary position in the adjustment of the respective horizontal control survey project. The geodetic position may be expressed either in terms of geographic coordinates (latitude and longitude) on the *80* record, or it may be expressed in one of two plane coordinate systems - the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates, or the State Plane Coordinates (SPC) - on the *81* record. For previously established horizontal control points which are identified as "fixed" by means of a *90* record (see FIXED CONTROL DATA RECORDS), the geodetic position given on the *80* or *81* record should be either the published position, if the control point in question is an existing point of the national horizontal control network, or else a position obtained from a constrained adjustment. The *80* record is intended for horizontal control points whose geodetic position is given in terms of geographic coordinates, i.e., as Latitude and Longitude. In addition to the numeric value (in sexagesimal degrees, minutes, seconds, and decimals of a second), the Direction of Latitude must be specified as "N" or "S", and the Direction of Longitude must be specified as "E" or "W", by a one- letter code adjacent to the latitude and longitude fields. The *81* record is intended for horizontal control points whose geodetic position is given in terms of plane coordinates, i.e., as a Y-Coordinate (northing) and an X-Coordinate (easting), followed by a four-digit coordinate system zone designation. If Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates are used, the northing and easting values are expected in meters and decimals of a meter. The zone designation must be the appropriate UTM Zone Number (0001-0060) as shown in ANNEX H. If State Plane Coordinates (SPC) are used, the northing and easting values are expected in meters and decimals of a meter. The zone designation must be the appropriate State Zone Code as given in ANNEX B. Elevation and Elevation Code: Elevation is the vertical distance above the geoid - an equipotential surface. Along the sea coast the geoid closely follows mean sea level (MSL). Often referred to as "orthometric height," elevation is normally the dominant component of ellipsoidal height. Ellipsoidal height is the sum of elevation and geoid height. Geoid height is the name given to the vertical separation between the geoid and the reference ellipsoid of the geodetic datum used (NAD 83 or as specified on the *13* record). Ellipsoid heights of horizontal control points must be known or closely approximated for the purpose of reducing distance measurements to the reference ellipsoid and for computation of the skew normal and deflection corrections which are applied to horizontal directions and/or horizontal angles. The elevation of every horizontal control point for which a *80* or *81* record is submitted must be given, except for unaccessible, unmonumented, recoverable landmarks positioned by intersection. When given, the elevation of such a landmark should be the ground level elevation (e.g., obtained from a topographic map, if a more accurate value is not available), and the height of the point actually sighted entered as the height of target on the respective observation record. But, since no distances are involved, the elevation field of an unaccessible landmark is preferred left blank. 2-34 The elevation of a survey point is determined most accurately by differential leveling. Other less accurate methods of determining the elevation of a survey point are (1) GPS observations, (2) trigonometric leveling using reciprocal vertical angles, (3) trigonometric leveling using non-reciprocal (i.e., one-sided) vertical angles, and (4) photogrammetric methods. In addition, an estimate of elevation based on the exponential decrease of atmospheric pressure with altitude can be obtained by a barometric leveling scheme (e.g., with the aid of an altimeter). As a last resort, if elevation from another source is not at hand, the approximate elevation can be obtained by interpolation between adjacent elevation contour lines on a map. In situations where ellipsoidal heights are known, the orthometric height can be computed by subtracting some estimate of the geoid height from the ellipsoidal height. Orthometric heights derived in this manner are coded using the "G" code. The geoid height value used in the computation must be submitted on a *86* record. In every case, the source and general accuracy of the elevation value given on a *80*, *81*, or the preferred new *86* record must be indicated by a one-letter Orthometric Height (OHT) Code (See table on page 2-84 for explanations). The possible elevation codes are as follows: A - The control point is a bench mark (BM) in the NGSIDB. B - BM determined using FGCS/NGS procedures but not in the NGSIDB. C - The control point is a 'posted' bench mark. H - OHT determined using FGCS procedures but tied to only one (1) BM. L - OHT established using NGS leveling RESET procedures. F - OHT established using fly-leveling. T - OHT determined by leveling between control points which are not BMs. R - OHT determined by reciprocal vertical angles. V - OHT determined by non-reciprocal vertical angles. P - OHT determined by a photogrammetric method. M - OHT scaled from a topographic map. G - OHT determined from an ellipsoidal height. D - OHT determined by datum transformation. Station Order and Type: A two-character field is reserved on the *80* and *81* records for the order-and-type code. The purpose of this code is to characterize the specific order of accuracy of the horizontal control point and to indicate whether the horizontal control point in question is monumented (or otherwise permanently marked), unmonumented but recoverable (e.g., a landmark), or unmonumented and non-recoverable (e.g., an auxiliary point). In addition, the purpose of this code is to characterize the type of the survey scheme of which the horizontal control point is a part and/or by means of which it is positioned (i.e., triangulation, trilateration, traverse, intersection, or resection). It also indicates whether the horizontal control point in question is considered to be a main-scheme station or a supplemental station in the respective survey scheme. In every case, care must be taken to assign an order-and-type code which reflects how the horizontal control point was used in the project. For example, if a horizontal control point previously established as a first-order triangulation station is occupied in the course of a second-order traverse project, then it must be assigned an order-and-type code which classifies it as a second-order traverse station rather than as a first-order triangulation station. For control points which cannot be positioned within the project 2-35 because of insufficient observations (but for which an accurate geodetic position is available from other sources, and hence for which a *80* or *81* record is submitted), the order-and-type code is to be left blank. The first character (order) of the order-and-type code indicates the order of accuracy used to survey the main-scheme network. It reflects the surveying method used, procedures followed, and specifications enforced by the project instructions. It is also intended to indicate whether the horizontal control point is a monumented (or otherwise permanently marked) control point, an unmonumented recoverable landmark, or a temporary point, not permanently marked and therefore nonrecoverable, which must be treated as a control point (e.g., an unmarked eccentric point which is offset more than 10 meters from the respective control point). The respective "order codes" are as follows: 1. Order Codes of Permanently Marked Stations: A - Order A Interferometric Positioning B - Order B Interferometric Positioning 0 - Trans-Continental Traverse (TCT) 1 - First-Order Survey Scheme 2 - Second-Order (Class I and Class II) Survey Scheme 3 - Third-Order (Class I and Class II) Survey Scheme 4 - Lower-Than-Third-Order Survey Scheme and Supplemental Unmonumented Recoverable Landmarks (see below). 2. Order Codes of Nonrecoverable Points: 5 - First-Order Survey Scheme 6 - Second-Order (Class I and Class II) Survey Scheme 7 - Third-Order (Class I and Class II) Survey Scheme 8 - Lower-Than-Third-Order Survey Scheme In general, the order-and-type codes of all monumented (or otherwise permanently marked) horizontal control points should be assigned the same order code (equal to the order code of the order-and-class code assigned to the project - see under PROJECT DATA RECORDS), except when survey work of more than one order-and- class category is included in the project. In this case, special care must be taken to assign the appropriate order code to every monumented control point according to the order-and-class category of the respective section of the project; control points which qualify for more than one order designation must be assigned the order code which corresponds to the higher order-and-class category. But, in a Trans-Continental Traverse (TCT) type project, only the stations of the high-precision traverse proper (i.e., stations connected by horizontal directions and by distances measured with electro-optical DME on two nights) should carry the order code "0"; other horizontal control points occupied and/or sighted upon should be treated as comparable stations in a first-order project. As a matter of convention, the order code "4" is assigned to unmonumented recoverable landmarks positioned as supplemental stations, i.e., as intersections or spur traverse stations which are incidental to the primary survey scheme, regardless of the order-and-class category of the project or section of project of which they are a part. However, if such a landmark (e.g., a flagpole or church spire) occurs as an unoccupied main-scheme station in a triangulation network, then it must be assigned the same order code as any other 2-36 main-scheme station in its vicinity, i.e., a main-scheme intersection station which is an unmonumented recoverable landmark must be assigned the same order code as a monumented control point. Considering the discussion in the preceding two paragraphs, the allowable order codes of the order-and-type codes assigned to horizontal control points within a project (or within a section of a project) are as follows: TABLE 2-5 - ALLOWABLE ORDER CODES 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 쿞URVEY SCHEME ALLOWABLE � 쿚RDER-AND-CLASS CATEGORY ORDER CODES � 쳐컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴캑 쿔nterferometric Positioning A,B � 쿟rans-Continental Traverse (TCT) 0,1,4,5 � 쿑irst-Order 1,4,5 � 쿞econd-Order (Class I and Class II) 2,4,6 � 쿟hird-Order (Class I and Class II) 3,4,7 � 쿗ower-Than-Third-Order 4,8 � 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 The second character (type) of the order-and-type code indicates the type of survey used to position the horizontal control point. It is also intended to indicate whether the horizontal control point is a main scheme station (i.e., one which is essential to the primary survey scheme) or a supplemental station (i.e., one which is incidental to the primary survey scheme). The respective "type codes" are as follows: 1. Type Codes of Main-Scheme Stations: 1 - Positioned Primarily by Triangulation 2 - Positioned Primarily by Trilateration 3 - Positioned Primarily by Traverse A - Positioned Primarily by Interferometric Satellite Relative Positioning 2. Type Codes of Supplemental Stations: 4 - Positioned Primarily by Triangulation 5 - Positioned Primarily by Trilateration 6 - Positioned Primarily by Traverse 7 - Positioned by Intersection (Note: 1 if Main-Scheme Station) 8 - Positioned by Resection B - Positioned Primarily by Interferometric Satellite Relative Positioning As mentioned before, an intersection station which occurs as a main-scheme station (essential to the primary survey scheme) in a triangulation network is assigned the type code "1". If it is not clear whether a horizontal control point is a main- scheme or supplemental station in a lst-Order or 2nd-Order (Class I or Class II) network, it should be treated as a main-scheme station. In particular, if special effort 2-37 has been made to preserve the nominal accuracy of the respective main-scheme network in the positioning of a station which may not appear to be essential to the primary survey scheme (e.g., extra angular observations were taken and/or a distance was measured with electro-optical DME), such a supplemental station should be regarded as a main-scheme station and assigned a type code accordingly. In a third-order and lower-than-third-order survey schemes, the distinction between main-scheme and supplemental stations is unimportant, hence type codes 4, 5, and 6 are not used with order codes 3 and 4; however, type codes 7 and 8 are still used to identify supplemental intersection and resection stations. In particular, the order-and-type code assigned to a recoverable landmark which is incidental to the survey scheme should be 47 if positioned by intersection (43 if positioned by a spur traverse) in a survey scheme of any order and class. Considering the discussion above, the allowable combinations of order and type codes that can be assigned to horizontal control points within a project (or within a section of a project) are as follows: TABLE 2-6 - ALLOWABLE TYPE CODES 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� � ORDER ALLOWABLE � � CODE TYPE CODES � 쳐컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� � A A � � B A,B � � 0 3,6 � � 1,5 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,A,B � � 2,6 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,A,B � � 3,7 1,2,3,7,8,A � � 4,8 1,2,3,7,8,A � 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� Whenever a horizontal control point qualifies for more than one type code (i.e., when a station can be considered to be positioned by two or more different survey methods), the type code which reflects the survey method resulting in the strongest position, when used alone, should be assigned. A hierarchy of order-and- type codes is given in ANNEX E. Geoid Height: Geoid height is the name given to the vertical separation between the geoid and the reference ellipsoid of the geodetic datum used (NAD 83 or as specified on the *13* record). Along the sea coast the geoid, an equipotential surface, closely follows mean sea level (MSL). Elevation is the vertical distance above the geoid. Often referred to as "orthometric height," elevation is normally the dominant component of ellipsoidal height. Ellipsoidal height is the sum of elevation and geoid height. Ellipsoidal height must be known for every horizontal (and vertical) control point for the purpose of reducing horizontal control survey observations to the reference ellipsoid (and for the extension of vertical control by trigonometric leveling). Since the geoid height value associated with a horizontal (or vertical) control point is often unknown, it is a common practice to assume it to be zero, and hence to use the elevation as the best available approximation for the desired ellipsoidal height. 2-38 If a reliable value of geoid height is known, a *86* record should be submitted on which the respective geoid height is given in meters and decimals of meter. Note that the geoid height is positive when the geoid is above the ellipsoid and that it is negative when the geoid is below the ellipsoid. The geoid height value given should be accompanied by an estimate of its absolute accuracy in the form of a standard error (Sigma). Deflection of Vertical: The deflection of vertical is the angle formed by the tangent to the direction of gravity (known as the "vertical") and the "normal" to the reference ellipsoid of the geodetic datum (NAD 83 or as specified on the *13* record). In addition to the magnitude of this angle, usually given in seconds and decimals of second of arc, the direction (e.g. the geodetic azimuth) of the deflection must also be specified. Alternatively, the direction of the deflection of vertical is implied when the deflection is given in terms of two rectangular components - e.g. the north-south or meridional component and the east-west or prime-vertical component. The deflection of vertical comes into consideration in connection with horizontal directions, horizontal angles, and vertical angles observed with theodolites or transits which are leveled (i.e., oriented with respect to the direction of gravity). Accordingly, the deflection of vertical must be known at every point from which horizontal directions, horizontal angles, or vertical angles have been observed, so that appropriate corrections can be computed to convert these observed quantities from the gravity-oriented "astronomic" frame of reference to the ellipsoid-oriented geodetic system. Because the deflection of vertical at a given horizontal control point is often unknown, it is a common practice to assume it to be zero. Since, in the continental United States, the maximum deflection of vertical, defined with respect to the North American 1983 datum (NAD 83), seldom exceeds 20 seconds of arc, and is normally much less (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds), the error introduced by this approximation in connection with the reduction of horizontal directions and horizontal angles is imperceptible except for long, inclined lines of sight in mountainous regions. However, in connection with the use of vertical angles for determining elevation differences, this approximation is one of the major sources of error which render the extension of vertical control by trigonometric leveling inaccurate. If the deflection of vertical is reliably known (e.g., as a result of astronomic latitude and longitude observations), a *85* record should be submitted. The deflection is given in terms of the respective meridional (i.e., north-south) and prime-vertical (i.e., east-west) components, each expressed in seconds and decimals of second of arc. The Meridional Component (Xi) of the deflection of vertical is the difference between the astronomic and geodetic latitudes of the horizontal control point. The direction of the meridional component, i.e., the Direction of Xi must be specified as "N" or "S" according to whether the astronomic latitude falls north or south of the corresponding geodetic latitude. The Prime-Vertical Component (Eta) of the deflection of vertical is the difference between the astronomic and geodetic longitudes of the horizontal control point, multiplied by the cosine of the approximate (astronomic or geodetic) latitude. The direction of the prime- vertical component, i.e., the Direction of Eta must be specified as "E" or "W" according to whether the astronomic longitude falls east or west of the corresponding geodetic longitude. Both the meridional and prime-vertical components 2-39 of the deflection of vertical should be accompanied by an estimate of their absolute accuracy in the form of a standard error (Sigma). The results of astronomic azimuth observations and astronomic position observations (recorded as the meridional and prime- vertical components of the deflection of vertical) are entered on the *60* and *85* records of the HZTL OBS data set. In addition, all astronomic latitude, longitude, and/or azimuth observations should be submitted separately in full detail for rigorous processing and incorporation into the astronomic data file of the National Geodetic Survey Data Base. FIXED CONTROL DATA RECORDS *90* - Fixed Control Record The purpose of the *90* record is to allow identification of hori- zontal control points which are to be used as "fixed control" in the project, i.e., those control points whose coordinates are to be held fixed in the adjustment of the respective horizontal control network. Submit a *90* record for each horizontal control point to be held fixed; a *80* or *81* record must appear among the *80*-series records (see SURVEY POINT DATA RECORDS) for each horizontal control point identified as "fixed" by a *90* record. And, as stated previously, the geodetic position given on each of these *80* or *81* records should be either the published position, if the control point in question is an existing point of the national horizontal control network, or else a position obtained from a constrained adjustment. Normally, at least two horizontal control points will be designated as fixed control in a horizontal control survey project. If only one horizontal control point is identified, the necessary scale and orientation of the horizontal control network must be provided by sufficient *50*-series and *60*-series records (see DISTANCE DATA RECORDS and AZIMUTH DATA RECORDS). 2-40 RECORD FORMATS For each record which may appear in an HZTL OBS data set (see Table 2-1), a block diagram has been prepared to illustrate the respective format. These "format diagrams" have been designed to fulfill the following objectives: 1. Each record is 80 characters long (standard punched card image). 2. Each record has a fixed format, i.e., every data field has a specific length and specific position within the record. 3. Each format diagram is a graphical image of the respective record. 4. Within the limits of available space, the data to be entered in each data field are identified on the format diagrams to render them self-explanatory. See pages 2-88 thru 2-109. 5. In addition, a brief information and instruction sheet accompanies each format diagram. See pages 2-41 thru 2-87. Required Data: In general, only those records which represent actual field observations collected during the survey project should be included in an HZTL OBS data set (e.g., no *60* records should be submitted if no astronomic/Laplace azimuths were determined in the project). Records that are optional or those which may be omitted under certain circumstances are clearly designated on the instruction sheet for each format diagram. The required data fields on the format diagrams have been highlighted (bold printed). 2-41 DATA SET IDENTIFICATION RECORD (*aa*) The first record in a Horizontal Observation Data set must be a Data Set Identification Record which identifies the data class and type (HTZL OBS), the name of the submitting organization, and date the data set was created. The job code is a two-character alphanumeric code assigned to each horizontal control job submitted by an organization. An asterisk (*) immediately precedes and follows the code and the first character of the code must be a letter. Assign the code A1 to the first job and continue in sequence to the last. (A1, A2..., A9, B1, B2,...etc.) The job code used in this record must be identical to the job code in the Data Set Termination Record, the last record in the Horizontal Observation Data Set (HZTL OBS), and identical to the job code used in both the Data Set Identification Record and the Data Set Termination Record of the Geodetic Control Point Descriptive Data Set (GEOD DESC). This record is required. *aa* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE 000010. CC 07-10 JOB CODE. MUST BE *aa*. THE SYMBOL "aa" DENOTES THE TWO- CHARACTER CODE ASSIGNED BY THE SUBMITTING ORGANIZATION. CC 11-14 DATA CLASSIFICATION. MUST BE HZTL. CC 15-18 DATA TYPE. MUST BE OBS. LEFT JUSTIFIED. CC 19-24 ABBREVIATION OF ORGANIZATION. SEE ANNEX C. IF NOT LISTED THERE, PROPOSED ABBREVIATION MUST BE ACCEPTED BY NGS PRIOR TO FIRST SUBMITTAL OF DATA. SEE ANNEX K. CC 25-66 SUBMITTING ORGANIZATION. FULL NAME OR ORGANIZATION PERFORMING THE OBSERVATION. LEFT JUSTIFIED. CC 67-72 ASSIGNED G/GPS NUMBER. (FOR NGS USE ONLY) CC 73-80 DATE DATA SET CREATED. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYYYMMDD). For a more detailed explanation of the contents of the record see Chapter 1, page 1-1, JOB CODE AND POINT NUMBERING and Chapter 2, pages 2-1 thru 2-3, HZTL OBS DATA SET RECORDS. 2-42 PROJECT TITLE RECORD (*10*) This record identifies the project by name. The use of geographic locality alone as the title of a horizontal control survey project has traditionally been the practice of NGS and its predecessors. This record is required. *10* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE 000020. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *10*. CC 11-80 PROJECT TITLE. LEFT JUSTIFIED. PROJECT TITLE CONTINUATION RECORD (*11*) This record is required only if the project title in the *10* record exceeds the 70-character field allowed. Do not divide words between *10* and *11* records. This record is optional. *11* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *11*. CC 11-80 PROJECT TITLE CONTINUED FROM *10* RECORD, IF NECESSARY. THIS RECORD IS OPTIONAL. For a more detailed explanation of the contents of this record see Chapter 2, pages 2-5 and 2-6, PROJECT DATA RECORDS. 2-43 PROJECT INFORMATION RECORD (*12*) This record identifies the person responsible for the survey (chief of party) by name, provides a record of the dates on which survey operations commenced and terminated, indicates type of survey, and order and class of survey. This record is required. *12* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *12*. CC 11-16 DATE FIELD OPERATIONS BEGAN. YEAR, MONTH (YYYYMM). CC 17-22 DATE FIELD OPERATIONS ENDED. YEAR, MONTH (YYYYMM). CC 23-25 CHIEF OF PARTY INITIALS. (FIRST C.O.P.). CC 26-43 SURNAME AND INITIALS OF CHIEF OF PARTY (FIRST C.O.P.) LEFT JUSTIFIED. SEPARATE SURNAME AND EACH INITIAL WITH A BLANK. DO NOT USE PERIODS OR OTHER SPECIAL CHARACTERS. CC 44-46 CHIEF OF PARTY INITIALS. (SECOND C.O.P., IF ANY). CC 47-64 SURNAME AND INITIALS OF SECOND CHIEF OF PARTY, IF ANY. CC 65-75 BLANK CC 76 SURVEY METHOD. IDENTIFY PRIMARY SURVEY METHOD USED. SEE TABLE BELOW. CC 77-78 PRIMARY STATE OR COUNTRY CODE. SEE ANNEX A. CC 79-80 ORDER AND CLASS OF SURVEY. SEE TABLE BELOW. Survey Method Codes Order and Class of Survey Codes 1 - Triangulation AA - AA Order Interferometric Positioning 2 - Trilateration A0 - A Order Interferometric Positioning 3 - Traverse B0 - B Order Interferometric Positioning 4 - Global Positioning System 00 - Trans-Continental Traverse 10 - First Order 21 - Second Order Class I 22 - Second Order Class II 31 - Third Order Class I 32 - Third Order Class II 40 - Lower Than Third Order For a more detailed explanation of the contents of this record see Chapter 2, pages 2-5 thru 2-7, PROJECT DATA RECORDS and DATE AND TIME. 2-44 GEODETIC DATUM AND ELLIPSOID RECORD (*13*) This record defines the datum and reference ellipsoid for the geodetic positions, deflections of the vertical, geoid heights, and/or reduced ellipsoidal distances (Code E in *52* record) as they appear in this project. Do not enter the Inverse Flattening (1/f) if the ellipsoid is defined by the Semi-Major Axis (a) and the Semi-Minor Axis (b). Likewise, do not enter the Semi-Minor Axis (b) if the ellipsoid is defined by (a) and (1/f). This record is required unless the datum is the North American 1983 (NAD 83). *13* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *13*. CC 11-34 DATUM NAME. DO NOT INCLUDE THE WORD 'DATUM' IN THE NAME. ABBREVIATE IF NECESSARY. CC 35-50 NAME OF THE ELLIPSOID. CC 51-60 SEMI-MAJOR AXIS (a) IN METERS (MMMMMMMmmm). CC 61-70 INVERSE FLATTENING (1/f) (XXXxxxxxxx). THE FLATTENING (f) = (a - b) / a. CC 71-80 SEMI-MINOR AXIS (b) IN METERS (MMMMMMMmmm). 2-45 HORIZONTAL DIRECTION SET RECORD (*20*) This record identifies the initial direction for each set of direction observations. Use the Horizontal Direction Record (*22*) for all the remaining directions observed in the same set. The instrument station (standpoint) refers to the point from which the observation is taken (e.g., the point occupied by the observer). The target station (forepoint) refers to the point to which the observation is directed. Use the *21* Comment Record(s) immediately following the *20* record for any comments. To anticipate the accuracy of an observation, the type of survey equipment used must be known. To identify the instrument used for each observation, assign a unique three-digit number (Job-Specific Instrument Number) in the range 001 to 999 to each item of survey equipment used in the job. Each number will cross reference a NGS survey equipment code in the *70* record. See Chapter 2, page 2-10, Job-Specific Instrument Number and page 2-28, Survey Equipment Data Records. *20* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *20*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SEE CHAPTER 1, PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-8 THRU 2-9, OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS; PAGES 2-12 THRU 2-13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2-14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. CC 15-16 SET NUMBER. ENTER 01 FOR THE FIRST SET OF THE DIRECTION OBSERVATIONS. USE 02, 03, ETC. FOR SUCCESSIVE SETS. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-18, SET NUMBER. CC 17-22 FIELD RECORD BOOK NUMBER. VOLUME NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE FIELD BOOK IN WHICH THE DIRECTION OBSERVATIONS ARE RECORDED. CC 23-24 NUMBER OF OBJECTS SIGHTED IN THIS SET. THIS VALUE EQUALS THE SUM OF THE *20* RECORD AND THE *22* RECORD(S) IN THIS SET. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-18. CC 25-29 WEATHER CODE. THE FIRST COLUMN OF THIS CODE (25) IS A PROBLEM INDICATOR FOLLOWED BY VISIBILITY, TEMPERATURE, CLOUD COVER AND WIND INDICATORS IN SUCCESSION. FOR INFORMATION CONCERNING THE WEATHER CODE TO BE USED IN CONNECTION WITH HORIZONTAL OBSERVATIONS, SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-10. CC 30-32 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER. CC 33-35 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER (JSIN). THE UNIQUE THREE-DIGIT NUMBER IN THE RANGE 001 TO 999 ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. THIS NUMBER WILL CROSS REFERENCE THE NGS SURVEY EQUIPMENT CODE IN THE *70* RECORD. 2-46 CC 36-39 HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE OCCUPIED SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE OPTICAL CENTER OF THE SURVEYING INSTRUMENT. IN METERS (MMmm). FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 40-45 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-18, DATE AND TIME. CC 46-49 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-7, TIME, AND PAGE 2-18, DATE AND TIME. CC 50 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H WHICH REPRESENTS THE TIME ZONE OCCUPIED. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-7, TIME ZONE. CC 51-54 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. TARGET STATION. SEE CHAPTER 1, PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-8 THRU 2-9, OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS; PAGES 2-12 THRU 2-13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2-14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. CC-55-58 HEIGHT OF TARGET. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE TARGET STATION SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE TARGET (POINT) ABOVE THE MARK USED FOR THE DIRECTION OBSERVATIONS. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC-59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-11, VISIBILITY CODE. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF POINTINGS OR MEASUREMENTS USED TO DETERMINE A HORIZONTAL DIRECTION. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-16, NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS AND PAGE 2-19, LAST PARAGRAPH. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION OF A SINGLE OBSERVATION FROM THE MEAN OF ALL THE OBSERVATIONS USED TO DETERMINE A DIRECTION IN A SET. IN SECONDS. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-16, REJECTION LIMIT. CC-64-72 INITIAL DIRECTION. MEAN OF POINTINGS OR MEASUREMENTS TO THE FIRST OBJECT SIGHTED IN THE OBSERVING SEQUENCE, NORMALLY ASSIGNED A VALUE ZERO DEGREES, ZERO MINUTES AND ZERO SECONDS (DDDMMSSss). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-17 AND 2-18, HORIZONTAL DIRECTION DATA RECORDS. CC 73-76 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS (SSss). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-17, INTERNAL CONSISTENCY SIGMA. CC 77-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS (SSss). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-17, EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY SIGMA. For a more detailed discussion on accuracy, internal and external errors, see Chapter 2, pages 2-15 thru 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. 2-47 HORIZONTAL DIRECTION COMMENT RECORD (*21*) Use this record for comments pertinent to the set of directions. This record is required to explain the problem encountered, if the problem indicator (Column 25) on the respective Horizontal Direction Set Record (*20*) is 1. Otherwise, this record is optional. *21* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *21*. CC 11-80 COMMENT. IF THE COMMENT(S) EXCEED 70 CHARACTERS, USE ANOTHER *21* RECORD FOR CONTINUATION. ANY NUMBER OF *21* RECORDS IS ALLOWED. BUT, DO NOT DIVIDE WORDS BETWEEN CONSECUTIVE *21* RECORDS. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-17 AND 2-18, HORIZONTAL DIRECTION DATA RECORDS. 2-48 HORIZONTAL DIRECTION RECORD (*22*) Use this record for the second and subsequent directions observed in the same horizontal direction set. Use the Horizontal Direction Set Record (*20*) for the first direction (initial) observed in the set. *22* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *22*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). MUST BE IDENTICAL TO THE STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN) IN CC 11-14 ON THE RESPECTIVE *20* RECORD. CC 15-16 SET NUMBER. MUST BE IDENTICAL TO THE SET NUMBER IN THE PRECEDING *20* RECORD. CC 17-45 BLANK CC 46-49 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE PAGE 2-7 THRU 2-8, TIME. CC 50 TIME ZONE. ENTER LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H. SEE PAGE 2-7, TIME ZONE. CC 51-54 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SEE CHAPTER 1, PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-8 THRU 2-9, OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS; PAGES 2-12 THRU 2-13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2-14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. CC 55-58 HEIGHT OF TARGET. ENTER VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE TARGET STATION SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE TARGET (POINT) ABOVE THE MARK, USED FOR THE DIRECTION OBSERVATIONS. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE PAGE 2-11, VISIBILITY CODE. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF POINTINGS OR MEASUREMENTS TO DETERMINE THIS OBSERVED DIRECTION. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-16, NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS AND PAGE 2-19, LAST PARAGRAPH. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION FROM THE MEAN. IN SECONDS. SEE PAGE 2-16, REJECTION LIMIT. CC 64-72 CLOCKWISE DIRECTION. MEAN OF POINTINGS OR MEASUREMENTS TO EACH OBJECT OBSERVED IN A SET. IN DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS (DDDMMSSss). CC 73-76 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS (SSss) SEE PAGE 2-17, INTERNAL CONSISTENCY SIGMA. CC 77-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS (SSss) SEE PAGE 2-17, EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY SIGMA. 2-49 GPS OCCUPATION HEADER RECORD (*25*) This record is used to define session information and the raw data file name at a station. There must be an occupation header record for each receiver in each session. Use the Comment Record (*26*) immediately following the *25* record for any comments. To anticipate the accuracy of an observation, the type of survey equipment used must be known. To identify the instrument employed on each particular observation record in a concise manner, assign a unique three-digit number (Job-Specific Instrument Number) in the range 001 to 999 to each item of survey equipment used in the job. Each unique number will cross reference a NGS survey equipment code in the *70* record. See Chapter 2, page 2-10, Job- Specific Instrument Number and page 2-28, Survey Equipment Data Records. This record is required. *25* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *25*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SEE CHAPTER 1, PAGES 1-2 THRU 1-6, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-8 THRU 2-9, OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS; PAGES 2-12 THRU 2-14, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2-14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. CC 15-24 DATA MEDIA IDENTIFIER. A CODE WHICH SPECIFICALLY DEFINES THE RECEIVER TYPE, DAY, YEAR, SESSION, AND STATION OBSERVED. FOR USE IN THE B-FILE AND G-FILE. SEE ANNEX L, PAGES L-1 AND L-2. THE FORMAT OF A DATA MEDIA IDENTIFIER IS: ADDDYSNNNN, WHERE: A IS THE CHARACTER WHICH INDICATES THE RECEIVER MANUFACTURER: A = ASHTECH, INC; C = TOPCON CORP; D = DEL NORTE TECHNOLOGY, INC; G = ALLEN OSBORNE ASSOCIATES, INC; I = ISTAC, INC; L = MINI-MACTM; M = MacrometerR; N = NORSTAR INSTRUMENTS, LTD; O = MOTOROLA, INC; R = TRIMBLE NAVIGATION, LTD; S = SERCEL, INC; T = TEXAS INSTRUMENTS,INC; W = LEICA HEERBRUGG AG-WILD HEERBRUGG- MAGNAVOX, INC; V = NOVATEL COMMUNICATIONS, LTD; X = OTHER DDD IS THE DAY OF YEAR OF THE FIRST DATA EPOCH (UTC) Y IS THE LAST DIGIT OF THE YEAR OF THE FIRST DATA EPOCH S IS THE LETTER OR NUMBER OF THE SESSION OBSERVED NNNN IS THE PROJECT UNIQUE, FOUR (4)-CHARACTER ABBREVIATION OF A STATION NAME. CC 25-27 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER CC 28-30 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER. THE UNIQUE THREE- DIGIT NUMBER IN THE RANGE 001 TO 999 ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. THIS NUMBER WILL CROSS REFERENCE THE NGS SURVEY EQUIPMENT CODE IN THE *70* RECORD. CC 31-32 LENGTH OF THE CABLE USED TO CONNECT RECEIVER AND ANTENNA. (XX) METERS CC 33-80 BLANK 2-50 GPS OCCUPATION COMMENT RECORD (*26*) Use this record for comments pertinent to the GPS occupation session. This record is optional. *26* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *26*. CC 11-80 COMMENT. IF THE COMMENT(S) EXCEED 70 CHARACTERS, USE ANOTHER *26* RECORD FOR CONTINUATION. ANY NUMBER OF *26* RECORDS IS ALLOWED, BUT, DO NOT DIVIDE WORDS BETWEEN CONSECUTIVE *26* RECORDS. 2-51 GPS OCCUPATION MEASUREMENT RECORD (*27*) To identify the station occupied on each particular observation record in a concise manner, assign a unique four-digit number (Station Serial Number) in the range 0001 to 9999 to each station occupied in the job. Each unique number will cross reference a survey station in an *80* record. See Chapter 1, page 1-1, Job Code and Survey Point Numbering and Chapter 2, page 2-12, Assignment of Station Serial Numbers. Two Occupation Measurement Records must be completed for each station in each session, i.e. one pre-session and one post-session record. This record is required. *27* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *27*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION. FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SEE CHAPTER 1, PAGES 1-2 THRU 1-6, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-8 THRU 2-9, OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS; PAGES 2- 12 THRU 2-13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2-14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. CC 15-20 DATE OF OBSERVATION.(UTC) YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-18, DATE AND TIME. CC 21-24 TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM)(UTC). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-7, TIME, AND PAGE 2-18, DATE AND TIME. CC 25-29 HEIGHT OF THE ANTENNA PHASE CENTER ABOVE THE MONUMENT (XX.xxx) IN METERS. CC 30-33 DRY BULB TEMPERATURE (XXX.x). ALL REQUIRED WEATHER INFORMATION CAN BE FOUND ON THE METEOROLOGICAL DATA PORTION OF THE OBSERVER'S FIELD LOG. IT IS IMPORTANT TO MAKE SURE YOU ARE ENTERING DATA FOR THE CORRECT SESSION (BEGINNING AND ENDING READINGS). CC 34 DRY BULB TEMPERATURE CODE (C/F). THE TEMPERATURE GIVEN MUST BE RECORDED IN CELSIUS OR FAHRENHEIT. FOR NGS PURPOSES, CELSIUS IS PREFERRED. CC 35-38 WET BULB TEMPERATURE (XXX.x). SEE DRY BULB TEMPERATURE. CC 39 WET BULB TEMPERATURE CODE (C/F). SEE DRY BULB TEMPERATURE CODE. CC 40-42 RELATIVE HUMIDITY (XX.x). ENTER THE PERCENTAGE OF RELATIVE HUMIDITY AT THE BEGINNING AND END OF THE SESSION. CC 43-48 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE (XXXX.xx). (AT INITIATION AND COMPLETION) (ALLOWABLE UNITS MM, MB OR IN) THE BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CAN ALSO BE FOUND ON THE WEATHER DATA SHEET. CC 49-50 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CODE. (MM, MB, IN) MM - MILLIMETERS OF MERCURY MB - MILLIBARS IN - INCHES OF MERCURY CC 51-55 WEATHER CODE. THE FIRST COLUMN OF THIS CODE (51) IS A PROBLEM INDICATOR FOLLOWED BY VISIBILITY, TEMPERATURE, CLOUD COVER AND WIND INDICATORS IN SUCCESSION. FOR INFORMATION CONCERNING THE WEATHER CODE TO BE USED IN CONNECTION WITH GEOMETRIC OBSERVATIONS, SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-10. CC 56-80 BLANK 2-52 GPS CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION RECORD (*28) The Clock Synchronization Record is used to record codeless type receiver clock synchronization information. Two records are normally created for each receiver per day, i.e., one pre-session and one post-session. Use the Comment Record (*29*) immediately following the *28* record for any comments. This record is required for codeless receivers. *28* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *28*. CC 11-16 SYNCHRONIZATION DATE (YYMMDD) UTC. CODELESS TYPE GPS RECEIVERS MUST BE TIME SYNCHRONIZED WITH OTHER RECEIVERS IN THE SESSION. CC 17-20 SYNCHRONIZATION TIME (HHMM) UTC. SEE SYNCHRONIZATION DATE. CC 21-23 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER A. THE UNIQUE THREE- DIGIT NUMBER IN THE RANGE 001 TO 999 ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. THIS NUMBER WILL CROSS REFERENCE THE NGS SURVEY EQUIPMENT CODE IN THE *70* RECORD. CC 24-26 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER B. SEE CC 21-23. CC 27-31 BLANK CC 32-36 TIMING DIFFERENCE (XXX.xx)(MICROSECONDS). CC 37 INTEGER TIME SECOND SYNCH (Y OR N). CC 38-40 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER. CC 41-80 BLANK GPS CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION RECORD (*29*) Use this record for comments pertinent to the time synchronization of two or more GPS receivers. This record is optional. *29* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *26*. CC 11-80 COMMENT. IF THE COMMENT(S) EXCEED 70 CHARACTERS, USE ANOTHER *29* RECORD FOR CONTINUATION. ANY NUMBER OF *29* RECORDS IS ALLOWED, BUT DO NOT DIVIDE WORDS BETWEEN CONSECUTIVE *29* RECORDS. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-17 AND 2-18, HORIZONTAL DIRECTION DATA RECORDS. 2-53 HORIZONTAL ANGLE SET RECORD (*30*) Use this record for the first angle of every set of angles observed at a station. Use the Horizontal Angle Record (*32*) for the remaining angles observed in the same set. Use a Comment Record (*31*) immediately following the *30* record for any comments pertaining to the set of observations. To anticipate the accuracy of an observation, the type of survey equipment used must be known. To identify the instrument used for each observation, assign a unique three-digit number (Job-Specific Instrument Number) in the range 001 to 999 to each item of survey equipment used in the job. Each number will cross reference a NGS SURVEY EQUIPMENT CODE in the *70* record. See Chapter 2, Page 2-10, Job-Specific Instrument Number and Page 2-28, Survey Equipment Data Records. *30* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *30*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SEE CHAPTER 1, PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-8 THRU 2-9, OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS; PAGES 2-12 THRU 2-13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2-14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. CC 15-16 SET NUMBER. ENTER 01 FOR THE FIRST SET OF ANGLE OBSERVATIONS. EACH ADDITIONAL SET OF OBSERVED ANGLES WITH THE SAME INSTRUMENT SSN MUST BE ASSIGNED A HIGHER NUMBER; 02, 03, ETC. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2- 20, SET NUMBER. CC 17-22 FIELD RECORD BOOK NUMBER. VOLUME NUMBER OF THE FIELD BOOK IN WHICH THE ANGLES OBSERVATIONS ARE RECORDED. CC 23-24 NUMBER OF ANGLES OBSERVED IN THIS SET. THIS NUMBER IS THE SUM OF THE *30* RECORD AND THE *32* RECORD (S) IN THIS SET. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-20. CC 25-29 WEATHER CODE. THE FIRST COLUMN OF THIS CODE (25) IS A PROBLEM INDICATOR FOLLOWED BY VISIBILITY, TEMPERATURE, CLOUD COVER AND WIND INDICATORS IN SUCCESSION. IF THE PROBLEM INDICATOR IS 1, A *31* RECORD IS REQUIRED. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-10. CC 30-32 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER. CC 33-35 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER (JSIN). THE UNIQUE THREE-DIGIT NUMBER IN THE RANGE 001 TO 999 ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. THIS NUMBER WILL CROSS REFERENCE THE NGS SURVEY EQUIPMENT CODE IN THE *70* RECORD. CC 36-39 HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE OCCUPIED SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE OPTICAL CENTER OF THE SURVEYING INSTRUMENT. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. 2-54 CC 40-45 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-20, DATE AND TIME. CC 46-49 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM) SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-7, TIME; AND PAGE 2-20, DATE AND TIME. CC 50 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H WHICH REPRESENTS THE TIME ZONE OCCUPIED. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-7. CC 51-54 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. FIRST TARGET STATION (LEFT FOREPOINT). SEE CHAPTER 1, PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-12 THRU 2-13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2-14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. CC 55-58 HEIGHT OF TARGET. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE FIRST TARGET STATION (LEFT FOREPOINT) SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE TARGET (POINT) ABOVE THE MARK USED FOR THE ANGLE OBSERVATIONS. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-11, VISIBILITY CODE. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF DETERMINATIONS OF A SINGLE ANGLE MEASUREMENT WHICH ARE MEANED TO OBTAIN THE DESIRED ANGLE VALUE. EACH DETERMINATION OF A SINGLE ANGLE WILL USUALLY INVOLVE SEVERAL REPEATED MEASUREMENTS (REPETITIONS). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-19 AND 2-20, HORIZONTAL ANGLE DATA RECORDS. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION OF A SINGLE ANGLE MEASUREMENT FROM THE MEAN OF ALL THE MEASUREMENTS USED TO DETERMINE THE DESIRED ANGLE IN A SET. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-16. CC 64-71 CLOCKWISE ANGLE. MEAN OF FIRST ANGLE OBSERVED AT A STATION. IN DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS (DDDMMSSs). SEE PAGES 2- 19 AND 2-20, HORIZONTAL ANGLE DATA RECORDS. CC 72-75 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. SECOND TARGET STATION (RIGHT FOREPOINT). SEE PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; PAGES 2-8 THRU 2-9, OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS; PAGES 2-12 THRU 2-13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2-14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. CC 76-79 HEIGHT OF TARGET. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE SECOND TARGET STATION (RIGHT FOREPOINT) SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE TARGET (POINT) ABOVE THE MARK USED FOR THE ANGLE OBSERVATIONS. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 80 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE PAGE 2-11, VISIBILITY CODE. 2-55 HORIZONTAL ANGLE COMMENT RECORD (*31*) Use this record for comments pertaining to the set of angles. This record is required to explain the problem encountered if the problem indicator (column 25) on the respective Horizontal Angle Set Record (*30*) is "1". Otherwise, this record is optional. *31* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *31*. CC 11-80 COMMENT. IF THE COMMENT(S) EXCEED 70 CHARACTERS, USE ANOTHER *31* RECORD FOR CONTINUATION. ANY NUMBER OF *31* RECORDS IS ALLOWED. BUT, DO NOT DIVIDE WORDS BETWEEN CONSECUTIVE *31* RECORDS. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-19 AND 2-20, HORIZONTAL ANGLE DATA RECORDS. 2-56 HORIZONTAL ANGLE RECORD (*32*) Use this record for the second and subsequent angles observed in the same set. Use a Horizontal Angle Set Record (*30*) for the first angle observed in the set. *32* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *32*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION REFER TO PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, 2-9 AND 2-12 THRU 2-13. CC 15-16 SET NUMBER. MUST BE THE SAME NUMBER AS ON THE PRECEDING *30* RECORD. CC 17-45 BLANK. CC 46-49 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-7, TIME; AND PAGE 2-20, DATE AND TIME. CC 50 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H THAT REPRESENTS THE TIME ZONE OCCUPIED. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-7. CC 51-54 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. FIRST TARGET STATION (LEFT FOREPOINT). SEE CHAPTER 1, PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-12 THRU 2-13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2- 14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. CC 55-58 HEIGHT OF TARGET. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE FIRST TARGET STATION (LEFT FOREPOINT) SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE TARGET (POINT) ABOVE THE MARK USED FOR THE ANGLE OBSERVATIONS. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-11, VISIBILITY CODE. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF DETERMINATIONS OF A SINGLE ANGLE MEASUREMENT WHICH ARE MEANED TO OBTAIN THE DESIRED ANGLE VALUE. EACH DETERMINATION OF A SINGLE ANGLE WILL USUALLY INVOLVE SEVERAL REPEATED MEASUREMENTS (REPETITIONS). SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGES 2-19 AND 2-20, HORIZONTAL ANGLE DATA RECORDS. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION OF A SINGLE ANGLE MEASUREMENT FROM THE MEAN OF ALL THE MEASUREMENTS USED TO DETERMINE THE DESIRED ANGLE IN A SET. SEE CHAPTER 2, PAGE 2-16. CC 64-71 CLOCKWISE ANGLE. MEAN OF FIRST ANGLE OBSERVED AT A STATION. IN DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS (DDDMMSSs). SEE PAGES 2-19 AND 2-20, HORIZONTAL ANGLE DATA RECORDS. CC 72-75 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. SECOND TARGET STATION (RIGHT FOREPOINT). SEE PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING; PAGES 2-8 THRU 2-9, OBSERVATION DATA RECORDS; PAGES 2-12 THRU 2- 13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS; AND PAGE 2-14, TREATMENT OF ECCENTRIC OBSERVATIONS. 2-57 CC 76-79 HEIGHT OF TARGET. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE SECOND TARGET STATION (RIGHT FOREPOINT) SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE TARGET (POINT) ABOVE THE MARK USED FOR THE ANGLE OBSERVATIONS. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 80 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE PAGE 2-11, VISIBILITY CODE. 2-58 VERTICAL ANGLE SET RECORD (*40*) Use this record for the first vertical angle (VA) or zenith distance (ZD) observed in a set. Use the Vertical Angle Record (*42*) for the remaining vertical angles or zenith distances observed in the same set. Use a Comment Record (*41*) immediately following the *40* record for any comments. For additional information, refer to pages 2-21 thru 2-23, VA/ZD Data Records. To anticipate the accuracy of an observation, the type of survey equipment must be known. To identify the instrument used for each observation, assign a unique three-digit number (Job-Specific Instrument Number) in the range 001 to 999 to each item of survey equipment used in the job. Each unique number will cross reference a NGS Survey Equipment Code in the *70* record. See Page 2-10, Job-Specific Instrument Number and Page 2-28, Survey Equipment Data Records. *40* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *40* CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 15-16 SET NUMBER. ENTER 01 FOR THE FIRST SET OF VA/ZD OBSERVATIONS. USE 02, 03, ETC. FOR SUCCESSIVE SETS. SEE PAGE 2-22, SET NUMBER. CC 17-22 FIELD RECORD BOOK NUMBER. VOLUME NUMBER OF THE FIELD BOOK IN WHICH THE VA/ZD OBSERVATIONS ARE RECORDED. CC 23-24 NUMBER OF VA OR ZD OBSERVATIONS IN THIS SET. THIS VALUE IS EQUAL TO THE SUM OF THE *40* RECORD AND THE *42* RECORD(S) IN THIS SET. SEE PAGE 2-22. CC 25-29 WEATHER CODE. THE FIRST COLUMN OF THIS CODE (25) IS A PROBLEM INDICATOR FOLLOWED BY VISIBILITY, TEMPERATURE, CLOUD COVER AND WIND INDICATORS IN SUCCESSION. IF THE PROBLEM INDICATOR IS "1", A *41* RECORD IS REQUIRED. SEE PAGE 2-10, WEATHER CODE. CC 30-32 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER. CC 33-35 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER. THE UNIQUE THREE- DIGIT NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. SEE ABOVE. CC 36-39 HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE OCCUPIED SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE OPTICAL CENTER OF THE SURVEYING INSTRUMENT. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 40-45 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). SEE PAGE 2-24, DATE AND TIME. CC 46-49 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE PAGES 2-7, TIME AND 2-24, DATE AND TIME. CC 50 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H WHICH REPRESENTS THE TIME ZONE OCCUPIED. SEE PAGE 2-7, TIME ZONE. CC 51-54 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). 2-59 CC 55-58 HEIGHT OF TARGET. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE TARGET STATION SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE TARGET (POINT) ABOVE THE MARK USED FOR THE VA/ZD OBSERVATION. IN METERS (MMmm). REFER TO PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE PAGE 2-11. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF POINTINGS OR MEASUREMENTS USED TO DETERMINE A VA OR ZD OBSERVATION. SEE PAGES 2-21 AND 2-22, VERTICAL ANGLE/ZENITH DISTANCE DATA RECORDS. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. MAXIMUM ALLOWED SPREAD BETWEEN THE OBSERVATIONS. IN SECONDS (XXxx). CC 64-71 VERTICAL ANGLE OR ZENITH DISTANCE. MEAN OF POINTINGS OR MEASUREMENTS TO THE FIRST OBJECT SIGHTED IN THE OBSERVING SEQUENCE. IN DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS (DDDMMSSs). LEAVE CC 71 BLANK IF VA OR ZD IS GIVEN TO THE NEAREST SECOND; LEAVE CC 69-71 BLANK IF IT IS GIVEN TO THE NEAREST MINUTE. CC 72 ANGLE CODE. INDICATE TYPE OF VERTICAL ANGLE MEASURED. E= ELEVATION, D= DEPRESSION, Z= ZENITH DISTANCE. SEE PAGE 2-22, ANGLE CODE. CC 73-76 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS (SSss). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. CC 77-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS PER KILOMETER (SSss). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. VERTICAL ANGLE COMMENT RECORD (*41*) Use this record for comments pertaining to the set of vertical angles or zenith distances. This record is required to explain the problem encountered when the problem indicator (column 25) on the preceding Vertical Angle Set Record (*40*) is "1". Otherwise, this record is optional. *41* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *41*. CC 11-80 COMMENT. IF THE COMMENT(s) EXCEED 70 CHARACTERS, USE ANOTHER *41* RECORD FOR CONTINUATION. ANY NUMBER OF *41* RECORDS IS ALLOWED. BUT, DO NOT DIVIDE WORDS BETWEEN CONSECUTIVE *41* RECORDS. 2-60 VERTICAL ANGLE RECORD (*42*) Use this record for the second and subsequent vertical angles (VAs) or zenith distances (ZDs) observed in the same set; use Vertical Angle Set Record (*40*) for the first vertical angle or zenith distance observed in the set. Refer to pages 2-22 thru 2-24 for additional information. *42* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *42* CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). MUST BE IDENTICAL TO THE STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN) USED IN CC 11-14 ON THE RESPECTIVE *40* RECORD. CC 15-16 SET NUMBER. MUST BE THE SAME NUMBER AS ON THE PRECEDING *40* RECORD. CC 17-45 BLANK. CC 46-49 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). CC 50 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FORM ANNEX H. CC 51-54 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). CC 55-58 HEIGHT OF TARGET. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE TARGET STATION SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE TARGET (POINT) ABOVE THE MARK USED FOR THE VA/ZD OBSERVATION. REFER TO PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE PAGE 2-11. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF POINTINGS OR MEASUREMENTS USED TO DETERMINE A VA OR ZD OBSERVATION. SEE PAGES 2-21 AND 2-22, VERTICAL ANGLE/ZENITH DISTANCE DATA RECORDS. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. MAXIMUM ALLOWED SPREAD BETWEEN THE OBSERVATIONS. IN SECONDS (XXxx). CC 64-71 VERTICAL ANGLE OR ZENITH DISTANCE. MEAN OF POINTINGS OR MEASURE- MENTS TO THE FIRST OBJECT SIGHTED IN THE OBSERVING SEQUENCE. IN DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS (DDDMMSSs). LEAVE CC 71 BLANK IF VA OR ZD IS GIVEN TO THE NEAREST SECOND; LEAVE CC 69-71 BLANK IF IT IS GIVEN TO THE NEAREST MINUTE. CC 72 ANGLE CODE. INDICATE TYPE OF VERTICAL ANGLE MEASURED. E= ELEVATION, D= DEPRESSION, Z= ZENITH DISTANCE. SEE PAGE 2-22, ANGLE CODE. CC 73-76 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS (SSss). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. CC 77-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS PER KILOMETER (SSss). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. 2-61 DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION RECORD (*45*) Use this record for each observed difference of elevation obtained by spirit leveling or by other than the trigonometric method coded in the *40* thru *42* records. Use the Difference of Elevation Continuation Record (*47*) to code additional data pertinent to the observation in the preceding *45* record. For any comments use the Difference of Elevation Comment Record (*46*). Refer to page 2-23, LEVEL DATA RECORDS, for additional information. *45* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *45*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 15-16 BLANK. CC 17-22 FIELD RECORD BOOK NUMBER. VOLUME NUMBER OF THE FIELD BOOK IN WHICH THE ELEVATION OBSERVATIONS ARE RECORDED. CC 23-24 BLANK. CC 25-29 WEATHER CODE. THE FIRST COLUMN OF THIS CODE (25) IS A PROBLEM INDICATOR FOLLOWED BY VISIBILITY, TEMPERATURE, CLOUD COVER AND WIND INDICATORS IN SUCCESSION. IF THE PROBLEM INDICATOR IS "1", A *46* RECORD IS REQUIRED. SEE PAGE 2-10, WEATHER CODE. CC 30-32 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER. CC 33-35 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER. THE UNIQUE THREE- DIGIT NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. REFER TO PAGES 2-10 AND 2-28. CC 36-38 NUMBER OF LEVELING SETUPS. NUMBER OF TURNING POINTS USED TO OBTAIN THE ELEVATION DIFFERENCE OF THE SECTION OBSERVED. CC 39 BLANK. CC 40-45 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). CC 46-49 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE PAGE 2-7, TIME AND 2-24, DATE AND TIME. CC 50 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H TO INDICATE WHICH TIME ZONE WAS OCCUPIED. SEE PAGE 2-7. CC 51-54 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). CC 55-58 BLANK. CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE PAGE 2-11. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF MEASUREMENTS (LEVEL RUNNINGS) OF THE SAME SECTION. IF THE MEAN VALUE OF A FORWARD AND A BACKWARD LEVEL RUN OF THE SAME SECTION IS CODED AS A SINGLE OBSERVATION, THEN THE NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS SHOULD BE CODED AS 2. CC 62-63 BLANK. CC 64-72 DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION. DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION OBSERVED BETWEEN TWO MARKS (A SECTION). IN METERS (MMMMMmmmm). IF THE DIFFERENCE IS NEGATIVE, CODE THE MINUS SIGN (-) IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE LEFTMOST DIGIT AND BLANK FILL COLUMNS LEFT OF THE MINUS SIGN. CC 73-76 ACCURACY OF LEVELING. SIGMA IN MILLIMETERS (XXxx). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. CC 77-80 LENGTH OF SECTION. DISTANCE BETWEEN THE TWO MARKS FOR WHICH THE ELEVATION DIFFERENCE WAS DETERMINED. IN KILOMETERS (XXxx). 2-62 DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION COMMENT RECORD (*46*) Use this record for comments pertaining to the difference of elevation observations. If the problem indicator (column 25) on the preceding Difference of Elevation Record (*45*) is "1", this record is required to explain the problem encountered. Otherwise, this record is optional. *46* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *46* CC 11-80 COMMENT. IF THE COMMENT(S) EXCEED 7O CHARACTERS, USE ANOTHER *46* RECORD FOR CONTINUATION. ANY NUMBER OF *46* RECORDS IS ALLOWED. BUT, DO NOT DIVIDE WORDS BETWEEN CONSECUTIVE *46* RECORDS. DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION CONTINUATION RECORD (*47*) Use this record to indicate the Job-Specific Instrument (JSI) Number of the leveling rod and the initials of the observing agency. *47* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *47*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). MUST BE THE SAME SSN AS ON THE PRECEDING *45* RECORD. CC 15-16 BLANK. CC 17-54 BLANK. CC 55-57 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT (JSIN) NUMBER. THE UNIQUE THREE-DIGIT NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE LEVEL ROD USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. REFER TO PAGES 2-10 AND 2-28. CC 58-63 OBSERVING ORGANIZATION. USE THE ABBREVIATION FOUND IN ANNEX C WHICH IDENTIFIES THE ORGANIZATION THAT OBSERVED THE DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION BETWEEN THE TWO MARKS. ANY ABBREVIATION NOT FOUND IN ANNEX C MUST BE APPROVED BY NGS PRIOR TO SUBMITTING THE DATA. CC 64-80 BLANK. 2-63 TAPED DISTANCE RECORD (*50*) Use this record for distances measured with either calibrated (standardized) or uncalibrated steel or invar tapes. Included are distances consisting of any number of segments taped horizontally, taped distances consisting of any number of segments which have all been individually reduced to a common horizontal reference surface (other than the sea level or the ellipsoid) and one- segment unreduced tape distances (less than or equal to one tape length) measured along a slope. Use the *52* record for taped distances reduced to sea level or geoid, to the ellipsoid, or to mark-to-mark. See pages 2-24 thru 2-26, DISTANCE DATA RECORDS. *50* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *50*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 15-19 WEATHER CODE. THE FIRST COLUMN OF THIS CODE (15) IS A PROBLEM INDICATOR FOLLOWED BY VISIBILITY, TEMPERATURE, CLOUD COVER AND WIND INDICATORS IN SUCCESSION. IF THE PROBLEM INDICATOR IS "1", A *55* RECORD IS REQUIRED. SEE PAGE 2-10, WEATHER CODE. CC 20-22 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER. CC 23-25 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER. THE UNIQUE THREE- DIGIT NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. REFER TO PAGES 2-10 AND 2-28. CC 26-29 TAPE SUPPORT HEIGHT. IN METERS (MMmm). USED ONLY FOR A CODE "S" DISTANCE. ENTER THE VERTICAL HEIGHT OF THE TAPE SUPPORT (IF ANY) ABOVE THE INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT) MARK TO THE NEAREST CENTIMETER (cm). CC 30-34 ELEVATION OF INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). IN METERS (MMMMm). FOR A CODE "H" DISTANCE ENTER THE ELEVATION TO WHICH THE TAPED DISTANCE WAS REDUCED. CC 35-40 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). CC 41-44 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE PAGES 2-7, TIME AND 2-25, DATE AND TIME. CC 45 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER FROM ANNEX H WHICH REPRESENTS THE TIME ZONE OCCUPIED. REFER TO PAGE 2-7, TIME ZONE. CC 46-49 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). CC 50-53 TAPE SUPPORT HEIGHT. IN METERS (MMmm). USED ONLY FOR A CODE "S" DISTANCE. ENTER THE VERTICAL HEIGHT OF THE TAPE SUPPORT (IF ANY) ABOVE THE TARGET STATION (STANDPOINT) MARK TO THE NEAREST CENTIMETER (cm). CC 54-58 DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION. IN METERS (MMmm). USED ONLY FOR A CODE "S" DISTANCE. ENTER THE DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION FROM MARK TO MARK WITH RESPECT TO THE INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE BELOW OR PAGE 2-11. 2-64 CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF COMPLETE MEASUREMENTS OR DETERMINATIONS USED TO CALCULATE THE MEAN TAPED DISTANCE CODED IN THIS RECORD. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. IN MILLIMETERS (XX). MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION OF OBSERVATIONS FROM THE MEAN . CC 64-72 CORRECTED TAPED DISTANCE. IN METERS (MMMMMmmmm). TAPED HORIZON- TAL (CODE T), REDUCED TO HORIZONTAL (CODE H) OR SLOPE (CODE S) DISTANCE WITH STANDARDIZATION, CATENARY AND TEMPERATURE CORRECTIONS APPLIED AS APPLICABLE TO THE METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND/OR EQUIPMENT USED. CC 73 DISTANCE CODE. SEE BELOW OR PAGE 2-26. CC 74-76 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN MILLIMETERS (XXx). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. REFER TO PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. CC 77-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN PARTS PER MILLION (XXXx). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE PAGE 2-25. VISIBILITY CODES 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 컴커 � Code Description � � � � R TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT) IS A REFERENCE MARK � � � � Z TARGET STATION IS AN AZIMUTH MARK � � � � V TARGET STATION IS VISIBLE FROM THE GROUND � � � � N TARGET STATION IS NOT VISIBLE FROM THE GROUND � 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴 � DISTANCE CODES 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 컴커 � Code Description � � � � T TAPED HORIZONTAL DISTANCE � � � � H TAPED SLOPE DISTANCE REDUCED TO HORIZONTAL � � � � S TAPED SLOPE DISTANCE (ONE TAPE LENGTH OR LESS) � 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴 � 2-65 UNREDUCED DISTANCE RECORD (*51*) Use this record for slant-range distances less than 100 kilometers in length, measured with electronic distance-measuring equipment (DME). Included are line-of-sight instrument-to-reflector distances measured with electro-optical DME and master-to-remote distances measured with microwave DME. Precision or resolution of the measured distance must be 1 centimeter or better. Use *53* record for coarser resolution DME. Instrument and/or reflector calibration corrections and refraction correction are assumed to have been applied. See pages 2-24 thru 2-26, DISTANCE DATA RECORDS. *51* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *51*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 15-19 WEATHER CODE. SAME FORMAT AS THE *50* RECORD. SEE PAGE 2-10, WEATHER CODE. CC 20-22 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER. CC 23-25 JOB SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER (JSIN). THE UNIQUE THREE DIGIT NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. REFER TO PAGES 2-10 AND 2-28 FOR DETAILED EXPLANATION. CC 26-29 HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE OCCUPIED SURVEY MARK (POINT) TO THE OPTICAL CENTER OF THE SURVEYING INSTRUMENT. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 30-34 BLANK CC 35-40 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). CC 41-44 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE PAGES 2-7, TIME AND 2-25, DATE AND TIME. CC 45 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FORM ANNEX H WHICH REPRESENTS THE TIME ZONE OCCUPIED. REFER TO PAGE 2-7, TIME ZONE. CC 46-49 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). CC 50-53 HEIGHT OF REFLECTOR. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE TARGET STATION SURVEY MARK TO THE REFLECTOR ABOVE THE MARK USED FOR THE DISTANCE OBSERVATION IN METERS (MMmm). REFER TO PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. CC 54-58 BLANK CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE PAGE 2-11 OR SEE TEXT FOR THE *50* RECORD FORMAT. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF COMPLETE MEASUREMENTS OR DETERMINATIONS USED TO CALCULATE THE MEAN CORRECTED SLANT-RANGE DISTANCE CODED IN THIS RECORD. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION OF OBSERVATIONS FROM THE MEAN VALUE. IN MILLIMETERS. CC 64-72 CORRECTED SLANT-RANGE DISTANCE. IN METERS (MMMMMmmmm). CORRECTIONS FOR THE INSTRUMENT, REFLECTOR AND REFRACTION ARE ASSUMED APPLIED AS APPLICABLE TO THE METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND/OR THE EQUIPMENT USED CC 73 DISTANCE CODE. MUST BE "S". 2-66 CC 74-76 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN MILLIMETERS (XXx). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. REFER TO PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. CC 77-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN PARTS PER MILLION (XXXx). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE PAGE 2-25. 2-67 REDUCED DISTANCE RECORD (*52*) Use this record for distances of less than 100 kilometers in length, measured to a precision of 1 centimeter or better that have been reduced to sea level or the geoid (code G), to the ellipsoid (code E), or to mark-to-mark (code X). Use *54* record for coarser-precision distances. This record is intended for taped distances and distances measured with electronic DME. In every case, the distance given is assumed to be the appropriately reduced value corresponding to the mean of the respective sample of distance measurements to which all applicable corrections have been applied. Among the required data items on this record are the values of the elevations (and of the geoid heights, if applicable) which were used in the respective reduction process. These values may be different than those given on the corresponding *80*-series records. *52* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *52*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 15-19 WEATHER CODE. SAME FORMAT AS *50* AND *51* RECORDS. CC 20-22 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER. CC 23-25 JOB SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER. THE UNIQUE THREE DIGIT NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS MEASUREMENT. SEE PAGES 2-10 AND 2-28. CC 26-29 GEOID HEIGHT. IN METERS (MMMm). VALUE USED IN THE REDUCTION PROCESS. LEAVE BLANK FOR CODE "G" DISTANCE. IF THE GEOID HEIGHT IS NEGATIVE, CODE THE MINUS SIGN (-) IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE LEFTMOST DIGIT AND BLANK FILL COLUMNS LEFT OF THE MINUS SIGN. CC 30-34 ELEVATION OF THE INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT) MARK. RECORD THE VALUE USED IN THE REDUCTION PROCESS. IN METERS (MMMMm). CC 35-40 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). CC 41-44 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE PAGE 2-7, TIME. CC 45 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H WHICH APPLIES. CC 46-49 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). CC 50-53 GEOID HEIGHT. IN METERS (MMMm). VALUE USED IN THE REDUCTION PROCESS. LEAVE BLANK FOR CODE "G" DISTANCE. IF THE GEOID HEIGHT IS NEGATIVE, CODE THE MINUS SIGN (-) IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE LEFTMOST DIGIT AND BLANK FILL COLUMNS LEFT OF THE MINUS SIGN. CC 54-58 ELEVATION OF THE TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT) MARK. RECORD THE VALUE USED IN THE REDUCTION PROCESS. IN METERS (MMMMm). CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE PAGE 2-12 OR THE TABLE BELOW. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF MEASUREMENTS USED TO CALCULATE THE MEAN REDUCED DISTANCE CODED IN THIS RECORD. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS FROM THE MEAN VALUE. IN MILLIMETERS (XX). 2-68 CC 64-72 REDUCED DISTANCE. IN METERS (MMMMMmmmm). ENTER DISTANCE REDUCED TO SEA LEVEL OR THE GEOID (CODE G), TO THE ELLIPSOID (CODE E), OR TO MARK-TO-MARK (CODE X). DO NOT ENTER TO MORE DECIMAL PLACES THAN IS WARRANTED BY THE PRECISION OF THE OBSERVATION. CC 73 DISTANCE CODE. SEE PAGE 2-26 OR THE TABLE BELOW. CC 74-76 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN MILLIMETERS (XXx). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. REFER TO PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. CC 77-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN PARTS PER MILLION (XXXx). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE PAGE 2-25 AND PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. VISIBILITY CODES 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 컴커 � Code Description � � � � R TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT) IS A REFERENCE MARK � � � � Z TARGET STATION IS AN AZIMUTH MARK � � � � V TARGET STATION IS VISIBLE FROM THE GROUND � � � � N TARGET STATION IS NOT VISIBLE FROM THE GROUND � 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴 � REDUCED DISTANCE CODES 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 컴커 � Code Description � � � � G MEASURED DISTANCES REDUCED TO THE GEOID � � � � E MEASURED DISTANCES REDUCED TO THE ELLIPSOID � � � � X MEASURED DISTANCES REDUCED TO MARK-TO-MARK � 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴 � 2-69 UNREDUCED LONG LINE RECORD (*53*) Use this record for instrument-to-instrument spatial-chord distances derived from long-range electronic DME observations (e.g., HIRAN), obtained by extra-terrestrial methods (e.g., VLBI), or for slant-range distances measured by coarse-resolution DME. This record is intended for measured distances of 100 kilometers and longer. Since long-line and/or course-resolution distance measurements do not normally exhibit any proportional relationship with the length of the line, the External Consistency Sigma on the *53* and *54* records is expressed in meters. *53* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *53*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 15-22 BLANK CC 23-25 JOB SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER. THE UNIQUE THREE DIGIT NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS MEASUREMENT. SEE PAGES 2-10 AND 2-28. CC 26-29 HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT (ANTENNA). IN METERS (MMmm). ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT) MARK TO THE ACTUAL ORIGIN OF THE MEASURED DISTANCE ABOVE/BELOW THE MARK. CC 30-34 BLANK CC 35-40 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). CC 41-44 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE PAGE 2-25, DATE AND TIME. CC 45 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H WHICH REPRESENTS THE TIME ZONE OCCUPIED. REFER TO PAGE 2-7, TIME ZONE. CC 46-49 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). CC 50-53 HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT (ANTENNA). IN METERS (MMmm). ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT) MARK TO THE ACTUAL TERMINAL POINT OF THE MEASURED DISTANCE ABOVE/BELOW THE MARK. CC 54-58 BLANK CC 59-60 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF COMPLETE MEASUREMENTS USED TO CALCULATE THE MEAN CORRECTED SLANT-RANGE DISTANCE CODED IN THIS RECORD. CC 61-63 REJECTION LIMIT. MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION OF OBSERVATIONS FROM THE MEAN VALUE. IN METERS (MMm). CC 64-73 CORRECTED SPATIAL-CHORD DISTANCE. DERIVED INSTRUMENT-TO- INSTRUMENT (ANTENNA-TO- ANTENNA) SPACIAL-CHORD (CODE C) OR DIRECTLY-OBSERVED SLANT RANGE (CODE S) WITH ALL APPLICABLE CORRECTIONS APPLIED. IN METERS (MMMMMMMmmm). CC 74 DISTANCE CODE. SEE ABOVE. CC 57-77 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN METERS (Mmm). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. REFER TO PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. CC 78-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN METERS (Mmm). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE PAGE 2-25. 2-70 REDUCED LONG LINE RECORD (*54*) Use this record for long lines, 100 kilometers and longer, or for any distances measured to a precision coarser than 1 centimeter, which have been reduced to sea level or the geoid (Code G), to the ellipsoid (Code E), or to mark-to-mark spatial-chord distance (Code X). Since the predominate external random errors associated with long-line and/or coarse-resolution distance measurements do not normally exhibit any proportional relationship with the length of the line, the External Consistency Sigma on the *53* and *54* records is expressed in meters. *54* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *54*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 15-22 BLANK CC 23-25 JOB SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER. THE UNIQUE THREE DIGIT NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS MEASUREMENT. SEE PAGES 2-10 AND 2-28. CC 26-29 GEOID HEIGHT. IN METERS (MMMm). VALUE USED IN THE REDUCTION PROCESS FOR THE INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). LEAVE BLANK FOR CODE G DISTANCE. IF THE GEOID HEIGHT IS NEGATIVE, CODE THE MINUS SIGN (- ) IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE LEFTMOST DIGIT AND BLANK FILL THE COLUMNS LEFT OF THE MINUS SIGN. CC 30-34 ELEVATION OF THE INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT) MARK. RECORD THE VALUE USED IN THE REDUCTION PROCESS. (POSSIBLY DIFFERENT THAN THE ELEVATION GIVEN ON THE CORRESPONDING *80* OR *81* RECORD. IN METERS (MMMMm). CC 35-40 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). CC 41-44 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). CC 45 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H WHICH REPRESENTS THE TIME ZONE OCCUPIED. CC 46-49 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). CC 50-53 GEOID HEIGHT. IN METERS (MMMm). VALUE USED IN THE REDUCTION PROCESS FOR THE TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). LEAVE BLANK FOR CODE G DISTANCE. IF THE GEOID HEIGHT IS NEGATIVE, CODE THE MINUS SIGN (- ) IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE LEFTMOST DIGIT AND BLANK FILL THE COLUMNS LEFT OF THE MINUS SIGN. CC 54-58 ELEVATION OF THE TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT) MARK. RECORD THE VALUE USED IN THE REDUCTION PROCESS (POSSIBLY DIFFERENT THAN THE ELEVATION GIVEN ON THE CORRESPONDING *80* OR *81* RECORD. IN METERS (MMMMm). CC 59-60 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF COMPLETE MEASUREMENTS USED TO CALCULATE THE MEAN REDUCED OBSERVATION CODED IN THIS RECORD. CC 61-63 REJECTION LIMIT. MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION OF MEASUREMENTS FROM THE MEAN VALUE. IN METERS (MMm). 2-71 CC 64-73 REDUCED DISTANCE. IN METERS (MMMMMMMmmm). ENTER DISTANCE REDUCED TO SEA LEVEL OR THE GEOID (CODE G), TO THE ELLIPSOID (CODE E), OR TO MARK-TO-MARK (CODE X). DO NOT ENTER TO MORE DECIMAL PLACES THAN IS WARRANTED BY THE PRECISION OF THE OBSERVATION. CC 74 DISTANCE CODE. ENTER THE APPROPRIATE G, E, OR X DESCRIBED ABOVE AND ON PAGE 2-28. CC 75-77 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN METERS (Mmm). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. REFER TO PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. CC 78-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN METERS (Mmm). ENTER ONLY IF RELIABLE ESTIMATES ARE AVAILABLE. SEE PAGES 2-25 AND PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17, ACCURACY OF THE OBSERVATIONS. HORIZONTAL DISTANCE COMMENT RECORD (*55*) Use this record for comments pertaining to the set of observed horizontal distances. This record is required to explain the problem encountered when the problem indicator (column 15) on the preceding Horizontal Distance Records (*50*, *51*, or *52*) is "1". Otherwise, this record is optional. *55* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *55*. CC 11-80 COMMENT. IF THE COMMENT(s) EXCEED 70 CHARACTERS, USE ANOTHER *55* RECORD FOR CONTINUATION. ANY NUMBER OF *55* RECORDS IS ALLOWED. BUT, DO NOT DIVIDE WORDS BETWEEN CONSECUTIVE *55* RECORDS. 2-72 ASTRONOMIC AZIMUTH/LAPLACE RECORD (*60*) Submit this record for every astronomic azimuth observed in the project. If two or more sets of astronomic azimuth observations are taken (e.g., sets observed on different nights), submit a separate *60* record for each set. The desired astronomic azimuth coded in this record is the mean value of the respective set of astronomic observations to which all applicable corrections have been applied. A Laplace azimuth is an astronomic azimuth determination (from observations of a star) converted to the corresponding geodetic azimuth by the application of the Laplace correction (n * tan L). A data element necessary for the computation of a Laplace correction is the east-west (prime-vertical) component of the deflection of vertical (eta) at the respective instrument station (standpoint). Use the following formula to compute a Laplace azimuth: G = A + n * tan L where : G = geodetic azimuth (d,m,s) A = astronomic azimuth (d,m,s) n = eta (seconds) L = geodetic latitude of the instrument station (standpoint) If a reliable Eta value is unavailable, submit the *60* record with blanks in columns 15-19 and enter a code "A" in column 20 to designate the azimuth in columns 64-71 as Astronomic. Enter a code "L" in column 20 to designate the azimuth in columns 64-71 as Laplace, indicating that the Laplace correction has been applied. *60* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *60*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 15-18 PRIME-VERTICAL COMPONENT OF DEFLECTION (ETA) VALUE USED IN LAPLACE CORRECTION. IN SECONDS (SSSs). CC 19 DIRECTION OF ETA. ENTER CODE "E" FOR EAST OR CODE "W" FOR WEST. CC 20 COMPUTATION CODE. ENTER CODE "A" FOR ASTRONOMIC OR CODE "L" FOR LAPLACE. CC 21-29 BLANK CC 30-32 INITIALS OF THE OBSERVER. CC 33-35 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER. THE UNIQUE THREE- DIGIT NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE INSTRUMENT USED TO OBTAIN THIS OBSERVATION. REFER TO PAGES 2-10 AND 2-28. CC 36-39 HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE FROM THE TOP OF THE INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT) MARK TO THE OPTICAL CENTER OF THE SURVEYING INSTRUMENT. IN METERS (MMmm). SEE PAGE 2-11, HEIGHT OF INSTRUMENT AND HEIGHT OF TARGET. 2-73 CC 40-45 DATE OF OBSERVATION. YEAR, MONTH, DAY (YYMMDD). CC 46-49 LOCAL TIME. HOURS, MINUTES (HHMM). SEE PAGES 2-7, TIME AND 2-27, DATE AND TIME. CC 50 TIME ZONE. ENTER THE LETTER CODE FROM ANNEX H WHICH REPRESENTS THE TIME ZONE OCCUPIED. REFER TO PAGE 2-7, TIME ZONE. CC 51-54 STATION SERIAL NUMBER. TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). CC 55-58 HEIGHT OF TARGET. ENTER THE VERTICAL DISTANCE. CC 59 VISIBILITY CODE. SEE PAGE 2-11. CC 60-61 NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS. NUMBER OF COMPLETE MEASUREMENTS OR DETERMINATIONS USED TO CALCULATE THE MEAN CORRECTED AZIMUTH OBSERVATION IN THIS RECORD. CC 62-63 REJECTION LIMIT. MAXIMUM ALLOWED DEVIATION OF OBSERVATIONS FROM THE MEAN VALUE. IN SECONDS. CC 64-71 ASTRONOMIC/LAPLACE AZIMUTH. DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS (DDDMMSSs). ASTRONOMIC AZIMUTH OBSERVATION (MEAN OF ONE SET) WITHOUT THE LAPLACE CORRECTION APPLIED (CODE A) OR WITH THE LAPLACE CORRECTION APPLIED (CODE L). DO NOT APPLY A SKEW NORMAL, GEODESIC, OR DEFLECTION CORRECTION. CC 72 ORIGIN OF AZIMUTH. ENTER CODE "N" FOR NORTH OR CODE "S" FOR SOUTH. CC 73-76 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS (SSss). ENTER ONLY IF A RELIABLE ESTIMATE IS AVAILABLE. REFER TO PAGES 2-15 THRU 2-17. CC 77-80 EXTERNAL CONSISTENCY. SIGMA IN SECONDS (SSss). ENTER ONLY IF A RELIABLE ESTIMATE IS AVAILABLE. 2-74 GEODETIC AZIMUTH RECORD (*61*) Use this record for each computed geodetic azimuth used to orient this survey project. Record either a published azimuth to an azimuth mark from a previously established (published) control station that was occupied in this project, or geodetic azimuth obtained from an inverse position computation. *61* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *61*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). INSTRUMENT STATION (STANDPOINT). CC 15-50 BLANK CC 51-54 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). TARGET STATION (FOREPOINT). CC 55-63 BLANK CC 64-71 GEODETIC AZIMUTH. DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS (DDDMMSSs). CC 72 ORIGIN OF AZIMUTH. CODE "N" FOR NORTH OR CODE "S" FOR SOUTH. CC 73-80 BLANK 2-75 INSTRUMENT RECORD (*70*) Use this record to provide descriptive information for each item of survey equipment used in the job. This information will be used as an accuracy indicator for each observation in the survey. Assign a unique three-digit number Job-Specific Instrument Number (JSIN), to each piece of equipment used in the project. This record will cross-reference the assigned JSIN to the NGS Survey Equipment Codes found in Annex F. More than one *70* record is required for any instrument used for more than one type of measurement. See Chapter 2, page 2-28, Survey Equipment Data Records. *70* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. MUST BE AN INCREMENT OF 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *70*. CC 11-13 JOB-SPECIFIC INSTRUMENT NUMBER (JSIN). MUST BE UNIQUE FOR EACH INSTRUMENT IN JOB. SEE PAGES 2- 10 AND 2-28. CC 14-16 NGS SURVEY EQUIPMENT CODE. SEE ANNEX F. USED TO IDENTIFY THE INSTRUMENT WHICH WAS ASSIGNED THE JSIN IN CC 11-13 ABOVE. CC 17-20 RESOLUTION OF THE INSTRUMENT. RECORD THE SIZE OF THE SMALLEST DIRECTLY READABLE MEASUREMENT UNIT OR THE RESOLUTION PUBLISHED BY THE INSTRUMENT MANUFACTURER, WHICHEVER IS LARGER (XXxx). CC 21-22 UNITS. UNITS OF THE RESOLUTION USED IN CC 17-20 ABOVE. SEE PAGE 2-28, RESOLUTION OF THE INSTRUMENT AND UNITS. CC 23-40 MANUFACTURER OF THE INSTRUMENT. SEE ANNEX F. (EXAMPLES: WILD, ZEISS/JENA, HEWLETT PACKARD). CC 41-62 TYPE OF INSTRUMENT OR TRADE NAME. SEE ANNEX F. (EXAMPLES; DIRECTION THEODOLITE, CALIB INVAR TAPE, RANGE MASTER, TELLUROMETER). CC 63-70 MODEL OR CLASS OF INSTRUMENT. SEE ANNEX F. (EXAMPLES: T-3, MA-100, 30-MT, 100-FT). CC 71-80 SERIAL NUMBER. ALPHANUMERIC AND LEFT JUSTIFIED. LEAVE BLANK IF THE SERIAL NUMBER IS NOT KNOWN. 2-76 CONTROL POINT RECORD (*80*) Use this record for the designation (name) and geographic position in geodetic coordinates (latitude and longitude) of each control point in the project. If the position is given in Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates or in State Plane Coordinates (SPC), use the *81* record. The geodetic position of every horizontal control point for which a *80* record is submitted must be provided in order to serve as either a fixed (constrained) position or as a preliminary position in the adjustment of the horizontal control survey project. NOTE: Although columns 70-75 and column 76 of this record are currently used for recording the elevation and elevation code, NGS may discontinue this in the near future. NGS prefers that you use the new *86* record for this purpose. For every *80* or *81* record submitted, the elevation of each control point must be provided, except for unmonumented recoverable landmarks positioned by intersection. For such landmarks, the elevation field may be left blank. However, when the elevation of an unmonumented recoverable landmark is given, it should be the ground level elevation and the height above ground level of the point actually sighted should be entered as the height of target on the respective observation record. The first character of the order and type code indicates the order of accuracy of the main-scheme network in the project. It reflects the surveying methods used, procedures followed and specifications enforced to obtain the observations of the project. The second character of the order and type code indicates the type of survey scheme of which the control point in question is a part and/or the (primary) surveying method used to position the control point. Refer to pages 2-35 thru 2-38 for additional information. TABLE OF ELEVATION CODES CODE EXPLANATION A The control point is a bench mark (BM) in the NGSIDB. B BM determined using FGCS/NGS procedures but not in the NGSIDB. C The control point is a 'posted' bench mark. H OHT determined using FGCS procedures but tied to only one (1) BM. L OHT established using NGS leveling RESET procedures. F OHT established using fly-leveling. T OHT determined by leveling between control points which are not BMs. R OHT determined by reciprocal vertical angles. V OHT determined by non-reciprocal vertical angles. P OHT determined by a photogrammetric method. M OHT scaled from a topographic map. G OHT determined from an ellipsoidal height. D OHT determined by datum transformation. 2-77 *80* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *80*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). SEE PAGES 1-1, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING AND 2-12, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS. CC 15-44 STATION NAME. MUST NOT EXCEED 30 CHARACTERS. THE NAME OF A HORIZONTAL CONTROL POINT WITH PERIPHERAL REFERENCE MARKS AND/OR AZIMUTH MARKS MUST NOT EXCEED 24 CHARACTERS TO ALLOW FOR ADDING RM 1, RM 2, AND/OR AZ MK TO THE NAME WITHOUT EXCEEDING THE 30 CHARACTER LENGTH LIMIT. CC 45-55 LATITUDE. DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS (DDMMSSsssss). CC 56 DIRECTION OF LATITUDE. RECORD CODE "N" FOR NORTH OR CODE "S" FOR SOUTH. CC 57-68 LONGITUDE. DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS, (DDDMMSSsssss). CC 69 DIRECTION OF LONGITUDE. RECORD CODE "E" FOR EAST OR CODE "W" FOR WEST. NGS PREFERS THAT YOU USE THE NEW *86* RECORD FOR RECORDING THE ELEVATION (ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT) AND ELEVATION CODE INSTEAD OF THE TWO DATA FIELDS THAT FOLLOW. REFER TO PAGES 2-83 THRU 2-85. CC 70-75 ELEVATION. RECORD ELEVATION OF MARK ABOVE MEAN SEA LEVEL. IN METERS (MMMMmm). ENTER THE ELEVATION TO THE NEAREST CENTIMETER (cm). IF MEASUREMENT IS ONLY OBSERVED TO THE NEAREST DECIMETER (dm), LEAVE CC 75 BLANK, IF OBSERVED ONLY TO THE NEAREST METER (M), LEAVE CC 74-75 BLANK. THE APPROPRIATE ELEVATION CODE MUST BE ENTERED IN CC 76. REFER TO PAGES 2-34 and 2-35, ELEVATION AND ELEVATION CODE. CC 76 ELEVATION CODE. CC 77-78 STATE OR COUNTRY CODE. IF THE CONTROL STATE IS LOCATED IN THE UNITED STATES/CANADA, ENTER THE CODE FROM ANNEX A FOR THE STATE/PROVINCE OR TERRITORY WHICH CONTAINS THE STATION. IF NOT, ENTER THE CODE FROM ANNEX A FOR THE COUNTRY WHICH CONTAINS THE STATION. SEE ANNEX A. CC 79-80 STATION ORDER AND TYPE. REFER TO PAGES 2-35 THRU 2-38, STATION ORDER AND TYPE AND SEE ANNEX E. 2-78 CONTROL POINT (UTM/SPC) RECORD (*81*) Use this record for the designation (name) and position in Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) coordinates or in State Plane Coordinates (SPC) of each control point in the project. If the position is expressed in geodetic latitude and longitude, use the *80* record. The geodetic position of every horizontal control point for which a *81* record is submitted must be provided to serve as either a fixed (constrained) position or as a preliminary position in the adjustment of the horizontal control survey project. NOTE: Although columns 70-75 and column 76 of this record are currently used for recording the elevation and elevation code, NGS may discontinue this in the near future. NGS prefers that you use the new *86* record for this purpose. *81* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *81*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). SEE PAGES 1-1, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING AND 2-12, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS. CC 15-44 STATION NAME. MUST NOT EXCEED 30 CHARACTERS. THE NAME OF A HORIZONTAL CONTROL POINT WITH PERIPHERAL REFERENCE MARKS AND/OR AZIMUTH MARKS MUST NOT EXCEED 24 CHARACTERS TO ALLOW FOR ADDING RM 1, RM 2, AND/OR AZ MK TO THE NAME WITHOUT EXCEEDING THE 30 CHARACTER LENGTH LIMIT. CC 45-55 UTM/SPC NORTHING (Y COORDINATE). IN METERS (MMMMMMMMmmm). CC 56-65 UTM/SPC EASTING (X COORDINATE). IN METERS (MMMMMMMmmm). CC 66-69 UTM/SPC ZONE CODE. NGS PREFERS THAT YOU USE THE NEW *86* RECORD FOR RECORDING THE ELEVATION (ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT) AND ELEVATION CODE INSTEAD OF THE TWO DATA FIELDS THAT FOLLOW. REFER TO PAGES 2-83 THRU 2-85. CC 70-75 ELEVATION. RECORD ELEVATION OF MARK ABOVE MEAN SEA LEVEL. IN METERS (MMMMmm). ENTER THE ELEVATION TO THE NEAREST CENTIMETER (cm). IF THE MEASUREMENT IS ONLY OBSERVED TO THE NEAREST DECIMETER (dm), LEAVE CC 75 BLANK, IF OBSERVED ONLY TO THE NEAREST METER (M), LEAVE CC 74-75 BLANK. REFER TO PAGES 2-34 and 2-35, ELEVATION AND ELEVATION CODE. CC 76 ELEVATION CODE. CC 77-78 STATE OR COUNTRY CODE. IF THE CONTROL STATE IS LOCATED IN THE UNITED STATES/CANADA, ENTER THE CODE FROM ANNEX A FOR THE STATE/PROVINCE OR TERRITORY WHICH CONTAINS THE STATION. IF NOT, ENTER THE CODE FROM ANNEX A FOR THE COUNTRY WHICH CONTAINS THE STATION. SEE ANNEX A. CC 79-80 STATION ORDER AND TYPE. REFER TO PAGES 2-35 THRU 2-38, STATION ORDER AND TYPE. SEE ANNEX E. 2-79 REFERENCE OR AZIMUTH MARK RECORD (*82*) Use this record to give the name or destination of each reference mark (RM) or azimuth mark (AZ MK). Follow each horizontal control point record, *80* or *81*, with as many *82* records as there are peripheral reference marks and/or azimuth marks associated with the horizontal control point in question. Distance, direction and/or angle observations to an RM or AZ MK must appear among the *20*-series (direction) and/or the 30*-series (angle) and the *50*-series (distance) observation records. Do not submit a *82* record for a RM or AZ MK which is being used as a horizontal control point (i.e., when the RM or AZ MK has an adjusted geodetic position or when the position is to be determined). Instead, submit a *80* or *81* record, identifying the station with a four- digit station serial number (SSN). Use this record in lieu of the *80* or *81* record for observed horizontal points to which direction, angle, and/or distance observations were made but which (1) cannot be positioned using data of this project alone, and (2) for which a position is not available from other sources. For submitting unpositionable vertical control points, use the *82* record. *82* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *82*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). REFER TO PAGES 1-1 THRU 1-3, JOB CODE AND SURVEY POINT NUMBERING AND 2-12 THRU 2-13, ASSIGNMENT OF STATION SERIAL NUMBERS. CC 15-44 NAME OF RM OR AZ MK. MUST NOT EXCEED 30 CHARACTERS. NORMALLY, THE NAME OF A RM OR AN AZ MK IS COMPOSED BY APPENDING "RM 1", "RM 2", ETC. OR "AZ MK" TO THE NAME OF THE CONTROL (PARENT) STATION REFERENCED. SEE PAGE 2-32, NAME OR DESIGNATION OF RM OR AZ MK. CC 45-50 BLANK CC 51-54 CONTROL STATION (SSN). ENTER THE SSN OF THE CONTROL (PARENT) STATION FOR WHICH THE STATION IDENTIFIED IN CC 11-14 IS A REFERENCE OR AZIMUTH MARK. CC 55-80 BLANK 2-80 BENCH MARK RECORD (*83*) NGS has discontinued the use of this record. Effective immediately, record this vertical control data in the Orthometric Height, Geoid Height, Ellipsoid Height Record (*86*). See pages 2-83 thru 2-85. GEOID HEIGHT RECORD (*84*) NGS has discontinued the use of this record. Effective immediately, record this data, if required, in the Orthometric Height, Geoid Height, Ellipsoid Height Record (*86*). See page 2- 83 thru 85. 2-81 DEFLECTION RECORD (*85*) Use this record to give the source and the values of the meridional component (Xi) and/or prime-vertical component (Eta) of the deflection of vertical. The datum must be North American 1983 or as specified on the Datum and Ellipsoid (*13*) record. This record is optional. *85* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *85*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). HORIZONTAL CONTROL POINT. CC 15-20 SOURCE. AGENCY OR ORGANIZATION WHICH DETERMINED THE DEFLECTION. USE THE ABBREVIATIONS LISTED IN ANNEX C OR THE ONE SPECIFIED ON THE DATA SET IDENTIFICATION RECORD (*aa*). CC 21-62 COMMENT. USE THIS SPACE TO CLARIFY THE SOURCE OF THE DEFLECTION INFORMATION. CC 63-67 MERIDIONAL COMPONENT (Xi) OF THE DEFLECTION OF VERTICAL. IN SECONDS (XXXxx). CC 68 DIRECTION OF Xi. USE CODE "N" FOR NORTH OR CODE "S" FOR SOUTH. CC 69-71 SIGMA. ESTIMATED ACCURACY (STANDARD ERROR) OF Xi. IN SECONDS (Xxx). CC 72-76 PRIME-VERTICAL COMPONENT (Eta) OF THE DEFLECTION OF VERTICAL. IN SECONDS (XXXxx). CC 77 DIRECTION OF Eta. USE CODE "E" FOR EAST OR CODE "W" FOR WEST. CC 78-80 SIGMA. ESTIMATED ACCURACY (STANDARD ERROR) OF Eta. IN SECONDS (Xxx). For a more detailed explanation of the contents of this record see Chapter 2, pages 2-39 and 2-40, Deflection of Vertical. 2-82 ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT, GEOID HEIGHT, ELLIPSOID HEIGHT RECORD (*86*) Use this record to give the values of orthometric height, geoid height, and/or ellipsoid height of control points in this project. For every Control Point Record (*80* or *81*), the orthometric height, commonly referred to as the elevation, of each control point must be provided, except for unmonumented recoverable landmarks positioned by intersection. For such landmarks, this record need not be submitted. However, when the elevation of an unmonumented recoverable landmark is given, it should be the orthometric height at ground level , and the height above ground level of the point actually sighted should be entered as the height of target on the respective observation record. The geoid height and ellipsoid height values are optional, with one exception. The geoid height is required if the orthometric height is determined from GPS observations (code G in the Table of Orthometric Height Codes listed on the following page). If values for the geoid height and/or ellipsoid height are provided, then the associated codes for each are required. The submitting organization may leave the orthometric height Order and Class code blank. These fields should only be filled if the orthometric height is adjusted and included in the National Geodetic Survey Integrated Database (NGSIDB). The submitting organization may leave the Orthometric Height (OHT) Code field blank if the orthometric height was obtained from the NGSIDB. The Orthometric Height (OHT) NGSIDB Indicator field must be used to say whether the orthometric height came from the NGSIDB or not. *86* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *86*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). CC 15-16 BLANK CC 17-23 ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT. IN METERS (MMMMmmm). CC 24 ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT CODE. SEE FOLLOWING TABLES. CC 25-26 ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT ORDER AND CLASS. USE PUBLISHED VERTICAL ORDER AND CLASS, OTHERWISE LEAVE BLANK. CC 27 ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT NGSIDB INDICATOR. SEE FOLLOWING TABLES. CC 28-29 ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT DATUM. SEE FOLLOWING TABLES. CC 30-35 ORGANIZATION WHICH ESTABLISHED AND/OR MAINTAINS THE ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT OF THE CONTROL POINT. ENTER THE ABBREVIATION LISTED IN ANNEX C OR ON THE DATASET IDENTIFICATION RECORD. CC 36-42 GEOID HEIGHT. ABOVE (POSITIVE) OR BELOW (NEGATIVE) THE REFERENCE ELLIPSOID. IN METERS (MMMMmmm). CC 43 GEOID HEIGHT CODE. SEE FOLLOWING TABLES. CC 44-45 BLANK. 2-83 CC 46-52 ELLIPSOID HEIGHT. IN METERS (MMMMmmm). CC 53 ELLIPSOID HEIGHT CODE. SEE FOLLOWING TABLES. CC 54-55 ELLIPSOID HEIGHT ORDER AND CLASS. SEE ANNEX G. CC 56 ELLIPSOID HEIGHT DATUM. CC 57-80 COMMENTS. ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT (OHT) NGSIDB INDICATOR CODE EXPLANATION Y OHT OBTAINED FROM THE NGSIDB. N OHT IS NOT IN THE NGSIDB. TABLE OF ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT (OHT) CODES CODE EXPLANATION A OHT ESTABLISHED USING FGCS LEVELING SPECIFICATIONS AND PROCEDURES, ADJUSTED HEIGHT DETERMINED USING NGS VERTICAL NETWORK BRANCH PROCEDURES, LEVELING DATA IS IN THE NGSIDB. B OHT ESTABLISHED USING FGCS LEVELING SPECIFICATIONS AND PROCEDURES, ADJUSTED HEIGHT DETERMINED USING NGS VERTICAL NETWORK BRANCH PROCEDURES, LEVELING DATA IS NOT IN THE NGSIDB. (USGS, COE, SOME STATE DOT DATA.) C OHT ESTABLISHED USING FGCS LEVELING SPECIFICATIONS AND PROCEDURES, ADJUSTED HEIGHT IS 'POSTED'. SEE EXPLANATION IN THE FOOTNOTE (*) BELOW. H OHT ESTABLISHED USING FGCS LEVELING SPECIFICATIONS AND PROCEDURES EXCEPT FOR THE TWO-MARK LEVELING TIE REQUIREMENT. (HORIZONTAL FIELD PARTY LEVEL TIES, SOME STATE DOTS, SOME GPS LEVEL TIES.) L OHT ESTABLISHED USING LEVELING RESET SPECIFICATIONS AND PROCEDURES. F OHT ESTABLISHED BY FLY-LEVELING. T OHT ESTABLISHED BY LEVELING BETWEEN CONTROL POINTS WHICH ARE NOT BENCH MARKS. R OHT ESTABLISHED BY RECIPROCAL VERTICAL ANGLES. V OHT ESTABLISHED BY NON-RECIPROCAL VERTICAL ANGLES. P OHT ESTABLISHED BY PHOTOGRAMMETRY. M OHT ESTABLISHED BY SCALING FROM A CONTOURED MAP. G OHT ESTABLISHED BY GPS OBSERVATIONS. D OHT ESTABLISHED BY DATUM TRANSFORMATIONS. * DATA FOR LEVEL LINES CONTAINING 'POSTED' BENCH MARKS WERE PURPOSELY NOT INCLUDED IN THE NAVD88 GENERAL ADJUSTMENT. SUBSEQUENTLY, THESE DATA WERE ADJUSTED TO NAVD88 BY FORCING THEM TO FIT THE EXISTING NAVD88 GENERAL ADJUSTMENT HEIGHTS. 2-84 TABLE OF ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT (OHT) DATUMS CODE EXPLANATION 29 NATIONAL GEODETIC VERTICAL DATUM OF 1929 88 NORTH AMERICAN VERTICAL DATUM OF 1988 55 INTERNATIONAL GREAT LAKES DATUM OF 1955 85 INTERNATIONAL GREAT LAKES DATUM OF 1985 00 ANY OTHER DATUM. SPECIFY IN COMMENTS. TABLE OF GEOID HEIGHT (GHT) CODES CODE EXPLANATION P OSU78 GEOID MODEL Q OSU86F GEOID MODEL B OSU89B GEOID MODEL C GEOID90 GEOID MODEL D GEOID93 GEOID MODEL TABLE OF ELLIPSOID HEIGHT (EHT) CODES CODE EXPLANATION A EHT DETERMINED BY GPS IN A HIGH PRECISION GEODETIC NETWORK OR TIED TO A HIGH PRECISION GEODETIC NETWORK (HPGN). B EHT DETERMINED BY GPS NOT TIED TO A HPGN. C EHT DETERMINED BY ADDING A GEOID HEIGHT TO AN ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT WITH AN OHT CODE OF A, B, C, F, H, OR L. D EHT DETERMINED BY ADDING A GEOID HEIGHT TO AN ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT WITH AN OHT CODE OF T OR R. E EHT DETERMINED BY ADDING A GEOID HEIGHT TO AN ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT WITH AN OHT CODE OF V, M, P, OR D. TABLE OF ELLIPSOID HEIGHT (EHT) DATUMS CODE EXPLANATION A NORTH AMERICAN DATUM OF 1983 B INTERNATIONAL TERRESTRIAL REFERENCE FRAME OF 1989 C NATIONAL EARTH ORIENTATION SERVICE (NEOS ANNUAL REPORT FOR 1990) Z ANY OTHER DATUM. SPECIFY IN COMMENTS. 2-85 FIXED CONTROL RECORD (*90*) Use this record to identify previously established horizontal control points contained in the NGS Data Base, from which and/or to which horizontal control was extended in this project. Two or more fixed control points are expected in a horizontal control survey project. But, if only one previously established horizontal control point is identified as fixed, scale and orientation must be provided by *50*-series (distance) and *60*- series (azimuth) records. *90* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. INCREMENT BY 10 FROM THE PREVIOUS RECORD. CC 07-10 DATA CODE. MUST BE *90*. CC 11-14 STATION SERIAL NUMBER (SSN). ESTABLISHED HORIZONTAL CONTROL POINT. CC 15-20 SOURCE. AGENCY OR ORGANIZATION WHICH DETERMINED THE COORDINATES. USE THE ABBREVIATIONS LISTED IN ANNEX C OR THE ONE ON THE DATA SET IDENTIFICATION RECORD (*aa*). CC 21-74 COMMENT. IF THE NAME OF THE ORGANIZATION WHICH DETERMINED THE FIXED COORDINATES DOES NOT APPEAR IN ANNEX C OR ON THE DATA SET IDENTIFICATION RECORD, GIVE THE FULL NAME OF THE ORGANIZATION IN THIS SPACE. OTHERWISE, USE THIS SPACE FOR COMMENTS PERTINENT TO THE CONTROL POINT. CC 75-80 NGS CONTROL NUMBER. LEAVE BLANK UNLESS THIS NUMBER IS OBTAINED FROM THE NGS. CODE THE LETTER "G" IN CC 75. 2-86 DATA SET TERMINATION RECORD (*aa*) The last record in a Horizontal Observation Data set must be the Data Set Termination Record. The job code used in this record must be identical to the job code in the Data Set Identification Record, the first record in the Horizontal Observation Data Set (HZTL OBS), and identical to the job code used in both the Data Set Identification Record and the Data Set Termination Record of the Geodetic Control Point Descriptive Data Set (GEOD DESC). This record is required. *aa* FORMAT CC 01-06 SEQUENCE NUMBER. RIGHT JUSTIFIED. CC 07-10 JOB CODE. MUST BE *aa*. THE SYMBOL "aa" DENOTES THE TWO-CHARACTER JOB CODE ASSIGNED BY THE SUBMITTING ORGANIZATION. CC 11-80 BLANK For a more detailed explanation of the contents of the record see Chapter 1, page 1-1, JOB CODE AND POINT NUMBERING and Chapter 2, pages 2-1 thru 2-3, HZTL OBS DATA SET RECORDS. 2-87 FORMAT DIAGRAMS APPEAR ON THE REMAINING PAGES OF THIS CHAPTER 2-88 컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴횴ORIZONTAL횽BSERVATION횯ATA훁ET훀ECORDS컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴 컴컴컴컴컴컴� DATA SET IDENTIFICATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 18 19 24 25 46 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE JOB DATA DATA ORGANIZATION SUBMITTING ORGANIZATION NAME NUMBER CODE CLASS TYPE ABBREVIATION (See Annex C) 47 66 67 72 73 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴커 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴켸 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SUBMITTING ORGANIZATION NAME CONTINUED BLANK Y Y Y Y M M D D DATE CREATED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *10* PROJECT TITLE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA PROJECT TITLE NUMBER CODE 46 80 (INC BY 10) 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� PROJECT TITLE CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *11* PROJECT TITLE CONTINUATION RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA PROJECT TITLE CONTINUATION NUMBER CODE 46 80 (INC BY 10) 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� PROJECT TITLE CONTINUATION 2-89 *12* PROJECT INFORMATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 16 17 22 23 25 26 43 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA Y Y Y Y M M Y Y Y Y M M INITIALS FULL NAME NUMBER CODE DATE FIELD DATE FIELD C OF P CHIEF OF PARTY (INC BY 10) OBS BEGAN OBS ENDED (FIRST) 44 46 47 64 65 75 76 77 79 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� INITIALS FULL NAME BLANK TYPE STATE/ SURVEY ORDER C OF P CHIEF OF PARTY SURVEY COUNTRY AND CLASS (SECOND) CODE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *13* GEODETIC DATUM AND ELLIPSOID RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 34 35 50 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA DATUM NAME ELLIPSOID NAME NUMBER CODE (INC BY 10) 51 57 58 60 61 63 64 70 71 77 78 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� . 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� . 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� . 읕좔좔� M M M M M M M m m m X X X x x x x x x x M M M M M M M m m m SEMI-MAJOR AXIS INVERSE FLATTENING SEMI-MINOR AXIS (METERS) (1/f) (METERS) 2-90 *20* HORIZONTAL DIRECTION SET RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 17 22 23 25 29 30 32 33 35 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN SET FIELD RECORD NO. OF WEATHER OBSERVER JSIN NUMBER CODE INST. NO. BOOK NO. TARGETS CODE INITIALS (INC BY 10) SIGHTED 36 39 40 45 46 49 50 51 54 55 58 59 60 63 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� M M m m Y Y M M D D H H M M ZONE SSN M M m m VISIBILITY NO. S S H.I. DATE OF OBS. TIME CODE TARGET H.T. CODE OF REJECTION (METERS) (METERS) REP. LIMIT (SECONDS) 64 70 71 73 76 77 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�. 읕좔� 읕좔�. 읕좔� 읕좔�. 읕좔� D D D M M S S s s S S s s S S s s INITIAL DIRECTION INT. SIGMA EXT. SIGMA (SECONDS) (SECONDS) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *21* HORIZONTAL DIRECTION COMMENT RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA COMMENT(S) NUMBER CODE 46 80 (INC BY 10) 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� COMMENT(S) CONTINUED 2-91 *22* HORIZONTAL DIRECTION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 17 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� SEQUENCE DATA SSN SET BLANK NUMBER CODE INST. NO. (INC BY 10) 46 49 50 51 54 55 58 59 60 62 64 70 71 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�. 읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�. 읕좔� H H M M ZONE SSN M M m m VISIBILITY NO. S S D D D M M S S s s TIME CODE TARGET H.T. CODE OF REJ CLOCKWISE (METERS) REP. LIMIT DIRECTION 73 76 77 80 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔�. 읕좔� 읕좔�. 읕좔� S S s s S S s s INT. SIGMA EXT. SIGMA (SECONDS) (SECONDS) 2-92 *25* GPS OCCUPATION HEADER RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 24 25 27 28 30 31 32 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN DATA MEDIA OBSERVER'S INSTRUMENT CABLE NUMBER CODE IDENTIFIER INITIALS NUMBER LENGTH (INC BY 10) 33 80 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴 컴컴� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴 컴컴� BLANK -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------ *26* GPS OCCUPATION COMMENT RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA COMMENT NUMBER CODE 46 80 (INC BY 10) 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� CONTINUED COMMENT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------ *27* GPS OCCUPATION MEASUREMENT RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 20 21 24 25 27 29 30 33 34 35 38 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔좔� 읕좔좔�.읕� 읕� 읕좔좔�.읕� SEQUENCE DATA SSN Y Y M M D D H H M M X X x x x X X X x DRY BULB X X X x NUMBER CODE OBSERVATION OBSERVATION ANTENNA HEIGHT DRY BULB TEMPERATURE WET BULB (INC BY 10) DATE TIME (METERS) TEMPERATURE CODE TEMPERATURE 39 40 42 43 47 49 51 55 56 80 旼� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 읕� 읕좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 WET BULB X X x X X X X x x PRESSURE WEATHER BLANK TEMPERATURE RELATIVE BAROMETRIC CODE CODE CODE HUMIDITY PRESSURE 2-93 *28* GPS CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 16 17 20 21 23 24 26 27 31 32 36 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔�.읕좔� SEQUENCE DATA Y Y M M D D H H M M INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT BLANK X X X x x NUMBER CODE SYNCHRONIZATION SYNCHRONIZATION NUMBER NUMBER TIMING DIFFERENCE (INC BY 10) DATE TIME A B (MICROSECONDS) 37 38 40 41 80 旼� 旼쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕� 읕좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� INTEGER TIME OBSERVER'S BLANK SECOND SYNCH INITIALS Y OR N -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *29* GPS CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION COMMENT RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA COMMENT NUMBER CODE (INC BY 10) 46 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� CONTINUED COMMENT 2-94 *30* HORIZONTAL ANGLE SET RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 17 22 23 25 29 30 32 33 35 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN SET FIELD RECORD NO. OF WEATHER OBSERVER JSIN NUMBER CODE INST. NO. BOOK NUMBER ANGLES CODE INITIALS (INC BY 10) OBSERVED 36 39 40 45 46 49 50 51 54 55 58 59 60 62 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔�. 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�. 읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� M M m m Y Y M M D D H H M M ZONE SSN M M m m VISIBILITY NO. OF S S H.I. DATE OF OBS. TIME CODE FIRST H.T CODE REPL. REJECTION LIMIT (METERS) TARGET (METERS) (SECONDS) 64 71 72 75 76 79 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕� D D D M M S S s SSN M M m m VISIBILITY CLOCKWISE ANGLE SECOND H.T. CODE TARGET (METERS) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *31* HORIZONTAL ANGLE COMMENT RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA COMMENT(S) NUMBER CODE 46 80 (INC BY 10) 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� COMMENT(S) CONTINUED 2-95 *32* HORIZONTAL ANGLE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 17 45 46 49 50 51 54 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN SET BLANK H H M M ZONE SSN NUMBER CODE INST. NO. TIME CODE FIRST (INC BY 10) TARGET 55 58 59 60 62 64 71 72 75 76 79 80 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕� M M m m VISIBILITY NO. S S D D D M M S S s SSN M M m m VISIBILITY H.T. CODE OF REJECTION CLOCKWISE ANGLE SECOND H.T. CODE (METERS) REP. LIMIT TARGET (METERS) (SECONDS) 2-96 *40* VERTICAL ANGLE SET RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 17 22 23 25 29 30 32 33 35 36 39 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN SET FIELD RECORD NO. OF WEATHER OBSERVER JSIN M M m m NUMBER CODE INST. NO. BOOK NUMBER VAs/ZDs CODE INITIALS H.I. (INC BY 10) OBSERVED (METERS) 40 45 46 49 50 51 54 55 58 59 60 62 64 71 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕� Y Y M M D D H H M M ZONE SSN M M m m VISIBILITY NO. S S D D D M M S S s DATE TIME CODE TARGET H.T. CODE OF REJ. VA OR ZD (METERS) REP. LIMIT OBSERVATION (SECONDS) 72 73 76 77 80 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� ANGLE S S s s S S s s CODE INT. SIGMA EXT. SIGMA (SECONDS) (SECONDS/KM) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *41* VERTICAL ANGLE COMMENT RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA COMMENT(S) NUMBER CODE 46 80 (INC BY 10) 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� COMMENT(S) CONTINUED 2-97 *42* VERTICAL ANGLE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 17 45 46 49 50 51 54 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN SET BLANK H H M M ZONE SSN NUMBER CODE INST. NO. TIME CODE TARGET (INC BY 10) 55 58 59 60 62 64 71 72 73 76 77 80 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕� 읕� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� M M m m VISIBILITY NO. S S D D D M M S S s ANGLE S S s s S S s s H.T. CODE OF REJECTION VA/ZD CODE INT. SIGMA EXT. SIGMA (METERS) REP. LIMIT OBSERVATION (SECONDS) (SECONDS/KM) (SECONDS) 2-98 *45* OBSERVED DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 16 17 22 23 24 25 29 30 32 33 35 36 38 39 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕컴� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕� SEQUENCE DATA SSN BLANK FIELD RECORD BLANK WEATHER OBSERVER JSIN NO. OF BLANK NUMBER CODE INST. BOOK NUMBER CODE INITIALS SETUPS (INC BY 10) 40 45 46 49 50 51 54 55 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 72 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼컴� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴� 읕� 읕좔� 읕컴� 읕좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� Y Y M M D D H H M M ZONE SSN BLANK VISIBILITY NO. BLANK M M M M M m m m m DATE OF OBS. TIME CODE TARGET CODE OF DIFF. OF ELEVATION REP. (METERS) 73 76 77 80 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� X X x x X X x x LEVELING LENGTH OF SIGMA SECTION (MILLIMETERS) (KILOMETERS) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *46* DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION COMMENT RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 40 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA COMMENT(S) NUMBER CODE (INC BY 10) 41 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� COMMENT(S) CONTINUED 2-99 *47* OBSERVED DIFFERENCE OF ELEVATION CONTINUATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� SEQUENCE DATA SSN BLANK NUMBER CODE INST. (INC BY 10) 46 54 55 57 58 63 64 80 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 BLANK JSIN OBSERVING BLANK LEVEL ROD ORGANIZATION ABBREVIATION 2-100 *50* TAPED DISTANCE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 19 20 22 23 25 26 29 30 34 35 40 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕좔좔좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN WEATHER OBSERVER JSIN M M m m M M M M m Y Y M M D D NUMBER CODE INST. CODE INITIALS TAPE SUPPORT STATION ELEV. DATE OF OBS. (INC BY 10) HEIGHT (METERS) (METERS) 41 44 45 46 49 50 53 54 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 72 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕좔좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� H H M M ZONE SSN M M m m M M M m m VISIBILITY NO. X X M M M M M m m m m TIME CODE TARGET TAPE SUPPORT ELEVATION CODE OF REJECTION CORRECTED TAPED HEIGHT (METERS) DIFFERENCE REP. LIMIT DISTANCE (METERS) (mm) (METERS) 73 74 76 77 80 旼� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 읕� 읕좔�.읕� 읕좔좔�.읕� DIST. X X x X X X x CODE INT. SIGMA EXT. SIGMA (mm) (ppm) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *51* UNREDUCED DISTANCE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 19 20 22 23 25 26 29 30 34 35 40 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼컴컴컴� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN WEATHER OBSERVER JSIN M M m m BLANK Y Y M M D D NUMBER CODE INST. CODE INITIALS H.I. DATE OF OBS. (INC BY 10) (METERS) 41 44 45 46 49 50 53 54 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 72 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼컴컴컴� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕컴컴컴� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� H H M M ZONE SSN M M m m BLANK VISIBILITY NO. X X M M M M M m m m m TIME CODE TARGET H.T. CODE OF REJECTION CORRECTED SLANT RANGE REP. LIMIT DISTANCE 73 74 76 77 80 (mm) (METERS) 旼� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 읕� 읕좔�.읕� 읕좔좔�.읕� DIST. X X x X X X x CODE INT. SIGMA EXT. SIGMA (mm) (ppm) 2-101 *52* REDUCED DISTANCE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 19 20 22 23 25 26 29 30 34 35 40 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN WEATHER OBSERVER JSIN M M M m M M M M m Y Y M M D D NUMBER CODE INST. CODE INITIALS G.H. MARK ELEV. DATE OF OBS. (INC BY 10) (METERS) (METERS) 41 44 45 46 49 50 53 54 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 72 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔�.읕� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� H H M M ZONE SSN M M M m M M M M m VISIBILITY NO. X X M M M M M m m m m TIME CODE TARGET G.H. MARK ELEV. CODE OF REJECTION REDUCED DISTANCE (METERS) (METERS) REP. LIMIT (METERS) (mm) 73 74 76 77 80 旼� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 읕� 읕좔�.읕� 읕좔좔�.읕� DIST X X x X X X x CODE INT. SIGMA EXT. SIGMA (mm) (ppm) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *53* UNREDUCED LONG LINE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 22 23 25 26 29 30 34 35 40 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN BLANK JSIN M M m m BLANK Y Y M M D D NUMBER CODE INST. H.I. DATE OF OBS. (INC BY 10) (METERS) 41 44 45 46 49 50 53 54 58 59 60 61 63 64 73 74 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼컴컴컴� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕컴컴컴� 읕좔� 읕좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔� 읕� H H M M ZONE SSN M M m m BLANK NO. M M m M M M M M M M m m m DIST TIME CODE TARGET H.T. OF REJECTION CORRECTED SPATIAL CHORD CODE (METERS) REP. LIMIT DISTANCE 75 77 78 80 (METERS) (METERS) 旼� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 읕�.읕좔� 읕�.읕좔� X x x X x x INT. SIGMA EXT.SIGMA (mm) (ppm) 2-102 *54* REDUCED LONG LINE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 22 23 25 26 29 30 34 35 40 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN BLANK JSIN M M M m M M M M m Y Y M M D D NUMBER CODE INST. G.H. MARK ELEV. DATE OF OBS. (INC BY 10) (METERS) (METERS) 41 45 46 49 50 53 54 58 59 60 61 63 64 73 74 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔�.읕� 읕좔� 읕좔�.읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔� 읕� H H M M ZONE SSN M M M m M M M M m NO. M M m M M M M M M M m m m DIST TIME CODE TARGET G.H. MARK ELEV. OF REJECTION REDUCED DISTANCE CODE (METERS) (METERS) REP. LIMIT (METERS) (METERS) 75 77 78 80 旼� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 읕�.읕좔� 읕�.읕좔� M m m M m m INT. SIGMA EXT.SIGMA (mm) (ppm) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *55* DISTANCE COMMENT RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 40 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA COMMENT(S) NUMBER CODE (INC BY 10) 41 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� COMMENT(S) CONTINUED 2-103 *60* ASTRONOMIC AZIMUTH / LAPLACE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 18 19 20 21 29 30 32 33 35 36 39 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼� 旼컴컴컴컴� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔�.읕� 읕� 읕� 읕컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN S S S s DIR.. COMP. BLANK OBSERVER JSIN M M m m NUMBER CODE INST. ETA OF ETA CODE INITIALS H.I. (INC BY 10) (SECONDS) (E OR W) (A or L) (METERS) 40 45 46 49 50 51 54 55 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 71 72 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕� 읕� Y Y M M D D H H M M ZONE SSN M M m m VISIBILITY NO. S S D D D M M S S s ORIG. DATE OF OBS. TIME CODE TARGET H.T. CODE OF REJECTION AZIMUTH OF AZ. (METERS) REP. LIMIT OBSERVED (N/S) 73 76 77 80 (SECONDS) 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� S S s s S S s s INT. SIGMA EXT. SIGMA (SECONDS) (SECONDS) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *61* GEODETIC AZIMUTH RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 50 51 54 55 63 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� SEQUENCE DATA SSN BLANK SSN BLANK NUMBER CODE INST. TARGET (INC BY 10) 64 71 72 73 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕� 읕� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� D D D M M S S s ORIG. BLANK GEODETIC OF AZ. AZIMUTH (N/S) 2-104 *70* INSTRUMENT RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 13 14 16 17 20 21 22 23 40 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA JSIN EQUIPMENT X X x x UNITS INSTRUMENT MANUFACTURER NUMBER CODE CODE INSTRUMENT (INC BY 10) RESOLUTION 41 62 63 70 71 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� TYPE OF INSTRUMENT OR TRADE NAME MODEL OF SERIAL INSTRUMENT NUMBER 2-105 *80* CONTROL POINT RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 44 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN STATION NAME NUMBER CODE (INC BY 10) 旼 Use *86* Record 커 � � 45 55 56 57 68 69 � 70 75 76 � 77 78 79 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼� 읕좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕� 읕� D D M M S S s s s s s DIR. D D D M M S S s s s s s DIR. M M M M m m ELEV. STATE STA. STA. LATITUDE OF LAT. LONGITUDE OF LONG. ELEVATION CODE CODE ORDER TYPE (N/S) (E/W) (METERS) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------------- *81* CONTROL POINT RECORD (SPC/UTM) 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 44 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN STATION NAME NUMBER CODE (INC BY 10) 旼 Use *86* Record 컴� � � 45 55 56 65 66 69 � 70 75 76 � 77 78 79 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕� 읕� M M M M M M M M m m m M M M M M M M m m m SPC/UTM M M M M m m ELEV. STATE STA. STA. Y-COORDINATE (NORTHING) X-COORDINATE (EASTING) ZONE ELEVATION CODE CODE ORDER TYPE (METERS) (METERS) (METERS) 2-106 *82* REFERENCE OR AZIMUTH MARK RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 44 45 50 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴� SEQUENCE DATA SSN STATION NAME BLANK NUMBER CODE (INC BY 10) 51 54 55 80 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� SSN BLANK CONTROL STATION -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------ *83* BENCH MARK RECORD NGS has discontinued the use of this record. Effective immediately, record this vertical control data in the Orthometric Height, Geoid Height, Ellipsoid Height Record (*86*) format diagram. *84* GEOID HEIGHT RECORD (OPTIONAL) NGS has discontinued the use of this record. Effective immediately, record this data, if required, in the Orthometric Height, Geoid Height, Ellipsoid Height Record (*86*) format diagram. 2-107 *85* DEFLECTION RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 20 21 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN SOURCE COMMENT(S) NUMBER CODE ORGANIZATION (INC BY 10) 46 62 63 67 68 69 71 72 76 77 78 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕�.읕좔� 읕좔좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕�.읕좔� COMMENT(S) CONTINUED S S S s s DIR. S s s S S S s s DIR. S s s XI OF SIGMA OF XI ETA OF SIGMA OF ETA (SECONDS) XI (SECONDS) (SECONDS) ETA (SECONDS) (N/S) (E/W) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------- *86* ORTHOMETRIC / ELLIPSOID / GEOID HEIGHT RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 16 17 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼� 旼� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔좔� 읕� 읕� 읕� 읕� 읕좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN BLANK M M M M m m m OHT OHT OHT OHT OHT NUMBER CODE ORTHOMETRIC HEIGHT CODE ORDER CLASS NGSIDB DATUM (INC BY 10) (METERS) INDICATOR 30 35 36 42 43 44 45 46 52 53 54 55 56 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼컴� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼� 旼� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔좔� 읕� 읕컴� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔좔� 읕� 읕� 읕� 읕� ORGANIZATION M M M M m m m GHT BLANK M M M M m m m EHT EHT EHT EHT GEOID HEIGHT (GHT) CODE ELLIPSOID HEIGHT CODE ORDER CLASS DATUM (METERS) (METERS) 57 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� COMMENT 2-108 *90* FIXED CONTROL RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 20 21 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN SOURCE COMMENT(S) NUMBER CODE ORGANIZATION (INC BY 10) 46 74 75 76 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔� COMMENT(S) CONTINUED "G" X X X X X NGS SOURCE NUMBER -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- DATA SET TERMINATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� SEQUENCE DATA BLANK NUMBER CODE (INC BY 10) 2-109 INTENTIONALLY BLANK 2-110 CHAPTER 3 GEODETIC CONTROL DESCRIPTIVE (GEOD DESC) DATA INTRODUCTION The purpose of the description of a survey point is to convey to the next user, in a concise and standard manner, information sufficient to locate and positively identify the survey point, and to record its suitability for various uses. This chapter gives detailed instructions for the entry and interpretation of descriptive information for survey points of all types. A survey point (or station) may be a monumented control point, a reference mark or azimuth mark, a landmark, or a temporary, auxiliary, or eccentric point. A description must be submitted for every recoverable survey point which is observed in a project, and for each of its peripheral points (if it has any). A collection of these descriptions constitutes the GEOD DESC data set which must accompany any submitted project. Descriptions can also be submitted independently for miscellaneous recoveries of monumented points already present in the NGS data base. NGS has begun the distribution of descriptions from the data base for use in the field. These descriptions can easily be modified to make them current, and can then be resubmitted as complete recovery descriptions. This practice will greatly improve the quality of descriptions available from the NGS data base, and will save work in the long run. WRITING DESCRIPTIONS A separate description is to be written for each monumented survey point, be it a "main" station, a reference mark, or azimuth mark. "Underground" marks are an exception. When a control point has reference marks which are included in the NGS data base, or are monumented well enough to carry geodetic control themselves, each is to have its own separate description. The descriptive text for each mark in such a group would include location references from the other marks in the group. Such a location reference to the described mark from a second mark would identify the second mark by agency and designation, and would not include a description of the second mark. Peripheral marks, points, or objects which are not included in the NGS data base and are not suitable for holding control need not be separately described. In this case a short descriptive phrase may be included in the location reference to the described mark from that object, if necessary. When new text is submitted for a recovered mark, it must be complete in itself as if it were for an original description. Text which merely amends a previous description will no longer be allowed for recovered marks used in a project. Now that descriptions from the data base are being distributed in the same format in which they are collected, the previous description can simply be edited as necessary. If no editing is necessary (that is, if the description which was distributed from the data base is still current, is complete, and is a single report), the mark may be reported "recovered as described", and no new text need be submitted. 3-1 A six-character Permanent Identifier (PID, formerly known as ACRN) now serves as the primary means for matching recovery description data against the data base for marks known to NGS. Where the PID is known, it must be entered in the description. A mark newly set or new to NGS will not have a PID until it is loaded into the data base. Any description without a PID must be complete. STRUCTURE OF THE GEOD DESC DATA SET Descriptive data are organized into 80-column fixed-format records. The record type is identified by a code in columns 7-10 of each description record. Most descriptions must contain records coded *10*, *13*, *20*, *26*, and *30* and may also contain records coded *15*, *28*, and *29*. Specific locations within the records are reserved for the different data fields. Detailed explanations of the fields in each record type appear later in this chapter. All alphanumeric fields must be left- justified. All numeric data must be right-justified and zero filled. All alphabetic characters must be entered in upper case (capitals) only. The first and last records of the data set (the Data Set Identification Record and the Data Set Termination Record) display the two-character alphanumeric job code preceded and followed by an asterisk in the field normally occupied by the first data code (columns 7-10). Unless a job code is specifically assigned to a project by NGS, this job code may be sequentially assigned (*A1*,*A2*,...*ZZ*) by the submitting agency. Other fields in the identification record include the name of the submitting agency and the date the data set was created. Detailed format definition of this record can be found on the first page of the format diagram section. In every record of the data set, columns 1 through 6 are reserved for a record sequence number. Each description in a file is identified by its station serial number (SSN). The SSN is a unique four-digit number assigned to each mark in a project. It is given in the *10* record which begins the block of records for that station. Sample data sets appear at the end of the chapter, before the format diagrams. RECORD DEFINITIONS Each record type and the acceptable entries for each data field are explained in the following paragraphs. Diagrams of the formats are found at the end of the chapter. TITLE AND COMMENT RECORDS These records, if used, must appear immediately after the data set identification record. CODE *00*, *01*, *02*, *03*, *04* (PROJECT AND TITLE INFORMATION RECORDS) These records are optional, and each can occur only once. Usage may vary. They may correspond to the *10* and *11* records in the horizontal observation data set documented in chapter 2, or to the *10* through *14* records in the vertical observation data set documented in volume II, chapter 6. When data are exported from the NGS data base, these records may indicate this, and give information about what marks are included. Do not split words between these records. 3-2 CODE *05* (COMMENT RECORD) (optional) Comment records may contain additional text describing the data set or the project. Up to 11 are allowed. Again, do not split words between records. DESCRIPTION RECORDS CODE *10* (STATION LOCATION RECORD) This first record primarily contains information pertinent to station location. The individual entries made in this record are as follows: Station Serial Number (SSN) [CC 11-14] - This four-digit numeric field is the project-specific link between descriptive and observational data. The field must be unique for each station residing in the descriptive and observational data sets. Recovery descriptions for stations not included in the observational data set may reside in the description data set, but in no case should their station serial numbers correspond to station serial numbers in the companion observation data set. DR Code [CC 15] - This one-character code indicates whether this description is an original description or a recovery description. The allowable entries are "D" and "R". ENTRY DEFINITION D An original description of a newly set mark. R Everything else (includes recovered, not recovered, destroyed, and the first report to NGS of a pre- existing mark not in the NGS data base). Recovery Type Code (optional) [CC 16] - This one-character code provides additional information about the type of recovery description being included in the description data set. It is used only when the DR Code = "R". The allowable entries are: ENTRY DEFINITION F A full recovery description of a survey point which you think is not included in the NGS Data Base. M A recovery description which does not contain a complete textual description of the mark, but may contain updates or modifications to the most current description. This is used when a mark is destroyed or not recovered, or when the text of the previous description of this mark in the NGS data base requires no update (i.e., the text is in accord with current practice, and the situation at the mark has not changed). T A complete re-description of a mark which is included in the NGS data base. 3-3 Note: The practice of submitting recovery notes for stations used in a project which give only text modifications to a previous description is no longer permitted. Approximate Position [CC 17-31] - The approximate geographic position in degrees, minutes, and the nearest whole seconds of latitude and longitude must be entered. The latitude [CC 17-23] must begin with a hemisphere code (N=NORTH, S=SOUTH) and the longitude [CC 24-31] must begin with the direction- letter "W" . Leading zeros must be entered where appropriate. If no other source is available, the point should be carefully plotted on the largest scale topographic map available and the respective latitude and longitude extracted therefrom. Latitude and longitude are required under all circumstances. Approximate Height [CC 32-36] - An estimated height of the geodetic control point is entered here. If no other source is available, the height may be estimated by examining contour lines on the largest scale topographic map available on which the point is plotted. The entry should be made to the nearest whole unit of measurement used. The unit of measurement (M=METERS, F=FEET) is also recorded [CC 37]. Quad Identifier (Quadrangle or QID) (optional) [CC 39-45] - This was at one time part of the primary identification system adopted by the National Geodetic Survey Data Base for control points. The new Datum has rendered it obsolete. It will be phased out, but is still provided as a convenience in the interim. It is based on 1�x 1� "quads" defined by integer-degree latitude and longitude gridlines (parallels and meridians) and on successive quadrangle subdivision of the basic 1�x 1� quads into 30'x 30' quads, 15'x 15' quads, and 7�'x 7�' quads accomplished by successive halving of the latitude and longitude gridline intervals. For description purposes, only the 30' quad identifier will be recorded. This quad identifier is a seven-character symbol coded as HLLWWWA, where: H=Hemisphere (N for Northern, S for Southern) LL=Latitude of SE corner of the 1�x 1� quad (00�-89�N, 01�-90�S) WWW=Longitude of SE corner of the 1�x 1� quad (000�-359�W) A=30' subdivision indicator (1-NE,2-SE,3-SW,4-NW subquad) Note that for some marks the Quad value based on the NAD 83 position will not be the same as the traditional Quad value based on the NAD 27 position. It is these latter values which were once published. Figure 3-1 depicts this scheme in graphic format. 3-4 31 DEGREES 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컫컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� � � | | X컴탠�>POINT TO BE � � |.....1.....� IDENTIFIED � � | | � � 4 쳐� 컴 컴1컴 컴 컴 � � � | � � � | � � � | � � � | � 쳐컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컵컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 30 DEG 30 MIN � � � � � � � � � � � � � 3 � 2 � � � � � � � � � � � � � 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컨컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 30 110 DEGREES 109 QID =쿙 3 0 1 0 9 1�1 1 읕컴컴훩컴컴컴� 30 Minute Quad 30 Minute indicator Identifier Numbers describe 30 minute area in clockwise direction. Number range (1 thru 4) 15 Minute indicator Division shown by dashed lines Numbering same as 30 minute sequence. 7.5 Minute indicator Division shown by dotted line Numbering same as 30 minute sequence. FIGURE 3-1 - QUAD IDENTIFIER. 3-5 State or Country Code [CC 47-48] - This is a two-letter code which indicates the political unit and/or geographic area in which the control point is located. For points in the United States or Canada, enter the appropriate code for the respective state, commonwealth, province, or territory. For points outside the United States or Canada, enter the appropriate code for the respective country, island group, or geographic area. A complete list of the two-letter codes is given in ANNEX A. County [CC 49-68] - For points in the United States or Puerto Rico, enter the name of the county or equivalent in which the control point is located. The name of an independent city must be preceded by the prefix "C OF" (i.e., C OF RICHMOND for RICHMOND, VA). For points in other countries, leave the field blank. Special Application Codes [CC 69-72] - Up to four alpha characters, left justified, are allowed in this field. These characters represent certain specialized information about the control point. All entries must be selected from the following list: ENTRY DEFINITION F Fault monitoring site P Site determined suitable for receiving satellite signals in connection with geodetic surveys O Other (see descriptive text) T Tidal station N Site not suitable for receiving satellite signals Permanent Identifier (PID) (optional) [CC 73-78] - The PID is now the primary identification system used by NGS for control points. For a mark that had an ACRN, the ACRN is now the PID. The PID is a unique six-character identifier assigned to every monumented, recoverable survey point residing in the National Geodetic Survey Data Base. For an existing point, the PID assigned by NGS must be entered if it is available. If it cannot be determined, the field should be left blank. For a new point, this field must be left blank, and a PID will be assigned when the mark is loaded into the NGS data base. CODE *13* (STATION IDENTIFICATION RECORD) The second record required for geodetic control stations contains the agency name for the point. The entries made are as follows: Designation [CC 11-50] - Up to 40 characters of alphanumeric data may be entered into this field. In the case of existing marks already included in the NGS data base, the designation should precisely reflect the published designation of the station. This is the official designation. As control points are added to the geodetic network, station designations should be unique within a clearly defined geographic locale (e.g., state, province). Where station monuments have been stamped, the designation is an edited version of what is stamped on the marker. This practice should be followed as nearly as possible. ANNEX D supplies detailed instructions 3-6 concerning naming conventions for geodetic control points. Assistance concerning determination of unique designations can be obtained by contacting NGS. Underground Marker Type and Magnetic Property Code (optional) [CC 52-53] and [CC 55] - These codes are similar to the codes used for surface marker type and magnetic code on the setting record. If an underground marker exists and these codes can be determined for it, they are entered here. Entries must be left-justified. A complete list of the codes is contained in ANNEX I. Setting Code (Underground Marker) (optional) [CC 57-58] - The setting code is from a comprehensive set of two-digit numerical codes covering a wide variety of possible settings for a survey point marker. A complete list of the setting codes is found in ANNEX I. Transportation Code [CC 60] - This is a one-letter code that indicates the mode of transportation to reach the station. If backpacking is required to reach the station, the transportation code reflects the mode of travel used to reach the point where backpacking begins. A complete list of the specific transportation codes is given below. The possible entries are as follows: CODE TRANSPORTATION MODE A Light Airplane B Boat C Car (or Station Wagon) F Float Airplane H Helicopter O Other (See Descriptive Text) P Light Truck (Pickup,Carry-All, etc.) T Truck (larger than 3/4 ton) W Tracked Vehicle (Weasel,Snowcat,etc.) X Four-Wheel Drive Vehicle Backpack-Time (optional) [CC 63-66] - Enter the time required to carry equipment on foot from the last point of transportation to the station, expressed in hours and minutes (HHMM). If the immediate vicinity of the station can be reached using the mode of transportation indicated by the preceding transportation code, enter zero in both the hours and minutes fields (0000). CODE *15* (ALIAS RECORD) (optional) [CC 11-50] - Up to 40 characters of text which represent an alternate form of the name used to identify the control point. These alias entries arise due to non-standard naming conventions used by various agencies and individuals. NGS strongly discourages the use of aliases. 3-7 CODE *20* (MONUMENTED/RECOVERED RECORD) - Entries in this record primarily provide historical information concerning creation of and subsequent return visits to the control point. The first four fields are normally used only when the DR Code = "D" and the remaining five fields are used only when the DR Code = "R". Acceptable entries for each field are defined as follows: Monumenting Agency Group Code [CC 11] - The code for the monumenting agency group is a one-character alpha entry used to subdivide specific monumenting organizations into distinct groups. These codes follow: CODE GROUP A National Agencies B Inter-State or Inter-Province Agencies C State, Province, Commonwealth, and Territorial Agencies D County Agencies E Municipal Agencies (Cities) F Inter-City and Inter-County Agencies G Railroads H Utility and Natural Resource Companies I Surveying, Engineering, and Construction Industry J Educational Institutions K Professional and Amateur Associations L Miscellaneous Commercial or Private Firms M Non-Specific Designators Monumenting Agency Symbol [CC 13-18] - This is the NGS- defined symbol of up to six (6) characters for the organization which set the monument (disk). It is required when the DR Code is "D", and is optional if the DR Code is "R". The symbols are given in ANNEX C. If the organization is not listed in ANNEX C, contact NGS to have a symbol assigned to that organization. Year Monumented [CC 33-36] - Enter the year the marker was monumented. It is required when the DR Code is "D", and is optional if the DR Code is "R". Chief of Party [CC 37-39] - Enter up to three initials for the person who was in charge of the survey party which monumented the control point. If this information cannot be determined, as in the case of recovery stations, leave the field blank. This field is always optional. Recovering Agency Group Code [CC 42] - In a manner similar to that described for the Monumenting Agency Code, enter the appropriate group code from the list above for the recovering organization. Recovering Agency Symbol [CC 44-49] - This is the NGS- defined symbol of up to six (6) characters for the organization which recovered the mark. It is required when the DR Code is "R", and is not allowed if the DR Code is "D". Date Recovered [CC 64-71] - The exact date the control point was recovered is to be recorded in this eight-character field. The year, 3-8 month, and day of the month are to be recorded in that sequence (e.g., 19850815 would indicate August 15, 1985). It is required when the DR Code is "R", and is not allowed if the DR Code is "D". Chief of Party [CC 72-74] - If DR Code = "R", enter up to three initials for the person who was in charge of the survey party which recovered the control point. This field is optional when the DR Code is "R", and is not allowed if the DR Code is "D". Recovery Condition Code [CC 77] - If DR Code = "R", enter the appropriate one-letter code to indicate the condition of the control point. It is required when the DR Code is "R", and is not allowed if the DR Code is "D". The allowed values are as follows: CODE CURRENT CONDITION OF SURVEY POINT G Good N Not Recovered, Not Found P Poor, Disturbed, Mutilated, Requires Maintenance X Destroyed (See Note Below) Note: The control point should be reported as destroyed only when the actual marker is found separated from its setting (e.g., disk recovered from highway department personnel). If the marker was not found, notes concerning evidence of possible destruction should be entered as text records, but the recovery condition entry should be coded as "N". CODE *26* (SETTING RECORD) - This record contains information about the setting of the surface marker, its stability, and in some cases, what identifying features are inscribed or cast (as opposed to hand-stamped) on the marker. The definition of each field is as follows: Setting Code [CC 11-12] - This two-digit code is used to indicate the setting characteristics of the monument or mark. These characteristics include the type of setting (shallow or deep), the type of design and material used for the monument, and/or the natural or man-made object which serves as the setting for the control point. A complete list of the possible entries is found in ANNEX I. Specific Setting Phrase [CC 14-45] - For setting codes 30 through 41, enter a more specific phrase describing the setting, but corresponding to the respective setting code chosen from the list in Annex I. A maximum of 32 characters, including imbedded blanks, may be entered. For the other setting codes, leave this field blank. If the setting code or specific setting phrase does not adequately represent the setting of the mark, additional explanation should be given in the text. Surface Marker Type [CC 46-47] - This field identifies the object used to monument the geodetic control point. Landmark stations are represented by two (2) digit codes and all other markers represented by one or two character alpha codes. Entries must be left-justified. The most common types of surface marks are listed on the next page: 3-9 CODE DESCRIPTION A Aluminum marker (other than a disk) B Bolt C Cap-and-Bolt Pair DB Bench Mark Disk DD Survey Disk DE Traverse Station Disk DH Horizontal Control Disk DJ Tidal Station Disk DO Disk of Unspecified Type (See Text) DQ Calibration Base Line Disk DR Reference Mark Disk DS Triangulation Station Disk DU Boundary Marker Disk DV Vertical Control Disk DZ Azimuth Mark Disk I Metal Rod N Nail A complete list of these codes is contained in ANNEX I. Magnetic Code (Surface Marker) [CC 49] - This one-character code indicates the magnetic property of the mark or monument. ANNEX I details acceptable entries for the magnetic property code. Vertical Stability Override Code (optional) [CC 51] - This one-character entry allows the default vertical stability codes to be overridden when appropriate. The codes are from the following list: CODE DEFINITION A Monuments of the most reliable nature, expected to hold their elevations very well. B Monuments which generally hold their elevations fairly well. C Monuments which may be affected by surface ground movements. D Monuments of questionable or unknown vertical stability. Marker Inscription [CC 54-59] - This field is the symbol from ANNEX C for the agency or organization whose identity is inscribed or precast on the disk/monument. This entry is not the same as the stamping which usually reflects the station designation. If the appropriate organization is not listed in ANNEX C, contact NGS to have a symbol assigned to that organization. If it is not possible to contact NGS, a longer entry (up to 26 characters) may be made. If there is no agency identification inscribed or precast on the marker (such as a chiseled square, nail, or unidentified disk), enter "UNK" . CODE *28* (STAMPING RECORD) (optional) - The stamping field [CC 11-60] should contain the exact stamping as it appears on the geodetic control marker. The entry must not exceed 50 characters, including embedded blanks. If there is no stamping, make no entry here; however, if the marker is a type that is normally stamped, enter a short note about its being unstamped in the accompanying descriptive text. 3-10 CODE *29* (ROD/PIPE RECORD) (optional) - Inclusion of this record as a separate entity allows users to access specific information about this class of survey point. This record would be used in lieu of the phrase STAINLESS STEEL (or other material as per Setting code) ROD (OR PIPE) SET TO THE DEPTH OF ____ METERS (or FEET, depending on the UNITS CODE), IN A SLEEVE EXTENDING TO THE DEPTH OF ____ METERS (or FEET), ENCASED IN A PIPE FLUSH (F) WITH THE GROUND [or PROJECTING (P)/RECESSED (R) XX in centimeters (or XX in inches)] or, for an unsleeved rod mark, in lieu of the same phrase without reference to sleeve depth (if the sleeve depth field is left blank). For first-time recovery descriptions of pre-existing rod- or pipe-type markers, all pertinent data must be entered. Otherwise, enter any known information in the text instead of using a *29* Rod/Pipe Record. For example, if the actual rod depth is unknown, enter the projection/recession reference and a note (e.g., ROD DEPTH IS UNKNOWN), in the text. Left-justify any values recorded on this record. NGS prefers metric values. UNITS CODE [CC 11] DEFINITION E English - The units are feet and inches. M Metric - The units are meters and centimeters. CODE *30* (TEXT RECORDS) - Descriptive text provides information about the mark which is not captured in the coded fields. It is entered in multiple records with up to 70 characters per record. Words must not be split between records. In addition to the expected alphanumeric character set (A-Z and 0-9), the following special characters are allowed: (*) asterisk (+) plus sign ( ) blank or space (-) minus sign (,) comma (=) equal sign ($) dollar sign (() left parenthesis (/) slash ()) right parenthesis (.) period or decimal Every effort must be made to provide enough information for easy recovery of the point. A well written description should contain: (1) one or more references to some well known, readily available, location in terms of distances and directions. Intersections of prominent highways, landmarks, and public buildings in nearby towns are examples of such locations. In some cases, this location will require some description; (2) detailed directions concerning how one would proceed to the mark site from one or more of these prominent locations; (3) distance and direction to, inscription, and designation of any monumented reference marks which are in the NGS data base. Specific descriptions of these reference marks themselves are not to be included: each reference mark must have a separate complete description of its own; (4) distance and direction from one or more reference objects in the immediate locale should be noted. Examples of these reference objects are the centerlines of roads, fire plugs, telephone poles, chiseled marks in pavement, and survey marks which are not included in the NGS data base. 3-11 This item is more important when no monumented reference marks are associated with the geodetic control point; (5) distance and direction to any witness post that was set or if any witness post was set; (6) if applicable, a vertical reference to some nearby object (or the ground) stating the relationship to the object should be recorded. Distance above, below, or about flush with the object should be noted; and (7) any information about the specific setting or exact location of the mark if the coded values are not sufficient to describe it completely. When distance estimates or measurements are given in metric units, English equivalencies must follow in parentheses. Property ownership and contact point telephone numbers are desirable when private property must be crossed or occupied. Varying styles of descriptive text are used by some local and regional agencies. This will not present a problem as long as the content is as specified. Examples of descriptive text are included in the sample data sets which follow. 000010*AA*GEODDESCNGS NATIONAL GEODETIC SURVEY 19910413 000020*00*GPS-301 000030*01*COLORADO HIGH PRECISION GEODETIC SURVEY, 1991 000040*05*THESE DESCRIPTIONS WERE TAKEN FROM THE ABOVE PROJECT AND MODIFIED TO 000050*05*SERVE AS EXAMPLES. This description represents a fairly typical situation. 000060*10*0049RTN370756W103530801778M COLAS ANIMAS P HJ0138 000070*13*D 85 P 0000 000080*20* / A/NGS 19910415GRH G 000090*26*07/ DB N C CGS 000100*28*D 85 1935 000110*30*STATION IS LOCATED ABOUT 55 KM (34.2 MI) EAST OF TRINIDAD, 14 KM 000120*30*(8.7 MI) NORTH OF BRANSON, 4 KM (2.5 MI) SOUTH OF WALTS CORNER 000130*30*(JUNCTION OF US HIGHWAY 160 AND STATE HIGHWAY 389), ALONG HIGHWAY 000140*30*389, AT MILE 10.1, IN A PASTURE, IN THE NORTHEAST CORNER OF SECTION 000150*30*34, T 33 S, R 58 W. OWNERSHIP--WALDROUP RANCH, INC, BRANSON, CO 000160*30*81027. 000170*30*NOTE--IT IS NECESSARY TO PARK IN ROAD SO APPROPRIATE WARNING EQUIPMENT 000180*30*IS NEEDED. 000190*30*TO REACH FROM THE VEE FORMED BY HIGHWAY 389 SPLITTING TO JOIN HIGHWAY 000200*30*160, ABOUT 0.1 KM (0.1 MI) SOUTH OF HIGHWAY 160, GO SOUTH ON HIGHWAY 000210*30*389 FOR 3.39 KM (2.11 MI) TO A TRACK ROAD LEFT LEADING TO A WINDMILL. 000220*30*CONTINUE AHEAD FOR 0.64 KM (0.40 MI) TO THE STATION ON THE RIGHT. 000230*30*STATION MARK IS SET IN THE TOP OF A 20-CM SQUARE CONCRETE POST 000240*30*PROJECTING 15 CM. IT IS 9.9 M (32.5 FT) WEST OF, AND 1 M (3.3 FT) 000250*30*LOWER THAN THE HIGHWAY CENTER, 1.3 M (4.3 FT) WEST OF A FIBERGLASS 000260*30*WITNESS POST IN THE RIGHT-OF-WAY FENCE, AND 161 M (528.2 FT) NORTH OF 000270*30*MILEPOST 10 (MEASURED ALONG THE ROAD). 3-12 More text is required under other circumstances. 000280*10*0216RFN350230W106365201619M NMBERNALILLO 000290*13*NM BASE 1 P 0000 000300*20* / A/NGS 19910531EAR G 000310*26*00/ Z N B 000320*30*THE STATION IS LOCATED ABOUT 4.8 KM (3.0 MI) SOUTHEAST OF ALBUQUERQUE, 000330*30*AT THE ALBUQUERQUE INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT, ABOUT 1.2 KM (0.7 MI) 000340*30*WEST-NORTHWEST OF THE AIRPORT CONTROL TOWER, ON THE NORTHEAST SIDE OF 000350*30*RUNWAY 12-30, NEAR A TAN BRICK BUILDING. OWNERSHIP--CITY OF 000360*30*ALBUQUERQUE, ROBERT E. GILL, AVIATION SUPERVISOR, P.O. BOX 9022, 000370*30*ALBUQUERQUE, NM 87119. PHONE IS 505-842-4366. 000380*30*NOTE--ESCORT TO STATION BY AIRPORT POLICE IS MANDATORY. AIRPORT 000390*30*SECURITY MAY BE REACHED BY PHONE AT WEST SECURITY ENTRANCE GATE BY 000400*30*DIALING 4380. 000410*30*TO REACH THE STATION FROM THE WEST SECURITY ENTRANCE GATE AT THE AIR 000420*30*FREIGHT LOADING DOCKS AT THE ALBUQUERQUE INTERNATIONAL AIRPORT, PASS 000430*30*THROUGH GATE AND GO SOUTH FOR 6 M (19.7 FT) ON ASPHALT SURFACE TO A 000440*30*FENCE. TURN LEFT AND GO EAST FOR 0.1 KM (0.1 MI) ON ASPHALT SURFACE 000450*30*TO THE EAST END OF THE FENCE. TURN RIGHT AND GO SOUTHWESTERLY FOR 000460*30*0.2 KM (0.1 MI) ON ASPHALT SURFACE TO SERVICE ROAD C. TURN LEFT AND 000470*30*GO SOUTH FOR 0.9 KM (0.6 MI) ON SERVICE ROAD C TO A PAVED ROAD LEFT 000480*30*AND SIGN (T-16). TURN LEFT AND GO EAST FOR 0.5 KM (0.3 MI) ON THE 000490*30*PAVED ROAD, PASSING CUTTER AVIATION, TO A DIRT ROAD LEFT AND SIGN 000500*30*(T-13). TURN LEFT AND GO NORTH FOR 0.2 KM (0.1 MI) ON THE DIRT ROAD, 000510*30*CROSSING TWO RAMPS TO A TAN BRICK BUILDING (RUNWAY LIGHTING VAULT) 000520*30*WITH TWO GREEN ELECTRICAL BOXES AND THE STATION ON THE SOUTH SIDE OF 000530*30*BUILDING. 000540*30*THE STATION IS THE TOP CENTER OF A ROUND METAL PLATE THAT IS 000550*30*UNSTAMPED, AFFIXED TO THE TOP OF A 15.24 M (50.00 FT) LONG STEEL 000560*30*H-BEAM DRIVEN TO A DEPTH OF 14.0 M (45.9 FT) , PROJECTING 1.2 M 000570*30*(3.9 FT) ABOVE GROUND, ENCASED IN A 2.1 M (6.9 FT) LONG 000580*30*INSULATION-FILLED PVC PIPE 45 CM IN DIAMETER SET AT A DEPTH OF 0.9 M 000590*30*(3.0 FT) PROJECTING 1.2 M (3.9 FT) ABOVE GROUND, SURROUNDED BY A 000600*30*SQUARE CONCRETE SLAB 1.2 M (3.9 FT) ON SIDE FLUSH WITH GROUND. 000610*30*LOCATED 45.4 M (148.9 FT) WEST FROM THE SIXTH BLUE TAXIWAY LIGHT 000620*30*ALONG TAXIWAY 14 (SOUTH OF TAXIWAY 2), 32.3 M (106.0 FT) 000630*30*EAST-NORTHEAST FROM THE APPROXIMATE CENTER OF THE DIRT ROAD, 21.8 M 000640*30*(71.5 FT) SOUTH FROM THE SOUTHEAST CORNER OF THE RUNWAY LIGHTING 000650*30*VAULT AND 21.5 M (70.5 FT) SOUTHEAST FROM THE SOUTHWEST CORNER OF THE 000660*30*RUNWAY LIGHTING VAULT. 000670*30*NOTE--THERE IS AN INVERTED THREADED BOLT AFFIXED TO THE TOP CENTER OF 000680*30*ROUND METAL PLATE. FOR GPS OCCUPATION, ANTENNA TRIBRACH WAS SCREWED 000690*30*ON THE BOLT AND ANTENNA MEASUREMENT WAS REFERENCED TO TOP OF ROUND 000700*30*METAL PLATE. The following several descriptions illustrate how a cluster of related marks should be described. Note that NCMN is not an agency, but a usage, like TIDAL. 000730*10*6614RTN401058W104433501520M COWELD P LL1438 000740*13*PLATTEVILLE NCMN P 0000 000750*20* / A/NGS 19910515GRH G 000760*26*07/ DH N C NGS 000770*28*PLATTEVILLE NCMN 1981 3-13 000780*30*STATION IS LOCATED ABOUT 9.5 KM (5.9 MI) SOUTHEAST OF PLATTEVILLE, AT 000790*30*THE PLATTEVILLE RADAR SITE, ABOUT 75 M (246.1 FT) NORTHWEST OF THE 000800*30*MAIN BUILDING, IN THE MIDDLE OF THREE 1.7 M (5.6 FT) X 2.7 M 000810*30*(8.9 FT) CONCRETE PADS, IN THE CENTER OF SECTION 36, T 3 N, R 66 W. 000820*30*OWNERSHIP--US DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, NATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS AND 000830*30*INFORMATION ADMINISTRATION, NOAA, WPL, REWP 4, 325 BROADWAY, BOULDER, 000840*30*CO 80303. PHONE IS 303-497-6385 FOR COMBINATION TO GATE LOCK. 000850*30*TO REACH FROM THE JUNCTION OF US HIGHWAY 85 AND STATE HIGHWAY 66 AT 000860*30*THE SOUTH END OF PLATTEVILLE, GO SOUTH ON HIGHWAY 85 FOR 2.05 KM 000870*30*(1.27 MI) TO A CROSSROAD. TURN LEFT, EAST, ON GRAVEL ROAD (ROAD 28) 000880*30*FOR 7.20 KM (4.47 MI) TO ROAD END AT A THREE-WAY FORK AND A LOCKED 000890*30*GATE ON MIDDLE ROAD. PASS THROUGH GATE AND GO SOUTHEAST ON GRADED 000900*30*ROAD FOR 1.21 KM (0.75 MI) TO A GRAVEL DRIVEWAY LEFT ABOUT 200 FT 000910*30*(61.0 M) BEFORE REACHING MAIN BUILDING. TURN LEFT, NORTHEAST, FOR 25 000920*30*M (82.0 FT) TO THE STATION ON THE LEFT. 000930*30*STATION MARK IS SET IN THE TOP OF A 30-CM ROUND CONCRETE POST IN THE 000940*30*MIDDLE OF A 1.2 M (3.9 FT) SQUARE CONCRETE PAD FLUSH WITH THE GROUND. 000950*30*IT IS 26.7 M (87.6 FT) NORTHEAST OF THE ROAD CENTER, 9.6 M (31.5 FT) 000960*30*SOUTHWEST OF A FIBERGLASS WITNESS POST, 12.2 M (40.0 FT) 000970*30*WEST-SOUTHWEST OF A FENCE CORNER, 34.7 M (113.8 FT) WEST-NORTHWEST OF 000980*30*A UTILITY POLE WITH LIGHT, APPROXIMATELY 90 M (295.3 FT) SOUTH OF NGS 000990*30*MARK PLATTEVILLE NCMN RM 1, 86.5 M (283.8 FT) WEST-NORTHWEST OF NGS 001000*30*MARK PLATTEVILLE NCMN RM 2, 62 M (203.4 FT) NORTHEAST OF NGS MARK 001010*30*PLATTEVILLE NCMN RM 3, AND 49.4 M (162.1 FT) NORTHWEST OF PLATTEVILLE 001020*30*NCMN RM 5. 001030*10*8887RTN401058W104433401519M COWELD P 001040*13*PLATTEVILLE NCMN RM 1 DR N 07 X 0005 001050*20*A/NGS 1981 A/NGS 19911119EAR G 001060*26*07/ DR N C NGS 001070*28*PLATTEVILLE NCMN NO 1 1981 001080*30*THE STATION IS LOCATED ABOUT 9.5 KM (5.9 MI) SOUTHEAST OF PLATTEVILLE, 001090*30*AT THE PLATTEVILLE RADAR SITE, IN THE CENTER OF SECTION 36, T 3 N, R 001100*30*66 W. OWNERSHIP--US DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, NATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS 001110*30*AND INFORMATION ADMINISTRATION, NOAA, WPL, REWP 4, 325 BROADWAY, 001120*30*BOULDER, CO 80303. PHONE IS 303-497-6385 FOR COMBINATION TO GATE 001130*30*LOCK. 001140*30*TO REACH FROM THE JUNCTION OF US HIGHWAY 85 AND STATE HIGHWAY 66 AT 001150*30*THE SOUTH END OF PLATTEVILLE, GO SOUTH ON HIGHWAY 85 FOR 2.05 KM 001160*30*(1.27 MI) TO A CROSSROAD. TURN LEFT, EAST, ON GRAVEL ROAD (ROAD 28) 001170*30*FOR 7.20 KM (4.47 MI) TO THE ROAD END AT A THREE-WAY FORK AND A 001180*30*LOCKED GATE ON THE MIDDLE ROAD. PASS THROUGH GATE AND GO SOUTHEAST 001190*30*ON GRADED ROAD FOR 0.50 MI (0.80 KM) TO A GRAVELED CROSSROAD. TURN 001200*30*LEFT AND GO EAST FOR 90 M (295.3 FT) TO THE STATION ON THE RIGHT 001210*30*INSIDE A METAL FENCE. 001220*30*THE STATION IS AN REFERENCE MARK DISC SET IN THE TOP OF A 30-CM ROUND 001230*30*CONCRETE POST PROJECTING 10 CM, WITH A WOODEN STAND. LOCATED 91.5 M 001240*30*(300.2 FT) NORTHEAST OF THE ROAD CENTER, 54.9 M (180.1 FT) NORTHEAST 001250*30*OF AN ELECTRIC FENCE, 8.5 M (27.9 FT) SOUTH-SOUTHEAST OF A METAL 001260*30*FENCE, AND 90 M (295.3 FT) NORTH OF NGS MARK PLATTEVILLE NCMN. 3-14 001270*10*8888RTN401058W10443340 1519M COWELD 001280*13*PLATTEVILLE NCMN RM 2 C 0000 001290*20*A/NGS 1981 A/NGS 19911119EAR G 001300*26*07/ DR N C NGS 001310*28*PLATTEVILLE NCMN NO 2 1981 001320*30*THE STATION IS LOCATED ABOUT 9.5 KM (5.9 MI) SOUTHEAST OF PLATTEVILLE, 001330*30*AT THE PLATTEVILLE RADAR SITE, IN THE CENTER OF SECTION 36, T 3 N, R 001340*30*66 W. OWNERSHIP--US DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, NATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS 001350*30*AND INFORMATION ADMINISTRATION, NOAA, WPL, REWP 4, 325 BROADWAY, 001360*30*BOULDER, CO.80303. CALL 303-497-6385 FOR COMBINATION TO GATE LOCK. 001370*30*TO REACH FROM THE JUNCTION OF US HIGHWAY 85 AND STATE HIGHWAY 66 AT 001380*30*THE SOUTH END OF PLATTEVILLE, GO SOUTH ON HIGHWAY 85 FOR 2.05 KM 001390*30*(1.27 MI) TO A CROSSROAD. TURN LEFT, EAST, ON GRAVEL ROAD (ROAD 28) 001400*30*FOR 7.20 KM (4.47 MI) TO THE ROAD END AT A THREE-WAY FORK AND A 001410*30*LOCKED GATE ON THE MIDDLE ROAD. PASS THROUGH GATE AND GO SOUTHEAST 001420*30*ON GRADED ROAD FOR 1.01 KM (0.63 MI) TO A GRAVEL ROAD LEFT JUST 001430*30*BEFORE REACHING MAIN BUILDING. TURN LEFT FOR 36.6 M (120.1 FT) TO A 001440*30*LIGHT POLE AND TWO NASA TRAILERS. THE STATION IS ABOUT 55 M 001450*30*(180.4 FT) EAST IN A FENCED FIELD. 001460*30*THE STATION IS A REFERENCE MARK DISK SET IN THE TOP OF A 30 CM ROUND 001470*30*CONCRETE POST PROJECTING 15 CM. LOCATED 55 M (180.4 FT) EAST OF A 001480*30*LIGHT POLE, 22.6 M (74.1 FT) EAST-NORTHEAST OF AN 8-INCH SQUARE WIRE 001490*30*GATE POST UNDER POWER LINES, 17.4 M (57.1 FT) EAST-SOUTHEAST OF AN 001500*30*8-INCH ROUND CORNER FENCE POST, 1.2 M (3.9 FT) SOUTHWEST OF A LONE 001510*30*METAL FENCE POST, 86 M (282.2 FT) EAST-SOUTHEAST OF NGS MARK 001520*30*PLATTEVILLE NCMN, AND 46 M (150.9 FT) EAST-NORTHEAST OF NGS MARK 001530*30*PLATTEVILLE NCMN RM 5. 001540*10*8889RTN401058W1044334 1519M COWELD 001550*13*PLATTEVILLE NCMN RM 3 C 0000 001560*20*A/NGS 1981 A/NGS 19911119EAR G 001570*26*07/ DR N C NGS 001580*28*PLATTEVILLE NCMN NO 3 1981 001590*30*THE STATION IS LOCATED ABOUT 9.5 KM (5.9 MI) SOUTHEAST OF PLATTEVILLE, 001600*30*AT THE PLATTEVILLE RADAR SITE, IN THE CENTER OF SECTION 36, T 3 N, R 001610*30*66 W. OWNERSHIP--US DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, NATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS 001620*30*AND INFORMATION ADMINISTRATION, NOAA, WPL, REWP 4, 325 BROADWAY, 001630*30*BOULDER, CO 80303. PHONE IS 303-497-6385 FOR COMBINATION TO GATE 001640*30*LOCK. 001650*30*TO REACH FROM THE JUNCTION OF US HIGHWAY 85 AND STATE HIGHWAY 66 AT 001660*30*THE SOUTH END OF PLATTEVILLE, GO SOUTH ON HIGHWAY 85 FOR 2.05 KM 001670*30*(1.27 MI) TO A CROSSROAD. TURN LEFT, EAST, ON GRAVEL ROAD (ROAD 28) 001680*30*FOR 7.20 KM (4.47 MI) TO THE ROAD END AT A THREE-WAY FORK AND A 001690*30*LOCKED GATE ON THE MIDDLE ROAD. PASS THROUGH GATE AND GO SOUTHEAST 001700*30*ON GRADED ROAD FOR 1.01 KM (0.63 MI) TO A GRAVEL ROAD LEFT JUST 001710*30*BEFORE REACHING MAIN BUILDING AND THE STATION ON THE RIGHT. 001720*30*THE STATION IS A REFERENCE MARK DISK SET IN THE TOP OF A 30-CM 001730*30*CONCRETE POST PROJECTING 5 CM, AND WITH A WOODEN STAND. LOCATED 53.4 001740*30*M (175.2 FT) SOUTH-SOUTHWEST OF THE ROAD CENTER, 5.8 M (19.0 FT) WEST 001750*30*OF A WIRE FENCE LINE, 1.2 M (3.9 FT) NORTH OF A LONE METAL FENCE 001760*30*POST, 1.05 M (3.44 FT) EAST-SOUTHEAST OF A FIBERGLASS WITNESS POST, 001770*30*AND 62 M (203.4 FT) SOUTHEAST OF NGS MARK PLATTEVILLE NCMN. 3-15 001780*10*8890D N401058W104433101522M COWELD P 001790*13*PLATTEVILLE NCMN RM 5 P 0000 001800*20*A/NGS 1991RSC / 001820*26*07/ DH N B NGS 001820*28*PLATTEVILLE NCMN NO 5 1991 001830*30*STATION IS LOCATED ABOUT 9.5 KM (5.9 MI) SOUTHEAST OF PLATTEVILLE, AT 001840*30*THE NOAA PLATTEVILLE RADAR SITE, ABOUT 75 M (246.1 FT) NORTHWEST OF 001850*30*THE MAIN BUILDING, ON THE EAST SIDE OF A GRADED AREA WITH SEVERAL 001860*30*CONCRETE PADS USED FOR PLATE TECTONICS SURVEY VEHICLES, IN THE CENTER 001870*30*OF SECTION 36, T 3 N, R 66 W. OWNERSHIP--US DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE, 001880*30*NATIONAL COMMUNICATIONS AND INFORMATION ADMINISTRATION, NOAA, WPL, 001890*30*REWP 4, 325 BROADWAY, BOULDER, CO 80303. CALL 303-497-6385 FOR 001900*30*COMBINATION TO LOCKED GATE. 001910*30*TO REACH FROM THE JUNCTION OF US HIGHWAY 85 AND STATE HIGHWAY 66 AT 001920*30*THE SOUTH END OF PLATTEVILLE, GO SOUTH ON HIGHWAY 85 FOR 2.05 KM 001930*30*(1.27 MI) TO A CROSSROAD. TURN LEFT, WEST, ON GRAVEL ROAD (ROAD 28) 001940*30*FOR 7.20 KM (4.47 MI) TO ROAD END AT THREE-WAY FORK AND A LOCKED GATE 001950*30*ON THE MIDDLE ROAD. PASS THROUGH GATE, SOUTHEAST, ON GRADED ROAD FOR 001960*30*1.01 KM (0.63 MI) TO A GRAVEL ROAD LEFT JUST BEFORE REACHING THE MAIN 001970*30*BUILDING. TURN LEFT, NORTHEAST, FOR 25 M (82.0 FT) TO THE STATION ON 001980*30*THE RIGHT. 001990*30*STATION MARK IS SET IN THE TOP OF A 0.5 M (1.6 FT) ROUND CONCRETE POST 002000*30*ENCASED IN A PVC PIPE PROJECTING 1.6 M (5.2 FT) ABOVE GROUND FROM A 1 002010*30*M (3.3 FT) CONCRETE BASE SET 3.4 M (11.2 FT) INTO THE GROUND. A 002020*30*PERMANENT ROUND TRIBRACH WITH THREADBOLT IS CENTERED ON THE POST. IT 002030*30*IS 29.6 M (97.1 FT) NORTHEAST OF THE ROAD CENTER, 22.9 M (75.1 FT) 002040*30*NORTH-NORTHEAST OF A TELEPHONE PEDESTAL, 19.5 M (64.0 FT) WEST OF THE 002050*30*WEST CORNER OF A FENCE AROUND AN ELECTRIC SUBSTATION, 15.0 M 002060*30*(49.2 FT) SOUTHEAST OF THE SOUTHEAST CORNER OF ELECTRIC BOX 75, 49.4 002070*30*M (162.1 FT) SOUTHEAST OF NGS MARK PLATTEVILLE NCMN. 002080*AA* If you need more information regarding the writing or use of descriptions, or need clarification of code sets or practices, contact the National Geodetic Information Center by calling (301) 713-3242, or at the following address: NOAA National Geodetic Survey, N/CG174 1315 East-West Highway Silver Spring, Maryland 20910-3282 THE FOLLOWING PAGES INCLUDE DETAILED EXAMPLES (FORMAT DIAGRAMS) FOR EACH CHARACTER FIELD AND THE PROPER LOCATION AND LENGTH OF THE FIELD WITHIN A GIVEN RECORD. 3-16 컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴GEODDESC횯ATA훁ET훀ECORDS컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 컴컴컴컴컴컴� DATA SET IDENTIFICATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 18 19 24 25 44 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE JOB DATA DATA ORGANIZATION SUBMITTING ORGANIZATION NAME NUMBER CODE CLASS TYPE SYMBOL (GEOD) (DESC) (See Annex C) 45 66 73 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SUBMITTING ORGANIZATION NAME CONTINUED Y Y Y Y M M D D FILE CREATION DATE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *00* PROJECT INFORMATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 18 19 22 23 41 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA ACCESSION LINE/PART BLANK NUMBER CODE NUMBER NUMBER 42 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� BLANK -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *01* PROJECT TITLE RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA PROJECT TITLE NUMBER CODE 46 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� PROJECT TITLE (CONTINUED) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 3-17 컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴GEODDESC횯ATA-SET-RECORDS (CONT)컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� *02*, *03*, *04* PROJECT TITLE CONTINUATION RECORDS 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA PROJECT TITLE CONTINUATION NUMBER CODE 46 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� PROJECT TITLE CONTINUATION -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *05* COMMENT RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA COMMENT NUMBER CODE 46 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� COMMENT (CONTINUED) -- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------- *10* STATION LOCATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 14 15 16 17 23 24 31 32 36 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SSN D/R RECOVERY H D D M M S S W D D D M M S S APPROXIMATE NUMBER CODE CODE TYPE APPROXIMATE APPROXIMATE HEIGHT CODE LATITUDE LONGITUDE (E.G. N382443) (E.G. W1023452) 37 39 45 47 48 49 68 69 72 73 78 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� HEIGHT 30 MINUTE QUAD STATE COUNTY NAME APPLICATION PID UNITS IDENTIFIER CODES - -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------ 3-18 컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴GEODDESC횯ATA-SET-RECORDS (CONT)컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� *13* STATION IDENTIFICATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 46 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA STATION DESIGNATION NUMBER CODE 47 50 52 53 55 57 58 60 63 66 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� CONT. DESIGNATION UNDERGROUND UNDERGROUND UNDERGROUND TRANSPORTATION PACK TIME MARKER TYPE MAGNETIC CODE SETTING CODE CODE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *15* ALIAS RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 50 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA ALIAS NUMBER CODE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *20* MONUMENTED/RECOVERED RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 13 18 32 33 36 37 39 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SETTING SETTING AGENCY SYMBOL / NAME YEAR CHIEF OF NUMBER CODE AGENCY SET PARTY GROUP CODE 42 44 49 63 64 71 72 74 77 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕� RECOVERING RECOVERING AGENCY SYMBOL / NAME Y Y Y Y M M D D CHIEF OF RECOVERY AGENCY DATE RECOVERED RECOVERING CONDITION GROUP CODE PARTY CODE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 3-19 컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴GEODDESC횯ATA-SET-RECORDS (CONT)컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� *26* SETTING RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 12 14 45 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA SETTING SPECIFIC SETTING PHRASE NUMBER CODE CODE 46 47 49 51 54 59 79 旼쩡� 旼� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔� 읕� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� MARKER MAGNETIC VERTICAL INSCRIBED AGENCY SYMBOL / NAME TYPE CODE STABILITY OVERRIDE CODE -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- *28* STAMPING RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 40 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA STAMPING NUMBER CODE 41 60 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� STAMPING CONTINUED - -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------ *29* ROD/PIPE RECORD (OPTIONAL) 1 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 17 18 21 22 23 24 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔� SEQUENCE DATA UNITS SETTING ROD/PIPE SLEEVE R=RECESS PROJECTION OR NUMBER CODE CODE CODE DEPTH DEPTH F=FLUSH RECESS OF (E OR M) P=PROJECTING CASING -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 3-20 컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴GEODDESC횯ATA-SET-RECORDS (CONT)컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� *30* TEXT RECORDS 1 6 7 10 11 47 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� SEQUENCE DATA DESCRIPTIVE TEXT NUMBER CODE 48 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� DESCRIPTIVE TEXT CONTINUED -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- DATA SET TERMINATION RECORD 1 6 7 10 11 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� SEQUENCE DATA BLANK NUMBER CODE (INC BY 10) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- 3-21 INTENTIONALLY BLANK 3-22 ANNEX A NGS STATE AND COUNTRY CODES NORTH AMERICAN AND GREENLAND GREENLAND . . . . . . . . . . GL CANADA . . . . . . . . . . . CD Provinces and Territories: Alberta . . . . AB Newfoundland . . . NF Prince Edward Is PE British Columbia BC Northwest Terr's . NW Quebec . . . . . PQ Manitoba . . . . MB Nova Scotia . . . NS Saskatchewa n . . SK New Brunswick . NB Ontario . . . . . ON Yukon Territory YK UNITED STATES . . . . . . US States and District of Columbia: Alabama . . . . AL Kentucky . . . . . KY North Dakota . . ND Alaska . . . . AK Louisiana . . . . LA Ohio . . . . . . OH Arizona . . . . AZ Maine . . . . . . ME Oklahoma . . . . OK Arkansas . . . AR Maryland . . . . . MD Oregon . . . . . OR California . . CA Massachusetts . . MA Pennsylvani a . . PA Colorado . . . CO Michigan . . . . . MI Rhode Island . . RI Connecticut . . CT Minnesota . . . . MN South Carolina . NC Delaware . . . DE Mississippi . . . MS South Dakota . . SD Dist of Columbia DC Missouri . . . . . MO Tennessee . . . TN Florida . . . . FL Montana . . . . . MT Texas . . . . . TX Georgia . . . . GA Nebraska . . . . . NE Utah . . . . . . UT Hawaii . . . . HI Nevada . . . . . . NV Vermont . . . . VT Idaho . . . . . ID New Hampshire . . NH Virginia . . . . VA Illinois . . . IL New Jersey . . . . NJ Washington . . . WA Indiana . . . . IN New Mexico . . . . NM West Virginia . WV Iowa . . . . . IA New York . . . . . NY Wisconsin . . . WI Kansas . . . . KS North Carolina . . NC Wyoming . . . . WY Other Political Units and Territories: American Samoa . . . . . AS Navassa Island . . . . . . . . . BQ Guam . . . . . . . . . . GU Johnston Atoll . . . . . . . . . JQ Puerto Rico . . . . . . PR Midway Islands . . . . . . . . . MQ Virgin Islands . . . . . VI Wake Island . . . . . . . . . . WQ Trust Terr of Pacific Islands (Marianas, Carolines, Marshalls) . . . TQ BERMUDA . . . . . . . . BD MEXICO . . . . . . . . MX A-1 CENTRAL AMERICA AND THE CARIBBEAN AREA BAHAMA ISLANDS . . . . . . . BS HAITI . . . . . . . . . . . . HA BARBADOS . . . . . . . . . . BB HONDURAS . . . . . . . . . . . HO BELIZE (British Honduras) . . BH JAMAICA . . . . . . . . . . . JM CAYMAN ISLANDS . . . . . . . CJ NETHERLANDS ANTILLES . . . . . NA COLOMBIA . . . . . . . . . . CB NICARAGUA . . . . . . . . . . NI COSTA RICA . . . . . . . . . CR PANAMA . . . . . . . . . . . . PN CUBA . . . . . . . . . . . . CU TRINIDAD AND TOBAGO . . . . . TD DOMINICAN REPUBLIC . . . . . DR TURKS AND CAICOS ISLANDS . . . TC EL SALVADOR . . . . . . . . . ES VENEZUELA . . . . . . . . . . VE GUATEMALA . . . . . . . . . . GT OTHER COUNTRIES OR AREAS OF INTEREST TO NGS ANTARCTICA . . . . . . . . . AY NORWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . NO ARGENTINA . . . . . . . . . . AJ PARAGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . PY BOLIVIA . . . . . . . . . . . BL PHILIPPINE ISLANDS . . . . . . PH BRAZIL . . . . . . . . . . . BR SAINT HELENA ISLANDS . . . . . SH CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC . . CF SAUDI ARABIA . . . . . . . . . SA CHILE . . . . . . . . . . . CI SOUTH AFRICA . . . . . . . . . SF ECUADOR . . . . . . . . . . . EC SOVIET UNION . . . . . . . . . UR EGYPT . . . . . . . . . . . EG SUDAN . . . . . . . . . . . . SU ETHIOPIA . . . . . . . . . . ET SURINAM . . . . . . . . . . . SR FRENCH GUIANA . . . . . . . . FG TANZANIA . . . . . . . . . . . TZ FRENCH SOMALILAND . . . . . . FS UGANDA . . . . . . . . . . . . UG ICELAND . . . . . . . . . . . IC URUGUAY . . . . . . . . . . . UY ITALY . . . . . . . . . . . . IT ZAMBIA . . . . . . . . . . . . ZA JAPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . JA A-2 ANNEX B STATE PLANE COORDINATES (SPC) ZONE CODES SPC ZONE CODE SPC ZONE CODE SPC ZONE CODE AL E 0101 HI 1 5101 MN N 2201 W 0102 2 5102 C 2202 3 5103 S 2203 AK 1 5001 4 5104 2 5002 5 5105 MS E 2301 3 5003 W 2302 4 5004 ID E 1101 5 5005 C 1102 MO E 2401 6 5006 W 1103 C 2402 7 5007 W 2403 8 5008 IL E 1201 9 5009 W 1202 MT 2500 10 5010 IN E 1301 AZ E 0201 W 1302 C 0202 NE 2600 W 0203 IA N 1401 S 1402 AR N 0301 NV E 2701 S 0302 KS N 1501 C 2702 S 1502 W 2703 CA 1 0401 2 0402 KY N 1601 NH 2800 3 0403 S 1602 4 0404 NJ 2900 5 0405 LA N 1701 6 0406 S 1702 NM E 3001 SH 1703 C 3002 CO N 0501 W 3003 C 0502 ME E 1801 S 0503 W 1802 NY E 3101 C 3102 CT 0600 MD 1900 W 3103 L 3104 DE 0700 MA M 2001 I 2002 NC 3200 FL E 0901 W 0902 MI N 2111 ND N 3301 N 0903 C 2112 S 3302 S 2113 GA E 1001 OH N 3401 W 1002 S 3402 B-1 SPC ZONE CODE SPC ZONE CODE SPC ZONE CODE OK N 3501 TX N 4201 WV N 4701 S 3502 NC 4202 S 4702 C 4203 OR N 3601 SC 4204 WI N 4801 S 3602 S 4205 C 4802 S 4803 PA N 3701 UT N 4301 S 3702 C 4302 WY E 4901 S 4303 EC 4902 RI 3800 WC 4903 VT 4400 W 4904 SC 3900 VA N 4501 PR & VI 5200 SD N 4001 S 4502 S 4002 AS 5300 WA N 4601 TN 4100 S 4602 GU 5400 LEGEND: C - Central Zone E - Eastern Zone L - Long Island Zone (NY) M - Mainland Zone (MA) N - Northern Zone NC - North-Central Zone(TX) SH - Offshore Zone (LA) S - Southern Zone SC - South-Central Zone (TX) W - Western Zone I - Island (MA) Note: A blank in the zone columns above indicates that the state has only one state plane coordinate zone. B-2 ANNEX C CONTRIBUTORS OF GEODETIC CONTROL DATA This ANNEX contains a list of organizations which have contributed (or are expected to contribute) data resulting from geodetic control established to extend and/or densify the national horizontal and vertical geodetic control networks. A unique six-character identification symbol has been assigned to each organization listed. As far as possible, this symbol is identical to the commonly used abbreviation or acronym of the respective organization. However, to ensure uniqueness, modifications of the commonly used abbre- viations and acronyms, as well as arbitrary symbols, had to be assigned in many cases. Organizations not listed in this ANNEX may contact the National Geodetic Survey (see ANNEX K) to have a unique identification symbol assigned. The respective organizations are grouped under 13 categories, and within each category they are listed in the alphabetic order of their identification symbols. The 13 categories are given in the index below. CATEGORIES OF CONTRIBUTORS OF GEODETIC CONTROL DATA PAGE A. National Agencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3 B. Inter-State or Inter-Province Agencies . . . . . . . . . . C-4 C. State, Province, Commonwealth, and Territorial Agencies . . C-5 D. County Agencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9 E. Municipal Agencies (Cities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-15 F. Inter-City and Inter-County Agencies . . . . . . . . . . . C-20 G. Railroads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-22 H. Utility and Natural Resource Companies . . . . . . . . . . C-23 I. Surveying, Engineering, and Construction Industry . . . . . C-25 J. Educational Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-29 K. Professional and Amateur Associations . . . . . . . . . . . C-30 L. Miscellaneous Commercial or Private Firms . . . . . . . . . C-30 M. Non-Specific Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-31 CONVENTIONS USED IN THE FORMATION OF IDENTIFICATION SYMBOLS a. State, Province, Commonwealth, and Territorial Agencies: The six- character identification symbol of a state, province, commonwealth, or territorial agency consists of the respective two-character state code (see ANNEX A) to which up to four letters (e.g. the initials of the agency's name) may be appended. In general, "S" for "state" and "0" for "of" should be omitted. C-1 b. County Agencies: The six-character identification symbol of a county agency consists of the two-character code denoting the state in which the county is located (see ANNEX A) followed by a hyphen and by a three-digit number which has been assigned to the respective county in Worldwide Geographic Location Codes prepared by the Office of Finance, General Services Administration (GSA), September 1987. Agencies which do not have access to this publication may contact the National Geodetic Survey (see ANNEX K) to obtain the appropriate county code. c. City Agencies: The six-character identification symbol of a city agency consists of the two-character code denoting the state in which the city is located (see ANNEX A) followed by a four-digit number which has been assigned to the respective city in Worldwide Geographic Location Codes prepared by the Office of Finance, General Services Administration (GSA), September 1987. Agencies which do not have access to this publication may contact the National Geodetic Survey (see ANNEX K) to obtain the appropriate city code. NOTE: For the purposes of this ANNEX, agencies of independent cities which are also counties or county-equivalents should be considered to be city (rather than county) agencies and assigned identification symbols accordingly. C-2 ***************************************** **************** * CONTRIBUTORS OF GEODETIC CONTROL DATA * * AS OF 940131 * ***************************************** **************** �袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴敲 튞OTE : AGENCY SYMBOLS LISTED HEREIN ARE FOR NGS INTERNAL USE ONLY� 훤袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� NATIONAL AGENCIES SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* AEC ATOMIC ENERGY COMMISSION (NOW ERDA) AMS US ARMY MAP SERVICE (NOW DMA) BLM US BUREAU OF LAND MANAGEMENT BOF US BUREAU OF COMMERCIAL FISHERIES BOM US BUREAU OF MINES BOR US BUREAU OF RECLAMATION (NOW WPRS) BPR US BUREAU OF PUBLIC ROADS BV BRITISH VIRGIN ISLAND CAB CIVIL AERONAUTICS BOARD CGS US COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY (NOW NOS) CHS CANADIAN HYDROGRAPHIC SERVICE DI US DEPARTMENT OF INTERIOR DMA DEFENSE MAPPING AGENCY DOD US DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DTENAL ESTUDIOS DEL TERRITORIO NACIONAL DE MEXICO ES-IGN EL SALVADOR-INST GEOG NAC FAA FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION FHWA FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION GSC GEODETIC SURVEY OF CANADA GSFC GODDARD SPACE FLIGHT CENTER IAGS INTER-AMERICAN GEODETIC SURVEY IBC INTERNATIONAL BOUNDARY COMMISSION IBWC INTERNATIONAL BOUNDARY AND WATER COMMISSION INEGI INSTITUTO NACIONAL DE ESTADISTICA GI DE MEXICO IWC INTERNATIONAL WATERWAYS COMMISSION NASA NATIONAL AERONAUTICS AND SPACE ADMIN NBS NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS (NOW NIST) NGS NATIONAL GEODETIC SURVEY NIH NATIONAL INSTITUTES OF HEALTH NIST NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY NOS NATIONAL OCEAN SURVEY NOSAMC NOS ATLANTIC MARINE CENTER NOSOES NOS OFFICE OF OCEAN AND EARTH SCIENCES NOSOMA NOS OCEANOGRAPHY AND MARINE ASSESSMENT NOSPMC NOS PACIFIC MARINE CENTER NPS NATIONAL PARK SERVICE NSL US NAVY STANDARDS LABORATORY AT POMONA ONCADH ONTARIO CANADA DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS PBPP OFFICE OF PUBLIC BUILDINGS AND PUBLIC PARKS PICGS PHILIPPINE COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY SCS SOIL CONSERVATION SERVICE C-3 NATIONAL AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* SWEDLS SWEDISH LAND SURVEY TPC US ARMY TOPOGRAPHIC COMMAND (NOW DMA) TVA TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY USA US ARMY USAF US AIR FORCE USCG US COAST GUARD USDA US DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE USDOT US DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION USDWC US DEEP WATERWAY COMMISSION USE US ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS USFS US FOREST SERVICE USFWA US FEDERAL WORKS AGENCY USFWS US FISH AND WILDLIFE SERVICE USGLO US GOVERNMENT LAND OFFICE USGS US GEOLOGICAL SURVEY USGS-E USGS EASTERN MAPPING CENTER USGS-M USGS MID-CONTINENT MAPPING CENTER USGS-R USGS ROCKY MOUNTAIN MAPPING CENTER USGS-W USGS WESTERN MAPPING CENTER USIIS US INDIAN IRRIGATION SERVICE USLHS US LIGHTHOUSE SERVICE (NOW USCG) USLS US LAKE SURVEY USMC US MARINE CORPS USN US NAVY USPS US POSTAL SERVICE USSC US SUPREME COURT USTD US TREASURY DEPARTMENT USWB US WEATHER BUREAU (NOW NWS) VI VIRGIN ISLANDS (US) VICS VIRGIN ISLANDS CADASTRAL SURVEY WPA WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION WPRS US WATER AND POWER RESOURCES SERVICE WSMR WHITE SANDS MISSILE RANGE INTER-STATE OR INTER-PROVINCE AGENCIES SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** **************************************************************** BPA BONNEVILLE POWER ADMINISTRATION CGS+SS US COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY AND STATE SURVEY DEPABC DELAWARE-PENNSYLVANIA BOUNDARY COMMISSION IRC ILLINOIS RIVER COMMISSION MDDEBC MARYLAND-DELAWARE BOUNDARY COMMISSION MDVABC MARYLAND-VIRGINIA BOUNDARY COMMISSION MENHBC MAINE-NEW HAMPSHIRE BOUNDARY COMMISSION MORC MISSOURI RIVER COMMISSION MRC MISSISSIPPI RIVER COMMISSION NMTXBC NEW MEXICO AND TEXAS BOUNDARY COMMISSION VTNHBC VERMONT-NEW HAMPSHIRE BOUNDARY COMMISSION C-4 STATE, PROVINCE, COMMONWEALTH, AND TERRITORIAL AGENCIES SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* AKDAVI ALASKA DIVISION OF AVIATION AKDLS ALASKA DIVISION OF LAND SURVEY AKDNR ALASKA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES AKHD ALASKA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT AKPWR ALASKA POWER ADMINISTRATION ALGS ALABAMA GEODETIC SURVEY ALHD STATE OF ALABAMA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT ARGLS ARKANSAS GEOLOGICAL SURVEY ARGS ARKANSAS GEODETIC SURVEY ARHD ARKANSAS STATE HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT AZDT ARIZONA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION AZHD ARIZONA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW AZDT) CADC CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF CONSERVATION CADF CALIFORNIA DIVISION OF FORESTRY CADH CALIFORNIA DIVISION OF HIGHWAYS (NOW CADT) CADPW CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS CADT CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION CADWR CALIFORNIA DEPARTMENT OF WATER RESOURCES CAEC CALIFORNIA EARTHQUAKE COMMISSION CAGS CALIFORNIA GEODETIC SURVEY CASLC CALIFORNIA STATE LANDS COMMISSION CASPC CALIFORNIA STATE PARKS COMMISSION CODH COLORADO STATE DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS CODOT COLORADO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION COGS COLORADO GEODETIC SURVEY CTCSF CONNECTICUT COMMISSION OF SHELL FISHERIES CTDT CONNECTICUT DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION CTGS CONNECTICUT GEODETIC SURVEY DCDHT DC DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS AND TRAFFIC DEDHT DELAWARE DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS AND TRANSP FLDACS FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF AGR AND CONSUMER SERV FLDNR FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES FLDPW FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS FLDT FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION FLGS FLORIDA GEODETIC SURVEY FLHD FLORIDA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW FLDT) GADT GEORGIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION GAGS GEORGIA GEODETIC SURVEY GAHD GEORGIA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW GADT) HIDT HAWAII DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION HIGS HAWAII GEODETIC SURVEY HITS HAWAII TERRITORIAL SURVEY IACC IOWA CONSERVATION COMMISSION IAHD IOWA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT IDDH IDAHO DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS (NOW IDDT) IDDT IDAHO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION (NOW IDTD) IDGS IDAHO GEODETIC SURVEY IDPWD IDAHO DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS IDTD IDAHO TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT ILDPW ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS C-5 STATE, PROVINCE, COMMONWEALTH, AND TERRITORIAL AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** ILDT ILLINOIS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION ILDW ILLINOIS DIVISION OF WATERWAYS ILGS ILLINOIS GEODETIC SURVEY ILHD ILLINOIS HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW ILDT) ILSC ILLINOIS SANITARY COMMISSION INDNR INDIANA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES INFCC INDIANA FLOOD CONTROL AND WATER RES COMM INGS INDIANA GEODETIC SURVEY INHD INDIANA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT IOWAGS IOWA GEODETIC SURVEY KSDT KANSAS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION KSGS KANSAS GEODETIC SURVEY KSHC STATE HIGHWAY COMM OF KANSAS (NOW KSDT) KSWRB KANSAS WATER RESOURCES BOARD KYDT KENTUCKY DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION KYGS KENTUCKY GEODETIC SURVEY KYHD KENTUCKY STATE HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW KYDT) LADH LOUISIANA DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS (NOW LADTD) LADPW LOUISIANA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS LADTD LOUISIANA DEPT OF TRANSP AND DEVELOPMENT LAGS LOUISIANA GEODETIC SURVEY LASCC LOUISIANA STATE CONSERVATION COMMISSION MADLH MASSACHUSETTS DEPARTMENT OF LAND AND HARBORS MADPW MASSACHUSETTS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS MALCT MASSACHUSETTS LAND COURT MAGS MASSACHUSETTS GEODETIC SURVEY MDBCSM MARYLAND BUREAU OF CONTROL SURVEYS AND MAPS MDDNR MARYLAND DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES MDDT MARYLAND DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION MDGS MARYLAND GEODETIC SURVEY MDSFC MARYLAND SHELL FISHERIES COMMISSION MDSHA MARYLAND DOT STATE HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION MDSRC MARYLAND STATE ROADS COMMISSION (NOW MDDT) MEDT MAINE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION MEGS MAINE GEODETIC SURVEY MEHD MAINE HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW MEDT) MEPUC MAINE PUBLIC UTILITIES COMMISSION MIDH MICHIGAN DEPT OF STATE HIGHWAYS AND TRANSP MIDNR MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES MIDT MICHIGAN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION MIGS MICHIGAN GEODETIC SURVEY MNDNR MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES MNDT MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION MNGS MINNESOTA GEODETIC SURVEY MNHD MINNESOTA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW MNDT) MODNR MISSOURI DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES MOGS MISSOURI GEODETIC SURVEY MOHC MISSOURI STATE HIGHWAY COMMISSION MOSLSA MISSOURI STATE LAND SURVEY AUTHORITY MSDEQ MISSISSIPPI DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY C-6 STATE, PROVINCE, COMMONWEALTH, AND TERRITORIAL AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** MSGS MISSISSIPPI GEODETIC SURVEY MSHD MISSISSIPPI STATE HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT MTBOR MONTANA BUREAU OF PUBLIC ROADS MTDH MONTANA DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS MTDOT MONTANA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION MTGS MONTANA GEODETIC SURVEY MTSHC MONTANA STATE HIGHWAY COMMISSION NCDF NORTH CAROLINA DIVISION OF FORESTRY NCDNR NORTH CAROLINA DEPT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NCDOT NORTH CAROLINA DEPT OF TRANS DIV OF HWYS NCGS NORTH CAROLINA GEODETIC SURVEY NCHC NORTH CAROLINA HIGHWAY COMMISSION (NOW NCDOT) NCHPWC NORTH CAROLINA HIGHWAY AND PUBLIC WORKS COMM NCSHC NORTH CAROLINA STATE HIGHWAY COMMISSION NDGS NORTH DAKOTA GEODETIC SURVEY NDHD NORTH DAKOTA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT NDWC NORTH DAKOTA WATER COMMISSION NEDR NEBRASKA DEPARTMENT OF ROADS NEGS NEBRASKA GEODETIC SURVEY NHDOT NEW HAMPSHIRE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION NHDPWH NEW HAMPSHIRE DEPT OF PUBLIC WORKS + HWYS NHGS NEW HAMPSHIRE GEODETIC SURVEY NHHD NEW HAMPSHIRE HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT NJBCN NEW JERSEY BOARD OF COMMERCE AND NAVIGATION NJDCED NEW JERSEY DEPARTMENT OF CONSERVATION AND ECON DEV NJDEP NEW JERSEY DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION NJDT NEW JERSEY DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION NJGS NEW JERSEY GEODETIC SURVEY NJHA NEW JERSEY HIGHWAY AUTHORITY NJSFC NEW JERSEY SHELL FISHERIES COMMISSION NMGS NEW MEXICO GEODETIC SURVEY NMHC NEW MEXICO STATE HIGHWAY COMMISSION NMHD NEW MEXICO STATE HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT NVDH NEVADA DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS NVDT NEVADA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION NVGS NEVADA GEODETIC SURVEY NYBE+A NEW YORK BOARD OF ESTIMATE AND APPORTIONMENT NYDPW NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS NYDT NEW YORK STATE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION NYGS NEW YORK GEODETIC SURVEY NYHD NEW YORK DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS (NOW NYDT) NYLISP NEW YORK LONG ISLAND STATE PARK AUTHORITY NYNPA NEW YORK NIAGARA POWER AUTHORITY NYSE+S NEW YORK STATE ENGINEER AND SURVEYOR NYSS NEW YORK STATE SURVEY OHDNR OHIO DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES OHDT OHIO DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION OHGS OHIO GEODETIC SURVEY OHHD OHIO HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW OHDT) OKCC OKLAHOMA CONSERVATION COMMISSION C-7 STATE, PROVINCE, COMMONWEALTH, AND TERRITORIAL AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** OKDH OKLAHOMA DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS OKDOT OKLAHOMA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION OKGS OKLAHOMA GEODETIC SURVEY ORDT OREGON DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION ORGS OREGON GEODETIC SURVEY ORHD OREGON STATE HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW ORDT) ORSLB OREGON STATE LAND BOARD ORTAX OREGON STATE TAX COMMISSION PADFW PENNSYLVANIA DEPT OF FORESTS AND WATERS PADH PENNSYLVANIA DEPT OF HIGHWAYS (NOW PADT) PADT PENNSYLVANIA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION PAGS PENNSYLVANIA GEODETIC SURVEY PRPWD PUERTO RICO PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT RIBPR RHODE ISLAND BUREAU OF PUBLIC ROADS RIDT RHODE ISLAND DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION RIGS RHODE ISLAND GEODETIC SURVEY SCCC SOUTH CAROLINA COASTAL COUNCIL SCDHPT SOUTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS AND PUBLIC TRANSPORTATION SCDOT SOUTH CAROLINA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION SCGS SOUTH CAROLINA GEODETIC SURVEY SCHD SOUTH CAROLINA STATE HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT SCWRC SOUTH CAROLINA WATER RESOURCE COMMISSION SDDT SOUTH DAKOTA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION SDGS SOUTH DAKOTA GEODETIC SURVEY SDHD SOUTH DAKOTA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW SDDT) TNDG TENNESSEE DIVISION OF GEOLOGY TNDPW TENNESSEE DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS TNDT TENNESSEE DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION TNGS TENNESSEE GEODETIC SURVEY TNHD TENNESSEE HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW TNDT) TXGS TEXAS GEODETIC SURVEY TXHD TEXAS HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT TXRD TEXAS RECLAMATION DEPARTMENT UTDH UTAH STATE DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS VACF VIRGINIA COMMISSION OF FISHERIES VADH VIRGINIA DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS VADHT VIRGINIA DEPT OF HIGHWAYS AND TRANSPORTATION VAGS VIRGINIA GEODETIC SURVEY VAMR VIRGINIA MARINE RESOURCES VTAT VERMONT AGENCY OF TRANSPORTATION VTDH VERMONT DEPARTMENT OF HIGHWAYS (NOW VTAT) VTFS VERMONT FOREST SERVICE VTGS VERMONT GEODETIC SURVEY VTHP VERMONT HISTORIC PRESERVATION VTSM STATE OF VERMONT SURVEY MARK WADNR WASHINGTON DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES WADPL WASHINGTON STATE DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC LANDS WADPW WASHINGTON DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS WADT WASHINGTON DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION WAGS WASHINGTON GEODETIC SURVEY C-8 STATE, PROVINCE, COMMONWEALTH, AND TERRITORIAL AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** WAHC WASHINGTON STATE HIGHWAY COMMISSION WATBA WASHINGTON STATE TOLL BRIDGE AUTHORITY WIDNR WISCONSIN DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES WIDT WISCONSIN DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION WIGS WISCONSIN GEODETIC SURVEY WIHD WISCONSIN HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW WIDT) WIPSC WISCONSIN PUBLIC SERVICE COMMISSION WIRRC WISCONSIN RAILROAD COMMISSION WVGS WEST VIRGINIA GEODETIC SURVEY WVHD WEST VIRGINIA HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT WYDT WYOMING DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION WYGS WYOMING GEODETIC SURVEY WYHD WYOMING HIGHWAY DEPARTMENT (NOW WYDT) COUNTY AGENCIES SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** AK-020 BOROUGH OF ANCHORAGE ALASKA AK-050 BETHEL CENSUS AREA AK-160 LAKE AND PENINSULA BOROUGH AK-185 NORTH SLOPE BOROUGH AK-188 NORTHWEST ARCTIC BOROUGH AK-290 YUKON-KOYUKUK CENSUS AREA AL-107 PICKENS COUNTY ALABAMA AL-119 SUMTER COUNTY ALABAMA AZ-013 MARICOPA COUNTY ARIZONA AZ-015 MOHAVE COUNTY ARIZONA AZ-019 PIMA COUNTY ARIZONA CA-001 ALAMEDA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-007 BUTTE COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-013 CONTRA COSTA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-019 FRESNO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-023 HUMBOLDT COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-025 IMPERIAL COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-027 INYO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-029 KERN COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-031 KINGS COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-033 LAKE COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-037 LOS ANGELES COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-041 MARIN COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-043 MARIPOSA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-045 MENDOCINO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-051 MONO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-053 MONTEREY COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-055 NAPA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-059 ORANGE COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-061 PLACER COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-063 PLUMAS COUNTY CALIFORNIA C-9 COUNTY AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** CA-065 RIVERSIDE COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-067 SACRAMENTO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-069 SAN BENITO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-071 SAN BERNARDINO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-073 SAN DIEGO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-075 SAN FRANCISCO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-077 SAN JOAQUIN COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-079 SAN LUIS OBISPO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-081 SAN MATEO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-083 SANTA BARBARA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-085 SANTA CLARA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-087 SANTA CRUZ COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-089 SHASTA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-091 SIERRA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-093 SISKIYOU COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-097 SONOMA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-099 STANISLAUS COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-103 TEHAMA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-105 TRINITY COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-107 TULARE COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-109 TUOLUMNE COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-111 VENTURA COUNTY CALIFORNIA CA-113 YOLO COUNTY CALIFORNIA CO-001 ADAMS COUNTY COLORADO CO-005 ARAPAHOE COUNTY COLORADO CO-013 BOULDER COUNTY COLORADO CO-017 CHEYENNE COUNTY COLORADO CO-059 JEFFERSON COUNTY COLORADO CO-061 KIOWA COUNTY COLORADO CO-069 LARIMER COUNTY COLORADO CO-077 MESA COUNTY COLORADO CO-123 WELD COUNTY COLORADO FL-001 ALACHUA COUNTY FLORIDA FL-011 BROWARD COUNTY FLORIDA FL-015 CHARLOTTE COUNTY FLORIDA FL-017 CITRUS COUNTY FLORIDA FL-025 DADE COUNTY FLORIDA FL-053 HERNANDO COUNTY FLORIDA FL-057 HILLSBOROUGH COUNTY FLORIDA FL-071 LEE COUNTY FLORIDA FL-081 MANATEE COUNTY FLORIDA FL-083 MARION COUNTY FLORIDA FL-085 MARTIN COUNTY FLORIDA FL-091 OKALOOSA COUNTY FLORIDA FL-095 ORANGE COUNTY FLORIDA FL-099 PALM BEACH COUNTY FLORIDA FL-101 PASCO COUNTY FLORIDA FL-103 PINELLAS COUNTY FLORIDA FL-115 SARASOTA COUNTY FLORIDA FL-131 WALTON COUNTY FLORIDA C-10 COUNTY AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** GA-067 COBB COUNTY GEORGIA GA-089 DE KALB COUNTY GEORGIA GA-095 DOUGHERTY COUNTY GEORGIA GA-121 FULTON COUNTY GEORGIA GA-135 GWINNETT COUNTY GEORGIA IA-033 CERRO GORDO COUNTY IOWA IA-035 CHEROKEE COUNTY IOWA IA-037 CHICKASAW COUNTY IOWA IA-057 DES MOINES COUNTY IOWA IA-059 DICKINSON COUNTY IOWA IA-063 EMMET COUNTY IOWA IA-065 FAYETTE COUNTY IOWA IA-077 GUTHRIE COUNTY IOWA IA-083 HARDIN COUNTY IOWA IA-105 JONES COUNTY IOWA IA-113 LINN COUNTY IOWA IA-125 MARION COUNTY IOWA IA-147 PALO ALTO COUNTY IOWA IA-159 RINGGOLD COUNTY IOWA IA-165 SHELBY COUNTY IOWA IA-167 SIOUX COUNTY IOWA IA-169 STORY COUNTY IOWA IA-199 LYON COUNTY IOWA ID-011 ADA COUNTY IDAHO ID-079 SHOSHONE COUNTY IDAHO IL-031 COOK COUNTY ILLINOIS IL-043 DU PAGE COUNTY ILLINOIS IL-051 FAYETTE COUNTY ILLINOIS IL-103 LEE COUNTY ILLINOIS IL-125 MADISON COUNTY ILLINOIS IL-163 ST CLAIR COUNTY ILLINOIS IL-195 WHITESIDE COUNTY ILLINOIS IN-003 ALLEN COUNTY INDIANA IN-039 ELKHART COUNTY INDIANA IN-085 KOSCIUSKO COUNTY INDIANA IN-127 PORTER COUNTY INDIANA IN-131 PULASKI COUNTY INDIANA IN-141 ST JOSEPH COUNTY INDIANA KS-007 BARBER COUNTY KANSAS KS-009 BARTON COUNTY KANSAS KS-167 RUSSELL COUNTY KANSAS KS-189 STEVENS COUNTY KANSAS KS-203 WICHITA COUNTY KANSAS KS-207 WOODSON COUNTY KANSAS KS-209 WYANDOTTE COUNTY KANSAS LA-019 CALASIEU PARISH LOUISIANA LA-033 EAST BATON ROUGE PARISH LOUISIANA LA-051 JEFFERSON PARISH LOUISIANA LA-087 ST BERNARD PARISH LOUISIANA LA-101 ST MARY PARISH LOUISIANA C-11 COUNTY AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** MD-003 ANNE ARUNDEL COUNTY MARYLAND MD-017 CHARLES COUNTY MARYLAND MD-019 DORCHESTER COUNTY MARYLAND MD-021 FREDERICK COUNTY MARYLAND MD-025 HARFORD COUNTY MARYLAND MD-027 HOWARD COUNTY MARYLAND MD-043 WASHINGTON COUNTY MARYLAND ME-007 FRANKLIN COUNTY MAINE MI-005 ALLEGAN COUNTY MICHIGAN MI-011 ARENAC COUNTY MICHIGAN MI-033 CHIPPEWA COUNTY MICHIGAN MI-053 GOGEBIC COUNTY MICHIGAN MI-061 HOUGHTON COUNTY MICHIGAN MI-063 HURON COUNTY MICHIGAN MI-075 JACKSON COUNTY MICHIGAN MI-081 KENT COUNTY MICHIGAN MI-125 OAKLAND COUNTY MICHIGAN MI-163 WAYNE COUNTY MICHIGAN MN-019 CARVER COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-037 DAKOTA COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-049 GOODHUE COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-061 ITASCA COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-075 LAKE COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-103 NICOLLET COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-109 OLMSTED COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-137 ST LOUIS COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-153 TODD COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-161 WASECA COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-163 WASHINGTON COUNTY MINNESOTA MN-165 WATONWAN COUNTY MINNESOTA MS-059 JACKSON COUNTY MISSISSIPPI MS-135 TALLAHATCHIE COUNTY MISSISSIPPI MS-145 UNION COUNTY MISSISSIPPI NC-045 CLEVELAND COUNTY NORTH CAROLINA NC-095 HYDE COUNTY NORTH CAROLINA NC-129 NEW HANOVER COUNTY NORTH CAROLINA NC-183 WAKE COUNTY NORTH CAROLINA ND-057 MERCER COUNTY NORTH DAKOTA NE-141 PLATTE COUNTY NEBRASKA NE-167 STANTON COUNTY NEBRASKA NJ-017 HUDSON COUNTY NEW JERSEY NJ-035 SOMERSET COUNTY NEW JERSEY NM-049 SANTA FE COUNTY NEW MEXICO NV-027 PERSHING COUNTY NEVADA NV-031 WASHOE COUNTY NEVADA NY-005 BOROUGH OF BRONX NEW YORK NY-023 CORTLAND COUNTY NEW YORK NY-025 DELAWARE COUNTY NEW YORK NY-029 ERIE COUNTY NEW YORK C-12 COUNTY AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** NY-035 FULTON COUNTY NEW YORK NY-055 MONROE COUNTY NEW YORK NY-057 MONTGOMERY COUNTY NEW YORK NY-059 NASSAU COUNTY NEW YORK NY-065 ONEIDA COUNTY NEW YORK NY-069 ONTARIO COUNTY NEW YORK NY-085 BOROUGH OF RICHMOND NEW YORK NY-091 SARATOGA COUNTY NEW YORK NY-103 SUFFOLK COUNTY NEW YORK NY-111 ULSTER COUNTY NEW YORK NY-119 WESTCHESTER COUNTY NEW YORK OH-013 BELMONT COUNTY OHIO OH-017 BUTLER COUNTY OHIO OH-023 CLARK COUNTY OHIO OH-031 COSHOCTON COUNTY OHIO OH-035 CUYAHOGA COUNTY OHIO OH-041 DELAWARE COUNTY OHIO OH-047 FAYETTE COUNTY OHIO OH-049 FRANKLIN COUNTY OHIO OH-051 FULTON COUNTY OHIO OH-055 GEAUGA COUNTY OHIO OH-057 GREENE COUNTY OHIO OH-095 LUCAS COUNTY OHIO OH-099 MAHONING COUNTY OHIO OH-109 MIAMI COUNTY OHIO OH-113 MONTGOMERY COUNTY OHIO OH-119 MUSKINGUM COUNTY OHIO OH-133 PORTAGE COUNTY OHIO OH-151 STARK COUNTY OHIO OH-153 SUMMIT COUNTY OHIO OK-003 ALFALFA COUNTY OKLAHOMA OK-133 SEMINOLE COUNTY OKLAHOMA OR-011 COOS COUNTY OREGON OR-015 CURRY COUNTY OREGON OR-017 DESCHUTES COUNTY OREGON OR-019 DOUGLAS COUNTY OREGON OR-029 JACKSON COUNTY OREGON OR-033 JOSEPHINE COUNTY OREGON OR-035 KLAMATH COUNTY OREGON OR-039 LANE COUNTY OREGON OR-043 LINN COUNTY OREGON OR-047 MARION COUNTY OREGON OR-049 MORROW COUNTY OREGON OR-051 MULTNOMAH COUNTY OREGON OR-053 POLK COUNTY OREGON OR-067 WASHINGTON COUNTY OREGON OR-071 YAMHILL COUNTY OREGON PA-003 ALLEGHENY COUNTY PENNSYLVANIA PA-029 CHESTER COUNTY PENNSYLVANIA PA-085 MERCER COUNTY PENNSYLVANIA C-13 COUNTY AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** PA-091 MONTGOMERY COUNTY PENNSYLVANIA PA-133 YORK COUNTY PENNSYLVANIA SC-003 AIKEN COUNTY SOUTH CAROLINA SC-013 BEAUFORT COUNTY SOUTH CAROLINA SC-083 SPARTANBURG COUNTY SOUTH CAROLINA TN-003 BEDFORD COUNTY TENNESSEE TN-069 HARDEMAN COUNTY TENNESSEE TX-039 BRAZORIA COUNTY TEXAS TX-049 BROWN COUNTY TEXAS TX-057 CALHOUN COUNTY TEXAS TX-141 EL PASO COUNTY TEXAS TX-165 GAINES COUNTY TEXAS TX-177 GONZALES COUNTY TEXAS TX-195 HANSFORD COUNTY TEXAS TX-281 LAMPASAS COUNTY TEXAS TX-321 MATAGORDA COUNTY TEXAS TX-355 NUECES COUNTY TEXAS UT-035 SALT LAKE COUNTY UTAH UT-049 UTAH COUNTY UTAH VA-009 AMHERST COUNTY VIRGINIA VA-019 BEDFORD COUNTY VIRGINIA VA-031 CAMPBELL COUNTY VIRGINIA VA-059 FAIRFAX COUNTY VIRGINIA VA-061 FAUQUIER COUNTY VIRGINIA VA-085 HANOVER COUNTY VIRGINIA VA-087 HENRICO COUNTY VIRGINIA VA-095 JAMES CITY COUNTY VIRGINIA VA-153 PRINCE WILLIAM COUNTY VIRGINIA VA-199 YORK COUNTY VIRGINIA WA-001 ADAMS COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-005 BENTON COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-009 CLALLAM COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-011 CLARK COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-015 COWLITZ COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-017 DOUGLAS COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-021 FRANKLIN COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-025 GRANT COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-029 ISLAND COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-033 KING COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-039 KLICKITAT COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-041 LEWIS COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-047 OKANOGAN COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-049 PACIFIC COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-053 PIERCE COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-057 SKAGIT COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-061 SNOHOMISH COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-065 STEVENS COUNTY WASHINGTON WA-077 YAKIMA COUNTY WASHINGTON WI-025 DANE COUNTY WISCONSIN WI-027 DODGE COUNTY WISCONSIN C-14 COUNTY AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** WI-031 DOUGLAS COUNTY WISCONSIN WI-035 DUNN COUNTY WISCONSIN WI-039 FOND DU LAC COUNTY WISCONSIN WI-101 RACINE COUNTY WISCONSIN WV-069 OHIO COUNTY WEST VIRGINIA WV-085 RITCHIE COUNTY WEST VIRGINIA MUNICIPAL AGENCIES (CITIES) SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* AK0130 CITY OF ANCHORAGE ALASKA AK1250 CITY OF KETCHIKAN ALASKA AL0930 CITY OF DOTHAN ALABAMA AL1510 CITY OF HUNTSVILLE ALABAMA AL2130 CITY OF MONTGOMERY ALABAMA AR3390 CITY OF ROGERS ARKANSAS AR3880 CITY OF TUPELO ARKANSAS AR4063 CITY OF WELDON ARKANSAS AZ0370 CITY OF PHOENIX ARIZONA AZ0420 CITY OF SCOTTSDALE ARIZONA AZ0490 CITY OF TEMPE ARIZONA CA0010 CITY OF ALAMEDA CALIFORNIA CA0340 CITY OF BERKELEY CALIFORNIA CA0470 CITY OF BUENA PARK CALIFORNIA CA0480 CITY OF BURBANK CALIFORNIA CA0537 CITY OF CAMPBELL CALIFORNIA CA0710 CITY OF CHULA VISTA CALIFORNIA CA0790 CITY OF COLTON CALIFORNIA CA1182 CITY OF ENCINITAS CALIFORNIA CA1220 CITY OF EUREKA CALIFORNIA CA1364 CITY OF FREMONT CALIFORNIA CA1370 CITY OF FRESNO CALIFORNIA CA1430 CITY OF GLENDALE CALIFORNIA CA1450 CITY OF GONZALES CALIFORNIA CA1520 CITY OF GUSTINE CALIFORNIA CA1540 CITY OF HANFORD CALIFORNIA CA1560 CITY OF HAYWARD CALIFORNIA CA1580 CITY OF HEMET CALIFORNIA CA1660 CITY OF HUNTINGTON BEACH CALIFORNIA CA1970 CITY OF LONG BEACH CALIFORNIA CA1980 CITY OF LOS ANGELES CALIFORNIA CA2090 CITY OF MARTINEZ CALIFORNIA CA2280 CITY OF MORGAN HILL CALIFORNIA CA2290 CITY OF MORROW BAY CALIFORNIA CA2330 CITY OF NAPA CALIFORNIA CA2390 CITY OF NEWMAN CALIFORNIA CA2460 CITY OF NOVATO CALIFORNIA CA2480 CITY OF OAKLAND CALIFORNIA C-15 MUNICIPAL AGENCIES (CITIES) - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* CA2550 CITY OF ONTARIO CALIFORNIA CA2650 CITY OF PALM SPRINGS CALIFORNIA CA2700 CITY OF PASADENA CALIFORNIA CA2780 CITY OF PISMO BEACH CALIFORNIA CA2840 CITY OF PLEASANTON CALIFORNIA CA2880 CITY OF PORTERVILLE CALIFORNIA CA2940 CITY OF RED BLUFF CALIFORNIA CA2970 CITY OF REDONDO BEACH CALIFORNIA CA2980 CITY OF REDWOOD CITY CALIFORNIA CA3070 CITY OF RIVERSIDE CALIFORNIA CA3210 CITY OF SAN BERNARDINO CALIFORNIA CA3260 CITY OF SAN DIEGO CALIFORNIA CA3280 CITY OF SAN FERNANDO CALIFORNIA CA3290 CITY OF SAN FRANCISCO CALIFORNIA CA3340 CITY OF SAN JOSE CALIFORNIA CA3370 CITY OF SAN LUIS OBISPO CALIFORNIA CA3380 CITY OF SAN MARINO CALIFORNIA CA3390 CITY OF SAN MATEO CALIFORNIA CA3410 CITY OF SAN RAFAEL CALIFORNIA CA3420 CITY OF SANTA ANA CALIFORNIA CA3440 CITY OF SANTA CLARA CALIFORNIA CA3460 CITY OF SANTA MARIA CALIFORNIA CA3480 CITY OF SANTA PAULA CALIFORNIA CA3490 CITY OF SANTA ROSA CALIFORNIA CA3590 CITY OF SELMA CALIFORNIA CA3660 CITY OF SONOMA CALIFORNIA CA3800 CITY OF SUSANVILLE CALIFORNIA CA3920 CITY OF TULARE CALIFORNIA CA4020 CITY OF VALLEJO CALIFORNIA CA4027 CITY OF VENTURA CALIFORNIA CA4070 CITY OF WALNUT CREEK CALIFORNIA CA4100 CITY OF WATSONVILLE CALIFORNIA CO0600 CITY AND COUNTY OF DENVER CO2150 CITY OF ROCKY FORD COLORADO CT0080 CITY OF BRIDGEPORT CONNECTICUT CT0237 CITY OF FARMINGTON CONNECTICUT CT0280 CITY OF HARTFORD CONNECTICUT CT0360 CITY OF MADISON CONNECTICUT CT0370 CITY OF MERIDEN CONNECTICUT CT0380 CITY OF MIDDLETOWN CONNECTICUT CT0430 CITY OF NEW HAVEN CONNECTICUT CT0810 CITY OF WATERBURY CONNECTICUT DC001 CITY OF WASHINGTON DC FL0290 CITY OF BOCA RATON FLORIDA FL0570 CITY OF CLEARWATER FLORIDA FL0780 CITY OF DAYTONA BEACH FLORIDA FL1420 CITY OF HOLLYWOOD FLORIDA FL1510 CITY OF JACKSONVILLE FLORIDA FL1590 CITY OF KISSIMMEE FLORIDA FL1690 CITY OF LAKELAND FLORIDA C-16 MUNICIPAL AGENCIES (CITIES) - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* FL2010 CITY OF MIAMI FLORIDA FL2360 CITY OF ORLANDO FLORIDA FL2730 CITY OF ST PETERSBURG FLORIDA FL2940 CITY OF TALLAHASSEE FLORIDA GA0280 CITY OF ATLANTA GEORGIA GA0760 CITY OF BRUNSWICK GEORGIA GA1780 CITY OF DUBLIN GEORGIA GA3440 CITY OF MARIETTA GEORGIA GA4910 CITY OF SAVANNAH GEORGIA HI2400 CITY OF HONOLULU HAWAII IA2520 CITY OF DYSART IOWA IA2530 CITY OF EAGLE GROVE IOWA IA5240 CITY OF MAQUOKETA IOWA IA7490 CITY OF SAC CITY IOWA IA8880 CITY OF WEBSTER CITY IOWA ID0790 CITY OF IDAHO FALLS IDAHO ID1830 CITY OF TWIN FALLS IDAHO IL0512 CITY OF BARRINGTON HILLS ILLINOIS IL0840 CITY OF BLOOMINGTON ILLINOIS IL1550 CITY OF CHAMPAIGN ILLINOIS IL1670 CITY OF CHICAGO ILLINOIS IL2380 CITY OF DIXON ILLINOIS IL3200 CITY OF FREEBURG ILLINOIS IL3910 CITY OF HIGHLAND PARK ILLINOIS IL4710 CITY OF LAWRENCEVILLE ILLINOIS IL4910 CITY OF LOCKPORT ILLINOIS IL5360 CITY OF MASON CITY ILLINOIS IL6850 CITY OF PEORIA ILLINOIS IL7460 CITY OF ROCKFORD ILLINOIS IL7640 CITY OF ST CHARLES ILLINOIS IL9210 CITY OF WESTERN SPRINGS ILLINOIS IL9450 CITY OF WINNEBAGO ILLINOIS IN1830 CITY OF GOSHEN INDIANA IN3480 CITY OF NEW HAVEN INDIANA KS5400 CITY OF TOPEKA KANSAS KY2090 CITY OF LOUISVILLE KENTUCKY LA0040 CITY OF ALEXANDRIA LOUISIANA LA1150 CITY OF JONESBORO LOUISIANA LA1690 CITY OF NEW ORLEANS LOUISIANA LA2410 CITY OF WEST MONROE LOUISIANA MA0035 CITY OF ANDOVER MASSACHUSETTS MA0120 CITY OF BOSTON MASSACHUSETTS MA0170 CITY OF CAMBRIDGE MASSACHUSETTS MA0660 CITY OF MALDEN MASSACHUSETTS MA1520 CITY OF WORCESTER MASSACHUSETTS MD0050 CITY OF BALTIMORE MARYLAND MD0580 CITY OF FREDERICK MARYLAND MD0730 CITY OF HAGERSTOWN MARYLAND MD1380 CITY OF SALISBURY ME0250 CITY OF BANGOR MAINE C-17 MUNICIPAL AGENCIES (CITIES) - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* ME6400 CITY OF PORTLAND MAINE MI0310 CITY OF BATTLE CREEK MICHIGAN MI0490 CITY OF BIRMINGHAM MICHIGAN MI0700 CITY OF CADILLAC MICHIGAN MI0890 CITY OF CHARLOTTE MICHIGAN MI1150 CITY OF CROSWELL MICHIGAN MI1260 CITY OF DETROIT MICHIGAN MI1730 CITY OF FLINT MICHIGAN MI1800 CITY OF FRANKFORT MICHIGAN MI2010 CITY OF GRAND RAPIDS MICHIGAN MI2520 CITY OF KALAMAZOO MICHIGAN MI2990 CITY OF MANTON MICHIGAN MI3320 CITY OF MONROE MICHIGAN MI3740 CITY OF OTSEGO MICHIGAN MI4020 CITY OF PONTIAC MICHIGAN MI4760 CITY OF STURGIS MICHIGAN MI5310 CITY OF WYANDOTTE MICHIGAN MN1150 CITY OF CHAMPLIN MINNESOTA MN1210 CITY OF CHISHOLM MINNESOTA MN2860 CITY OF GRANITE FALLS MINNESOTA MN3460 CITY OF HUTCHINSON MINNESOTA MN4760 CITY OF MINNEAPOLIS MINNESOTA MN5660 CITY OF PINE CITY MINNESOTA MO4100 CITY OF JOPLIN MISSOURI MO7070 CITY OF ST JOSEPH MISSOURI MO7080 CITY OF ST LOUIS MISSOURI NC0870 CITY OF CHARLOTTE NORTH CAROLINA NC1460 CITY OF ELIZABETH CITY NORTH CAROLINA NC1940 CITY OF GREENSBORO NORTH CAROLINA NC2450 CITY OF KINSTON NORTH CAROLINA NC3100 CITY OF MONROE NORTH CAROLINA NC4070 CITY OF SALISBURY NORTH CAROLINA NH0020 CITY OF BERLIN NEW HAMPSHIRE NH0070 CITY OF CONCORD NEW HAMPSHIRE NH0310 CITY OF MANCHESTER NEW HAMPSHIRE NH0430 CITY OF PORTSMOUTH NEW HAMPSHIRE NJ0520 CITY OF CAMDEN NEW JERSEY NJ1775 CITY OF LYNDHURST NEW JERSEY NJ2130 CITY OF NEWARK NEW JERSEY NJ2498 CITY OF PARSIPPANY NEW JERSEY NJ2510 CITY OF PATERSON NEW JERSEY NJ2570 CITY OF PERTH AMBOY NEW JERSEY NJ3380 CITY OF TRENTON NEW JERSEY NJ3705 CITY OF WOODBRIDGE NEW JERSEY NM0030 CITY OF ALBUQUERQUE NEW MEXICO NM0170 CITY OF CLAYTON NEW MEXICO NM0470 CITY OF LAS CRUCES NEW MEXICO NM0710 CITY OF SANTA FE NEW MEXICO NV0139 CITY OF MOUNTAIN CITY NEVADA NV0170 CITY OF RENO NEVADA C-18 MUNICIPAL AGENCIES (CITIES) - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* NY0750 CITY OF BUFFALO NEW YORK NY3070 CITY OF LACKAWANNA NEW YORK NY3340 CITY OF LOCKPORT NEW YORK NY3940 CITY OF MOUNT VERNON NEW YORK NY4120 CITY OF NEW ROCHELLE NEW YORK NY4170 CITY OF NEW YORK NEW YORK NY4210 CITY OF NIAGARA FALLS NEW YORK NY5230 CITY OF ROCHESTER NEW YORK NY5550 CITY OF SCHENECTADY NEW YORK NY6450 CITY OF WATERTOWN NEW YORK NY6820 CITY OF YONKERS NEW YORK OH0070 CITY OF AKRON OHIO OH1320 CITY OF CANTON OHIO OH1610 CITY OF CINCINNATI OHIO OH1680 CITY OF CLEVELAND OHIO OH1800 CITY OF COLUMBUS OHIO OH2090 CITY OF DAYTON OHIO OH3895 CITY OF KETTERING OHIO OH4730 CITY OF MARIETTA OHIO OH4820 CITY OF MASSILLON OHIO OH8070 CITY OF TIFFIN OHIO OH8120 CITY OF TOLEDO OHIO OR1225 CITY OF LINCOLN CITY OREGON OR1260 CITY OF MCMINNVILLE OREGON OR1310 CITY OF MEDFORD OREGON OR1500 CITY OF NEWPORT OREGON OR1510 CITY OF NORTH BEND OREGON OR1650 CITY OF PORTLAND OREGON OR1810 CITY OF SALEM OREGON PA0110 CITY OF ALLENTOWN PENNSYLVANIA PA1230 CITY OF CHAMBERSBURG PENNSYLVANIA PA1296 CITY OF CHESTER TOWNSHIP PENNSYLVANIA PA1335 CITY OF CLAIRTON PENNSYLVANIA PA2270 CITY OF EASTON PENNSYLVANIA PA4010 CITY OF JOHNSTOWN PENNSYLVANIA PA6540 CITY OF PHILADELPHIA PENNSYLVANIA PA6600 CITY OF PITTSBURGH PENNSYLVANIA PA8880 CITY OF WASHINGTON PENNSYLVANIA PA8920 CITY OF WAYNESBORO PENNSYLVANIA SC0020 CITY OF AIKEN SOUTH CAROLINA SC0370 CITY OF CAYCE SOUTH CAROLINA SD2730 CITY OF VERMILLION SOUTH DAKOTA SD3070 CITY OF YANKTON SOUTH DAKOTA TX0530 CITY OF BELLAIRE TEXAS TX1550 CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI TEXAS TX1730 CITY OF DALLAS TEXAS TX2190 CITY OF EL PASO TEXAS TX2450 CITY OF FORT WORTH TEXAS TX3280 CITY OF HOUSTON TEXAS TX5430 CITY OF PORT ARTHUR TEXAS C-19 MUNICIPAL AGENCIES (CITIES) - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* TX6090 CITY OF SAN ANTONIO TEXAS UT1560 CITY OF PROVO UTAH VA0130 CITY OF BEDFORD VIRGINIA VA0690 CITY OF CULPEPER VIRGINIA VA0720 CITY OF DANVILLE VIRGINIA VA1180 CITY OF HAMPTON VIRGINIA VA1490 CITY OF LYNCHBURG VIRGINIA VA1720 CITY OF NEWPORT NEWS VIRGINIA VA1760 CITY OF NORFOLK VIRGINIA VA2060 CITY OF RICHMOND VIRGINIA VA2330 CITY OF STAUNTON VIRGINIA VA2540 CITY OF VIRGINIA BEACH VIRGINIA VA2570 CITY OF WARRENTON VIRGINIA WA0109 CITY OF BELLEVUE WASHINGTON WA0180 CITY OF BREMERTON WASHINGTON WA1190 CITY OF LONGVIEW WASHINGTON WA1550 CITY OF OAK HARBOR WASHINGTON WA1820 CITY OF REDMOND WASHINGTON WA1850 CITY OF RICHLAND WASHINGTON WA1960 CITY OF SEATTLE WASHINGTON WA2110 CITY OF SPOKANE WASHINGTON WA2230 CITY OF TAKOMA WASHINGTON WI1470 CITY OF EAU CLAIRE WISCONSIN WI1760 CITY OF FORT ATKINSON WISCONSIN WI2320 CITY OF JANESVILLE WISCONSIN WI3100 CITY OF MILWAUKEE WISCONSIN WI3810 CITY OF PLYMOUTH WISCONSIN WI3970 CITY OF RACINE WICONSIN WI4060 CITY OF RHINELANDER WISCONSIN WI4330 CITY OF SHEBOYGAN WISCONSIN WI4730 CITY OF SUPERIOR WISCONSIN WV0260 CITY OF BLUEFIELD WEST VIRGINIA INTER-CITY AND INTER-COUNTY AGENCIES SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* ACSWM ADDISON COUNTY SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT DEPARTMENT ACWD ALAMEDA COUNTY WATER DISTRICT AEWD ARVIN-EDISON WATER DISTRICT BART BAY AREA RAPID TRANSIT BCE BROWARD COUNTY ENGINEERS BRICKT BRICK TOWNSHIP CCPUD CHELAN COUNTY PUBLIC UTILITIES DISTRICT CID CENTERVILLE IRRIGATION DISTRICT CRGS CLEVELAND REGIONAL GEODETIC SURVEY DCE DELAWARE COUNTY ENGINEER DCENG DOUGLAS COUNTY ENGINEER DCPW DOUGLAS COUNTY PUBLIC WORKS C-20 INTER-CITY AND INTER-COUNTY AGENCIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** ******************************************************** ******* DEGS DELAWARE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY DMWW DENVER MUNICIPAL WATER WORKS EBDA EAST BAY SEWAGE DISCHARGE AUTHORITY EBMUD EAST BAY MUNICIPAL UTILITIES DISTRICT FCA FAIRFIELD COUNTY AUDITOR GCENG GREENE COUNTY ENGINEER GCPUD GRANT COUNTY PUBLIC UTILITIES DISTRICT HAMTWP HAMILTON TOWNSHIP HCFC HARRIS COUNTY TEXAS FLOOD CONTROL DISTRICT HHWS HETCH HETCHY WATER SUPPLY DISTRICT IAA INDIANAPOLIS AIRPORT AUTHORITY IID IMPERIAL IRRIGATION DISTRICT IMAGIS INDIANAPOLIS MAPPING AND GEOGRAPHIC INFRA SYSTEM JCAD JEFFERSON COUNTY APPRAISAL DISTRICT JCMD JEFFERSON COUNTY MAPPING DEPARTMENT LACFCD LOS ANGELES FLOOD CONTROL DISTRICT LAHRBR LOS ANGELES HARBOR DEPARTMENT LAWPC LOS ANGELES WATER AND POWER COMMISSION LFUCG LEXINGTON FAYETTE URBAN COUNTY GOVERNMENT LVDPW LAS VEGAS DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS MARTA METROPOLITAN ATLANTA RAPID TRANSIT AUTHORITY MID MODESTO IRRIGATION DISTRICT MRGCD MIDDLE RIO GRANDE CONSERVATION DISTRICT MRMSC MILWAUKEE-RACINE METROPOLITAN SEWAGE COMM MWAA METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORT AUTHORITY MWDSC METROPOLITAN WATER DISTRICT OF SO CALIFORNIA NNWW NEWPORT NEWS WATER WORKS NOS+WB NEW ORLEANS SEWERAGE AND WATER BOARD NYPA NEW YORK PORT AUTHORITY OID OAKDALE IRRIGATION DISTRICT OROW OHIO RIVER ORDINANCE WORKS PIMACO PIMA CO DEPT OF TRANSP AND FLOOD CONTROL DIST PTHT PARSIPPANY TROY HILLS TOWNSHIP RCFC RIVERSIDE COUNTY FLOOD CONTROL RIRD RYER ISLAND RECLAMATION DISTRICT SCCS SANTA CLARA COUNTY SURVEYOR SDWD SAN DIEGO WATER DISTRICT SEWRPC SE WISCONSIN REGIONAL PLANNING COMMISSION SFLWMD SOUTH FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT SFWD SAN FRANCISCO WATER DEPARTMENT SJID SAN JOAQUIN IRRIGATION DISTRICT SRPE SAVANNAH RIVER PLANT ENGINEER SRVWUA SALT RIVER VALLEY WATER USERS ASSOCIATION SVIP SACRAMENTO VALLEY IRRIGATION PROJECT SWFWMD SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT TID TURLOCK IRRIGATION DISTRICT TLAKE TULARE LAKE IRRIGATION DISTRICT TWWP THE WASHINGTON WATER POWER COMPANY WACRM WASHINGTON COUNTY REFERENCE MARK WMATA WASHINGTON METROPOLITAN AREA TRANSIT AUTH WSSC WASHINGTON SUBURBAN SANITARY COMMISSION C-21 RAILROADS SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** ACYRR AKRON CANTON AND YOUNGSTOWN RAILROAD AGSRR ALABAMA GREAT SOUTHERN RAILROAD ATNRR ALABAMA TENNESSEE AND NORTHERN RAILROAD ATSFRR ATCHISON TOPEKA AND SANTA FE RAILROAD B+ARR BOSTON AND ALBANY RAILROAD BARR BANGOR AND AROOSTOOK RAILROAD BLERR BESSEMER AND LAKE ERIE RAILROAD BMRR BOSTON AND MAINE RAILROAD BNRR BURLINGTON NORTHERN RAILROAD BORR BALTIMORE AND OHIO RAILROAD BRPRR BUFFALO ROCHESTER PITTSBURG RAILROAD CBQRR CHICAGO BURLINGTON AND QUINCY RAILROAD CHWRR CHESAPEAKE AND WESTERN RAILROAD CIMRR CHICAGO AND ILLINOIS MIDLAND RAILROAD CLGRR COLUMBUS AND GREENVILLE RAILROAD CMPPRR CHICAGO MILWAUKEE ST PAUL AND PACIFIC RR CNJRR CENTRAL OF NEW JERSEY RAILROAD CNWRR CHICAGO AND NORTH WESTERN RAILROAD CORR CHESAPEAKE AND OHIO RAILROAD CPRR CANADIAN PACIFIC RAILROAD CRNRR CAROLINA AND NORTHWESTERN RAILROAD CVRR CENTRAL VERMONT RAILROAD DHRR DELAWARE AND HUDSON RAILROAD DLWRR DELAWARE LACKAWANNA AND WESTERN RAILROAD DMIRRR DULUTH MISSABE AND IRON RANGE RAILROAD DMRR DETROIT AND MACKINAW RAILROAD DRGWRR DENVER AND RIO GRANDE WESTERN RAILROAD DTSRR DETROIT AND TOLEDO SHORE LINE RAILROAD DWPRR DULUTH-WINNIPEG AND PACIFIC RAILROAD ELRR ERIE LACKAWANNA RAILROAD ERIERR ERIE RAILROAD FECRR FLORIDA EAST COAST RAILROAD GCSFRC GULF COLORADO AND SANTE FE RAILWAY COMPANY GMORR GULF MOBILE AND OHIO RAILROAD GNRR GREAT NORTHERN RAILROAD GSFRR GEORGIA SOUTHERN AND FLORIDA RAILWAY GTWRR GRAND TRUNK WESTERN RAILROAD GWRR GREAT WESTERN RAILROAD HRR HUDSON RAILROAD ICRR ILLINOIS CENTRAL RAILROAD INTRR INTERSTATE RAILROAD KCSRR KANSAS CITY SOUTHERN RAILROAD LARR LOUISIANA AND ARKANSAS RAILROAD LIRR LONG ISLAND RAILROAD LNRR LOUISVILLE AND NASHVILLE RAILROAD LVRR LEHIGH VALLEY RAILROAD MCRR MICHIGAN CENTRAL RAILROAD MKTRR MISSOURI KANSAS TEXAS RAILROAD MPRR MISSOURI PACIFIC RAILROAD NCRR NASHVILLE CHATTANOOGA AND ST LOUIS RAILROAD NPRR NORTHERN PACIFIC RAILROAD C-22 RAILROADS - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** NSRR NORFOLK SOUTHERN RAILROAD NWPRR NORTHWESTERN PACIFIC RAILROAD NWRR NORFOLK AND WESTERN RAILROAD NYCRR NEW YORK CENTRAL RAILROAD NYNH+H NEW YORK NEW HAVEN AND HARTFORD RAILROAD NYSLRR NEW YORK CHICAGO AND ST LOUIS RAILROAD NYSWRR NEW YORK SUSQUEHANNA AND WESTERN RAILROAD PCRR PENN CENTRAL RAILROAD PLERR PITTSBURGH AND LAKE ERIE RAILROAD PMRR PERE MARQUETTE RAILROAD PRR PENNSYLVANIA RAILROAD PSFRR PANHANDLE AND SANTA FE RAILWAY COMPANY RDGRR READING RAILROAD RIRR CHICAGO ROCK ISLAND AND PACIFIC RAILROAD RRR RUTLAND RAILROAD SCLRR SEABOARD COAST LINE RAILROAD SDARR SAN DIEGO AND ARIZONA EASTERN RAILWAY COMPANY SLSFRR ST LOUIS SAN FRANCISCO RAILROAD SLSWRR ST LOUIS SOUTHWESTERN RAILROAD SNRR SACRAMENTO NORTHERN RAILROAD SOORR SOO LINE RAILROAD SOURR SOUTHERN RAILROAD SPRR SOUTHERN PACIFIC RAILROAD TMRR TEXAS MEXICAN RAILROAD TNRR TEXAS AND NORTHERN RAILROAD TPRR TEXAS AND PACIFIC RAILWAY TPWRR TOLEDO PEORIA AND WESTERN RAILROAD UPRR UNION PACIFIC RAILROAD VARR VIRGINIA RAILWAY VTRR VERMONT RAILROAD WARR WESTERN OF ALABAMA RAILROAD WLERR WHEELING AND LAKE ERIE RAILROAD WMRR WESTERN MARYLAND RAILROAD WPRR WESTERN PACIFIC RAILROAD Y+MVRR YAZOO AND MISSISSIPPI VALLEY RAILROAD YVRR YOSEMITE VALLEY RAILROAD UTILITY AND NATURAL RESOURCE COMPANIES SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** AEP AMERICAN ELECTRIC POWER AGASEL ASSOCIATED GAS AND ELECTRIC COMPANY ALPCO ALABAMA POWER COMPANY AMOCO AMOCO OIL COMPANY AOCO ASSOCIATED OIL COMPANY APC APPALACHIAN POWER COMPANY ARFUEL AR FUEL OIL COMPANY ARLAGC AR-LA GAS COMPANY ASC ALYSEKA SERVICE COMPANY C-23 UTILITY AND NATURAL RESOURCE COMPANIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** ATRECO ATLANTIC REFINING COMPANY BOCO BELRIDGE OIL COMPANY CHOCO CHEVRON OIL COMPANY CITGO CITIES SERVICE COMPANY CONED CONSOLIDATED EDISON POWER COMPANY CONOCO CONTINENTAL OIL COMPANY CONSPC CONSUMER POWER COMPANY OF MICHIGAN CREOLE CREOLE PETROLEUM COMPANY CTP+L CONNECTICUT POWER AND LIGHT COMPANY CVPS CENTRAL VERMONT PUBLIC SERVICE CORPORATION DECO DETROIT EDISON COMPANY DUKE DUKE POWER COMPANY FLPCO FLORIDA POWER COMPANY GAPC GEORGIA POWER COMPANY GPCC GENERAL PETROLEUM CORPORATION OF CALIFORNIA GULF GULF REFINING COMPANY HLPCO HOUSTON LIGHTING AND POWER COMPANY HOCO HONOLULU OIL COMPANY HUMBLE HUMBLE OIL AND REFINING COMPANY IMECO INDIANA-MICHIGAN ELECTRIC COMPANY LONESR LONE STAR GAS COMPANY LPCO LAKEHEAD PIPELINE COMPANY MINPCO MICHIGAN NORTHERN POWER COMPANY MOBIL MOBIL OIL CORPORATION MSP+L MISSISSIPPI POWER AND LIGHT COMPANY MWPLC MICHIGAN-WISCONSIN PIPELINE COMPANY NGPCA NATURAL GAS PIPELINE COMPANY OF AMERICA NJP+L NEW JERSEY POWER AND LIGHT COMPANY OHOCO OHIO OIL COMPANY OHPCO OHIO POWER COMPANY PEPCO POTOMAC EDISON POWER COMPANY PG+E PACIFIC GAS AND ELECTRIC COMPANY PHELCO PHILADELPHIA ELECTRIC COMPANY PHILIP PHILLIPS PETROLEUM COMPANY PP+L PACIFIC POWER AND LIGHT COMPANY PSCOCO PUBLIC SERVICE COMPANY OF COLORADO PSEG PUBLIC SERVICE ELECTRIC AND GAS CO OF NEW JERSEY PWPCO PENNSYLVANIA WATER AND POWER COMPANY ROCO RICHFIELD OIL COMPANY RPCO REPUBLIC PRODUCTION COMPANY SCE+G SOUTH CAROLINA ELECTRIC AND GAS COMPANY SCECO SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA EDISON COMPANY SCPA SOUTH CAROLINA POWER AUTHORITY SDG+E SAN DIEGO GAS AND ELECTRIC COMPANY SHELL SHELL OIL COMPANY SOCO STANDARD OIL COMPANY SOGCO SIGNAL OIL AND GAS COMPANY SOHIO SOHIO PETROLEUM COMPANY STOGC STANOLIND OIL AND GAS COMPANY SUNOCO SUN OIL COMPANY SUPOCO SUPERIOR OIL COMPANY C-24 UTILITY AND NATURAL RESOURCE COMPANIES - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** TENNEC TENNESSEE GAS AND PIPELINE COMPANY TEXACO TEXACO INCORPORATED TWOCO TIDEWATER OIL COMPANY UNOLA UNION TEXAS PETROLEUM UOCO UNION OIL COMPANY VEPCO VIRGINIA ELECTRIC POWER COMPANY VOCO VALVOLINE OIL COMPANY SURVEYING, ENGINEERING, AND CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** AAS ATLANTIC AERIAL SURVEYS AASCO ATLANTIS AERIAL SURVEY COMPANY ABRAMS ABRAMS AERIAL SURVEYS ACFPS ACF PRECISION SURVEYS INCORPORATED ADRGS ADR GEODETIC SERVICES AEROS AERO SERVICE CORPORATION AHI ATWELL HICKS INC AIRSUR AIR SURVEY CORPORATION AISS A I SILANDER AND SON ALSTER ALSTER AND ASSOCIATES ENGINEERS AME AERO-METRIC ENGINEERING INC AMGEOD AMERICAN GEODETIC SURVEY ARCO ATLANTIC RICHFIELD COMPANY ASCPC AMERICAN SURVEYING CONSULTANTS PC B+OINC BARBER AND OYLER, INCORPORATED BAKER M BAKER JR INC BANNER BANNERMAN SURVEYORS INCORPORATED BELL BELL SURVEYING INCORPORATED BENDIX BENDIX CORPORATION BESTOR BESTOR ENGINEERS INC BFEC BENDIX FIELD ENGINEERING CORPORATION BFM BFM CORPORATION BGAS BRUCE AND GUNN AERIAL SURVEYS BMMS BOUTELLE MACFARLANE MEYER AND SELEE BOHUS BOHANNAN-HUSTON INCORPORATED BRADY BRADY LAND SURVEYING INC BRWE BROCK AND WEYMOUTH ENGINEERS BUN-Y BURK + ASSOCIATES INC AND N-Y ASSOCIATES INC BSC BSC GROUP-SURVEYING AND MAPPING INC BWDCO BERKELEY WATERFRONT DEVELOPMENT COMPANY CANDA CERVANTES AND ASSOCIATES CAS CARIBEAN AERIAL SURVEYS CASSON CASSON ENGINEERING COMPANY CEJA C E JOHNSON AND ASSOCIATES INC CE+S CALDWELL ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING CFM C F MERRIAM SURVEYOR CHAMBA CHAMBLIN AND ASSOCIATES CHANCE JE CHANCE AND ASSOCIATES C-25 SURVEYING, ENGINEERING, AND CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** CHIAS CHICAGO AERIAL SURVEY CHIPPR CHIPPERFIELD NAVIGATION SERVICES CL CLIFFORD LEISURE CIVIL ENGINEER CMCO CHARLES MAIN COMPANY COLGOV COLBURN AND GOVE CONSULTING ENGINEERS CREDAN CREEGAN AND D ANGELO CSMCI C S MARINE CONSTRUCTORS INCORPORATED CSPC COLUMBUS SOUTHERN POWER COMPANY CTMAIN CT MAIN INCORPORATED CTMALE C T MALE ASSOCIATES DAGSUR DAGGETT SURVEYING INCORPORATED DARA D A RATEKIN AND ASSOCIATES DEC DAHLING ENGINEERING COMPANY DECKER R L DECKER DELTA DELTA ENGINEERS INC DENI DENI ASSOCIATES INCORPORATED DEWDAV DEWBERRY DAVIS DUNLAP DUNLAP ASSOCIATES EDA EARL DUDLEY ASSOCIATES INCORPORATED EESCC E E STULLER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY EGENG EVANS-GRAVES ENGINEERS INC EGPSSC EAGLE GPS SURVEYING CORPORATION ERLAND ERLANDSEN AND ASSOCIATES ESP ENGINEERING SURVEYING AND PLANNING INC EQUINO EQUINOX INC SURVEYING AND MAPPING EVANS DAVID EVANS AND ASSOCIATES INCORPORATED EWB E W BRAASCH CONSULTING ENGINEER FAMC FALCON AIR MAPS COMPANY FAS FAIRCHILD AERIAL SURVEYS F+HINC FLORENCE + HUTCHESON INCORPORATED FORBAC FORD BACON AND DAVIS INCORPORATED FORSGN FORSGREN AND ASSOCIATES FWDRR FORT WORTH AND DENVER CITY RAILWAY GAI GERKINWOOD AND ASSOCIATES INCORPORATED GBLI GORDON B LEWIS INC GCS GEODETIC CONSULTING SERVICES GENES GENESIS SURVEYING INCORPORATED (NOW GENGRP) GENGRP GENESIS GROUP INCORPORATED SE GEOBAS GEOBASE CONTROL INCORPORATED GEOHYD GEO-HYDRO INCORPORATED GEOMET GEOMETRICS GPS INCORPORATED GEONEX GEONEX ITECH INCORPORATED GEOSER GEODETIC SERVICES INCORPORATED GHA G HENKENHOFF AND ASSOCIATES GREENW RONALD GREENWELL AND ASSOCIATES GREOMA GREENHORNE-OMARA GRWAS GRW AERIAL SURVEY GSIGPS GEOPHYSICAL SERVICE INCORPORATED GWMSI GEORGE W MUERY AND SON INCORPORATED HALSEY W H HALSEY CIVIL ENGINEERS INC HARMS JOHN E HARMS JR AND ASSOCIATES INCORPORATED C-26 SURVEYING, ENGINEERING, AND CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** HARTMN HARTMANN ASSOCIATES INCORPORATED HDA HORTON DENNIS ASSOCIATES HEIDT HEIDT AND ASSOCIATES INCORPORATED HHAA HELMER HUGHS AND ASSOCIATES HLS HUNTER LAND SURVEYING COMPANY HOBBS HOBBS AND ASSOCIATES HOLDEN HOLDEN GPS HTB HEALY TIBBITS BUILDERS HYCAS HYCON AERIAL SURVEY ISBELL ISBELL CONSTRUCTION COMPANY JAHA JAMES H HARRIS AND ASSOCIATES JBB J B BLYDENBURGH SURVEYOR JKPLS JEFF KERN PROFESSIONAL LAND SURVEYOR JOHNSN JOHNSON ENGINEERING INCORPORATED KAISER KAISER INDUSTRIES CORPORATION KEISCH KEITH AND SCHNARS - LAKELAND KONSKI KONSKI ENGINEERS LAFAVE A LAFAVE LAND SURVEYOR LDA LEWIS DICKERSON AND ASSOCIATES CONS ENG LEAS LIMBAUGH ENGINEERING AND AERIAL SURVEY INC LEGER LEGER SURVEYS INC LEVITT ITT LEVITT CORPORATION LIETZ THE LIETZ COMPANY LINDSY F M LINDSEY AND ASSOCIATES LOWE LOWE ENGINEERS MADHOP MADDOX AND HOPKINS SURVEYORS MAI MEYER AND ASSOCIATES INCORPORATED MARCHE MARCHESE AND SONS MARLOW HARRY W MARLOW INCORPORATED MASDIX MASON AND DIXON MATOTA WILLIAM MATOTAN AND ASSOCIATES MCCENG MCCLELLAND ENGINEERS MCCRON J R MCCRONE JR INC MCTUER MCCARTER AND TULLER INCORPORATED MCGRIF P C MCGRIFF COMPANY MELGEE MELVIN GEE AND ASSOCIATES MERRIC MERRICK AND COMPANY METRIC METRIC SURVEYS MGA MOORE GARDNER AND ASSOCIATES MGSINC MINISTER AND GLAESER SURVEYING INC MHAS MARK HURD AERIAL SURVEYS MJH MITCHELL JONES AND HARDEN INC MKWS M K WELCH SURVEYS MLI MILLER AND LUX INC MME MYERS-MACOMBER ENGINEERS MPS MACNAMEE PORTER AND SEELEY MSAM MOUNTAIN SURVEYING AND MAPPING INCORPORATED MSE MSE CORPORATION MSI MEASUREMENT SCIENCE INCORPORATED MSM MEURER SERAFINI AND MEURER INCORPORATED (NOW MSAM) NAVSER NAVIGATION SERVICES INCORPORATED C-27 SURVEYING, ENGINEERING, AND CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** NEDIVS NORTHEAST DIVERSIFIED SERVICES INCORPORATED OCEGPS OCEONICS INCORPORATED OMAN OMAN CONSTRUCTION COMPANY PAS PARK AERIAL SURVEYS INC PGEG PETTY GEOPHYSICAL AND ENGINEERING COMPANY PHELPS B E PHELPS INC PMC PERRY C MCGRIFF COMPANY PMGS PHOTOGRAMMETRIC GEODETIC SURVEY PORTER NORMAN PORTER ASSOCIATES POSER POSITIONING SERVICES PROENG PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS INCORPORATED R+MCON R + M CONSULTANTS INCORPORATED RAYONI ITT RAYONIER INCORPORATED RDA RINKER DETWILER AND ASSOCIATES RSA ROUSE-SIRINE ASSOCIATES SBAS SIDNEY B BOWNE AND SON SBI SHERWOOD BROTHERS INCORPORATED SCAN SCANLON AND ASSOCIATES SCSC SO CAROLINA SANTEE COOPER PS AUTHORITY SEC SCHNEIDER ENGINEERING CORPORATION SECO SOUTHERN ENGINEERING COMPANY SELLS CHAS H SELLS INC CONSULTING ENGINEERS SPAN SPAN INTERNATIONAL INCORPORATED SPEAR JAY SPEARMAN CONSULTING ENGINEERS STEINA STEINMAN AND ASSOCIATES STUNTZ STUNTZNER ENGINEERING AND FORESTRY SUNRIS SUNRISE GEODETIC SURCON SURVCON INCORPORATED SURSAT SURVSAT SURTEC SUR-TECH INC SWECO STONE WEBSTER ENGINEERING CORPORATION TCIRR TENNESSEE COAL IRON AND RAILROAD COMPANY TE THOMPSON ENGINEERING THOMAS THOMAS ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING COMPANY TNH TRYCK NYMAN AND HAYES TOTTEN CARL TOTTEN ASSOCIATES TOWILL TOWILL INC TRIBBL TRIBBLE AND RICHARDSON TSI TOBIN SURVEYS INCORPORATED TURNER A E TURNER ARCHITECT TWT TAYLOR WISEMAN AND TAYLOR CONSULTING ENGINEERS URS URS COMPANY USKCE UNWIN-SCHEBAN-KORYNTA CONS ENG USSES US SOIL EROSION SERVICE VJV V J VANLINT CONSULTING ENGINEER VOGI VOGI IVERS AND ASSOCIATES WAA WALKER AND ASSOCIATES INC WALASS WALLACE AND ASSOCIATES WARD E J WARD WAWHI WALKER AND WHITEFORD INC WBCC WARREN BROTHERS CONSTRUCTION COMPANY C-28 SURVEYING, ENGINEERING, AND CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** WESGEO WESTERN GEOPHYSICAL COMPANY OF AMERICA WEVACO WEST-VACO CORPORATION WEYCO WEYERHAEUSER COMPANY WFTA W F TURNEY AND ASSOCIATES WHGAI WILLIAM H GORDON ASSOCIATES INCORPORATED WHPCO W H PORTER AND COMPANY INCORPORATED WIMPOL WIMPOL INCORPORATED WOOLPT WOOLPERT CONSULTANTS WRA WHIGMAN AND REQUARDT ASSOCIATES WSA WILLIAMS AND STACKHOUSE ASSOCIATES YOUNG GEORGE F YOUNG INCORPORATED ZENA ZENA COMPANY (ZEISS-JENA DISTR UNITED STATES) EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTIONS SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** BMS BOSTON MUSEUM OF SCIENCE BNL BROOKHAVEN NATIONAL LABORATORY CBI CONRAD BLUCHER INSTITUTE FOR SURVEY AND SCIENCE CORUNI CORNELL UNIVERSITY CU COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY FSNSCH FARMINGTON STATE NORMAL SCHOOL GATECH GEORGIA INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY IASUNI IOWA STATE UNIVERSITY JPL JET PROPULSION LABORATORY KSU KANSAS STATE UNIVERSITY LAFCOL LAFAYETTE COLLEGE LAHSCH LOS ALTOS HIGH SCHOOL LASLAB LOS ALAMOS SCIENTIFIC LABORATORIES LASU LOUISIANA STATE UNIVERSITY LAWRRI LOUISIANA WATER RESOURCE RESEARCH INSTITUTE LEHIGH LEHIGH UNIVERSITY MISCOL MICHIGAN STATE COLLEGE MIT MASSACHUSETTS INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY MITU MICHIGAN TECHNICAL UNIVERSITY MSSU MISSISSIPPI STATE UNIVERSITY MSU UNIVERSITY OF MISSISSIPPI MUNIV MARQUETTE UNIVERSITY NDSU NORTH DAKOTA STATE UNIVERSITY ODU OLD DOMINION UNIVERSITY ORTI OREGON TECHNICAL INSTITUTE SCEC SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA EARTHQUAKE CENTER SUNIV STANFORD UNIVERSITY TCU TEXAS CHRISTIAN UNIVERSITY YUM TECHNICAL UNIVERSITY OF MUNICH GERMANY UALR UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS AT LITTLE ROCK UC UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA UDE UNIVERSITY OF DELAWARE UFL UNIVERSITY OF FLORIDA C-29 EDUCATIONAL INSTITUTIONS - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** UHI UNIVERSITY OF HAWAII ULAVAL UNIVERSITY LAVAL QUEBEC UMPQUA UMPQUA COMMUNITY COLLEGE UNAVCO UNIVERSITY NAVSTAR CONSORTIUM UNC UNIVERSITY OF NORTH CAROLINA UNM UNIVERSITY OF NEW MEXICO UNO UNIVERSITY OF NEW ORLEANS UTU UNIVERSITY OF UTAH UTX UNIVERSITY OF TEXAS UVA UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA UVC UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA CONSERVANCY UVT UNIVERSITY OF VERMONT UWI UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN WILCOL WILLIAMS COLLEGE AT WILLIAMSTOWN MASSACHUSETTS WVUNIV WEST VIRGINIA UNIVERSITY PROFESSIONAL AND AMATEUR ASSOCIATIONS SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** BSA BOY SCOUTS OF AMERICA ECM ENGINEERS CLUB OF MEMPHIS USPSQD UNITED STATES POWER SQUADRON MISCELLANEOUS COMMERCIAL ORGANIZATIONS AND PRIVATE FIRMS SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** AKGEO ALASKAN GEOPHYSICAL AKLPCO ALASKA LUMBER AND PULP COMPANY ATCO ASSOCIATED TRACTION COMPANY ATT AMERICAN TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH COMPANY BGCO BROWN GEOPHYSICAL COMPANY BULE BULE AND ASSOCIATES BW BRADFORD WASHBURN BWCO BONO-WILLIAMS COMPANY CCCC CARBIDE AND CARBON CHEMICALS CORPORATION CCICO CLEVELAND CLIFFS IRON COMPANY CH2M CH2M HILL INCORPORATED CLA CROZER LAND ASSOCIATION CPFC CHAMPION PAPER AND FIBER COMPANY CPI CINCINNATI PRECISION INSTRUMENT COMPANY CROSET CROSSETT LUMBER COMPANY DBA DBA SYSTEMS INCORPORATED DOWCO DOW CHEMICAL COMPANY DSI DESIGN SCIENCES INC DVLCO DOLLY VARDEN LUMBER COMPANY ENVENG ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING INC FMCO FORD MOTOR COMPANY C-30 MISCELLANEOUS COMMERCIAL ORGANIZATIONS AND PRIVATE FIRMS - CONTINUED SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** GCC GLOGORA COAL COMPANY GE GENERAL ELECTRIC CORPORATION GEON GEONAUTICS INC GRDC GULF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT COMPANY GWA GERKEN WOOD AND ASSOCIATES INC HAPT HUGHES AIRPORT HMCO HANNA MINING COMPANY KETCH KETCHIKAN PULP COMPANY LAICO LOS ANGELES INVESTMENT COMPANY LDGO LAMONT DOHERTY GEOLOGICAL OBSERVATORY LEICA LEICA INCORPORATED MACCO MACCO CORPORATION MCAM MOLYBDENUM CORPORATION OF AMERICA MCLCO MICHIGAN-CALIFORNIA LUMBER COMPANY MLGW MEMPHIS LIGHT GAS AND WATER NAAV NORTH AMERICAN AVIATION NJZINC NEW JERSEY ZINC COMPANY PACTT PACIFIC TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH COMPANY PANAM PAN AMERICAN AIRLINES PCC PEABODY COAL COMPANY PECO POHLY EXPLORATION COMPANY PHILCM PHILLIPS CHEMICAL COMPANY PPCC PACIFIC PORTLAND CEMENT CORPORATION PSOMAS PSOMAS AND ASSOCIATES PVE PALOS VERDES ESTATES REGIS ST REGIS PAPER COMPANY RRLC RED RIVER LUMBER COMPANY SANDIA SANDIA CORPORATION SLDC SAINT LAWRENCE DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION SSC SEISMOGRAPH SERVICE CORPORATION STATEL STANFORD TELECOM SWBELL SOUTH WESTERN BELL TELEPHONE COMPANY TLDYNE TELEDYNE INCORPORATED VAILCO VAIL COMPANY VITRO VITRO CORPORATION WE WESTERN ELECTRIC COMPANY WHITE WHITE PIGMENT COMPANY NON-SPECIFIC DESIGNATORS SYMBOL FULL NAME ****** *************************************************************** LOCENG LOCAL ENGINEER (INDIVIDUAL OR FIRM) LOCSUR LOCAL SURVEYOR (INDIVIDUAL OR FIRM) UNK UNKNOWN PERSON OR FIRM C-31 INTENTIONALLY BLANK C-32 ANNEX D GUIDELINES FOR GEODETIC CONTROL POINT DESIGNATIONS A geodetic control point is a monumented or otherwise marked, survey point, established for the purpose of providing geodetic reference for mapping and charting activities and for a wide variety of engineering and scientific applications. A control point is normally identified by a number, an alphanumeric symbol, or a concise, intelligible name which is usually stamped on the disk marker. In principle, the designation by which a control point is identified should closely resemble the stamping that appears on the respective marker. However, extraneous information is frequently present which should not be included as part of the designation. In every case, the designation assigned to a control point for processing purposes must be identical to the designation that appears in the heading of the station description. These guidelines have been established to provide consistent control point designations and facilitate automated processing of the data. Implementation of these guidelines may sometimes result in two or more control points having the same designation. In such cases it will be necessary to refer to other information in the description to completely identify the control point. Sample formats for the various designations are given in this annex. GUIDELINES 1. A control point designation must not exceed 40 alphanumeric characters, including all imbedded blanks. When necessary, abbreviate and/or edit an existing designation to conform to this limit. 2. The year the mark was set is considered extraneous information and is not to be carried as part of a control point designation. For marks whose designations have not been altered when they were reset, the word RESET must be appended to the original designations. This also holds true for control points which have been reset more than once. In such cases the year given in the "year set" field will be used to distinguish the marks. Monument Stamped Designation USGS BM Disk TT 8 RESET 1965 TT 8 RESET CGS BM Disk LAKE WASHINGTON RESET 1970 LAKE WASHINGTON RESET CGS Tri Sta Disk BRADY 1951 BRADY CGS BM Disk ONEAL 1 1954 ONEAL 1 CGS BM Disk DE KALB 1934 DEKALB NCGS Trav Sta Disk MC CALL 1968 MCCALL CGS Tri Sta Disk DODGE 2 1969 DODGE 2 CGS Tri Sta Disk SPIT 1953 1983 SPIT RESET USGS Survey Disk PRIM TRAV STA NO 185 1915 PTS 185 D-1 3. The acronym or abbreviation of the agency or organization whose name is precast or sometimes stamped in the survey marker is considered extraneous information and should not be included in the control point designation. Monument Stamped Designation FLGS BM Disk 203 RESET 1950 203 RESET FLGS BM Disk 203 RESET 1967 203 RESET FLGS BM Disk 203 RESET 1967 MAY 203 RESET MAY USGS BM Disk 2903 2903 MORC Gaging Sta GAGING STA GAGING STA RIRR Disk RV 16 RV 16 USGS Chis Square WO 23 RM=148 RM USGS Survey Disk WO 23 1933 WO 23 USGS Survey Disk WO 23 1933 RESET 1962 WO 23 RESET PP+L Survey Disk P 11 PPL RESET 1976 P 11 RESET 4. The following special characters are the only ones allowed in a control point designation. They are the blank ( ), plus (+), minus or hyphen (-), equals (=), slash (/), and decimal point (.). When used, these special characters must not be separated from adjacent characters by any blanks. Commas and parentheses are not allowed within a designation. 4.1 Most alpha and numeric character groupings in a designation should be separated by a single blank ( ). Some exceptions are allowed, see the set of Abbreviations and Formats. Monument Stamped Designation USGS Survey Disk TT17B TT 17 B USGS Survey Disk TT-17B TT 17 B USGS Survey Disk TT-1 7B TT 1 7 B 4.2 A plus sign (+) is permitted within a designation when the control point was previously used for stationing in alignment surveys. In these cases the plus sign (+) must be immediately preceded and followed by a digit, not a blank. Monument Stamped Designation AZDT Disk STATION 11+14 ROUTE 244 STA 11+14 Highway Disk 2623 + 00 I95 STA 2623+00 4.3 The minus or hyphen (-) is allowed only when indicating a negative elevation stamped on a mark. An elevation stamped on a mark is used as the designation only when there is no other means to identify the mark. When a minus or hyphen (-) is used, it must be the first character of the designation and must be immediately followed by a digit. D-2 Monument Stamped Designation USGS Nail (Tag) -227.10 5-23-55 -227.10 CGS BM Disk -193.097 F 70 1928 F 70 USGS BM Disk ELEV -7.325 FT -7.325 4.4 The equal sign (=) is used as a separator for control points which carry multiple stamped designations. The designations involved should be concatenated with the equal sign. The combined designation length must not exceed the 40-character limit and the designation preceding the equal sign should be the designation used by the originating agency. Monument Stamped Designation USGS Chis Square WO 23 RM=148 RM CADH Survey Disk CH 1174 297+00 (A) CH 1174=297+00 A Unk Survey Disk STA. NO. 3 MI. 182.5 STA 3=MI 182.5 CGS Ref Mark Disk LEE NO 1 1932 R 13 LEE RM 1=R 13 CGS Tri Sta Disk 68.399 B 22 ATKINSON 1918ATKINSON=B 22 USGS Cap U 276 1942 VA 45 1917 45=U 276 NOTE: In situations where there are multiple designations that either do not appear stamped on the mark or are too long to be accommodated by the 40-character designation, the secondary designation may be given as a separate data item and carried as an alias in the appropriate field. 4.5 A slash (/) may be used to indicate a numerical fraction. Monument Stamped Designation USGLO Survey Disk T1N R3E S35 S36 1/4 1943 T1N R3E SECS 35 36 1/4 COR 4.6 A period (.) may not appear imbedded in or adjacent to a grouping of alpha characters, but may be used as a decimal point if imbedded in (but not adjacent to) a grouping of numeric characters. Monument Stamped Designation MADPW Survey Disk ELEV. B.M. NO. F 40 F 40 CGS Ref Mark Disk W. BASE NO 4 1965 CHARLESTON W BASE RM 4 CADWR Survey Disk MI. 0.9 1967 AMERICAN CANAL MI 0.9 CGS Tri Sta Disk PALMER N.E. BASE PALMER NE BASE CGS BM Disk MT. MORRIS 1941 MT MORRIS 5. Nonspecific descriptive terms are not to be treated as "double designations" and are not to be carried as aliases. D-3 Published as Stamped Designation BENCH MARK 2 2 114.3, Chis Square 114.3 C 1, Bolt C 1 6. The characters "BM", "BENCH MARK", and "PBM", even when stamped on a disk, are not to be included in a designation unless the control point has no other stamping (e.g., BM USGS) or the characters "BM" do not represent the words "BENCH MARK." 7. The elevation stamped on the disk marker on the monument is not to be carried as a part of the respective designation. The exception is when the elevation is the only means of identifying the survey mark. Monument Stamped Designation CGS BM Disk H 325 230.695FT H 325 MORC Disk 140B ELEV 95.3 FT 140 B USGS BM Disk -9.825 FT -9.825 BOR Survey Disk ELEV. 101.6 101.6 8. The characters "NO" or "No.", when used as an abbreviation for the word "number", should not be included in the designation, even when they are stamped in the disk. Monument Stamped Designation CGS Ref Mark Disk MONROE NO 1 1944 MONROE RM 1 CGS BM Disk BENCH MARK No. 6 6 9. The designation for a reference mark disk should be formed by appending the symbols RM 1, RM 2, ..., RM 13, etc. to the name of the horizontal control point for reference marks stamped NO 1, NO 2, ..., NO 13, etc., respectively. Monument Stamped Designation CGS Ref Mark Disk CHARLOTTE NO. 1 1945 CHARLOTTE RM 1 CGS Ref Mark Disk BOULDER 1935 NO 6 1968 BOULDER RM 6 CGS Ref Mark Disk CHICO 1948 NO 3 RESET 1971CHICO RM 3 RESET 10. The designation for an azimuth mark disk is formed by appending the characters "AZ MK" to the name of the respective horizontal control point. In the case of multiple azimuth marks, the numbers "2", "3", etc. are added for azimuth marks stamped NO 2, NO 3, etc. D-4 Monument Stamped Designation CGS Az Mark Disk CHARLOTTE 1934 CHARLOTTE AZ MK CGS Az Mark Disk BOULDER 1935 NO. 3 BOULDER AZ MK 3 CGS Az Mark Disk NORWASH AZI 1932 NORWASH AZ MK CGS Az Mark Disk PARK AZ RESET 1965 PARK AZ MK RESET 11. A temporary bench mark (TBM) must carry the letters "TBM" as the first three characters of the designation. Monument Stamped Designation Spike TBM 1 A Sidewalk TBM 14 12. The National Ocean Service (NOS) has instituted a standard system of designations for all tidal and water level stations operated by NOS. The system provides for the unique identification of all disks, staffs, etc., located at such stations (e.g., see Formats in this annex). Tidal and water level bench mark designations must conform to standard designations adopted by the National Ocean Service. For information concerning specific tide gage bench marks, etc., communicate with: User Services Section, N/OES232 National Ocean Service, NOAA 1305 East-West Highway Silver Spring, MD 20910 Telephone: 1-301-713-2877 Whenever the need arises for a guideline to deal with a situation not covered herein, the user is encouraged to communicate with the following appropriate technical offices in NGS: Horizontal Network Branch, N/CG12 National Geodetic Survey, NOAA 1315 East-West Highway Silver Spring, MD 20910 Telephone: 1-301-713-3176 Vertical Network Branch, N/CG13 National Geodetic Survey, NOAA 1315 East-West Highway Silver Spring, MD 20910 Telephone: 1-301-713-3191 Space and Physical Geodesy Branch, N/CG14 National Geodetic Survey, NOAA 1315 East-West Highway Silver Spring, MD 20910 Telephone: 1-301-713-3205 D-5 ABBREVIATIONS A list of standard abbreviations has been adopted for use in designating geodetic control points. These abbreviations are for terms that commonly occur in designations and are the only accepted forms of abbreviation. This list may be extended as the need arises. __________________________________________________ Geodetic control point abbreviations __________________________________________________ A POINT A PT ACADEMY ACAD ADMINISTRATION ADM AGENCY AGY AGRICULTURE AGRI AHEAD AHD AIRCRAFT ARCFT AIRPORT APT AIRWAY AWY AIR FORCE BASE AFB ALLEGHENY ALGHNY AMBASSADOR AMB AMENDED AMD AMENDED MONUMENT (AM) AMD MON AMERICAN AMER ANGLE ANG ANGLE POINT (AP) ANG PT ANTENNA ANT APPALACHIAN APLCN APPROXIMATELY APPROX ASSOCIATION ASSOC ASTRONOMICAL ASTRO ASYLUM ASY ATLANTIC AT AUTHORITY AUTH AUXILIARY AUX AUXILIARY MEANDER CORNER (AMC) AUX MDR COR AVENUE AVE __________________________________________________ Notes: 1. Abbreviations listed with () are used by the Bureau of Land Management. 2. The cardinal directions (E, S, W, N, NE, SE, SW, and NW) are to be abbreviated only when they are not the first word of the designation. D-6 ____________________________________________________ Geodetic control point abbreviations (Continued) ____________________________________________________ AVIATION AVN AZIMUTH AZ BACK BCK BANK BK BANKING BKG BAPTIST BAP BATTERY BTRY BEACON BCN BEARING BRG BEARING OBJECT (BO) BRG OBJ BEARING TREE (BT) BRG TREE BELFRY BFRY BETWEEN BET BOULEVARD BLVD BOUNDARY BDRY BREAKWATER BRKWTR BRICK BR BROADCASTING BCSTG BROTHER BRO BROTHERS BROS BUILDING BLDG BUREAU BUR CAPITOL CAP CATHEDRAL CATHL CATHOLIC CATH CEMETERY CEM CENTER (C) CEN CENTERLINE CL CERAMIC CERAM CHEMICAL CHEM CHIMNEY CHIM CHURCH CH CLOCK CLK CLOSING CORNER (CC) CC COLLEGE COLL COMMERCE COM COMMERCIAL COML COMMISSION COMM COMPANY CO COMPRESS COMP CONCENTRATION CONCN CONCEPTION CON CONCRETE CONC CONGREGATIONAL CONG ____________________________________________________ D-7 ____________________________________________________ Geodetic control point abbreviations (Continued) ____________________________________________________ CONSOLIDATED CONSOL CONSTRUCTION CONSTR CONTINENTAL CONTL CONTROL CTRL COOPERATIVE COOP CORNER COR CORPORATION CORP CORRECTIONAL CORR COUNTRY CTRY COUNTY CNTY COURTHOUSE CTHSE CUPOLA CUP DAYBEACON DBCN DEFENSE DEF DEPARTMENT DEPT DISTRIBUTOR DISTR DIVISION DIV DOMESTIC DOM DORMITORY DORM DRAWBRIDGE DBRIDGE EAST E ECCENTRIC ECC EDUCATION EDUC ELECTRIC ELEC ELEMENTARY ELEM ELEVATION ELEV ELEVATED ELEVD ELEVATOR ELEVR ENGINEERING ENG ENGRAVING ENGR ENTRANCE ENTR EPISCOPAL EPIS EQUIPMENT EQPT EVANGELICAL EVAN EXCHANGE EXCH EXPERIMENTAL EXPTL FEDERAL FED FINIAL FIN FIRST 1ST FLAGPOLE FP FLAGSTAFF FS FOURTH 4TH FRONT RANGE FRGE FURNITURE FURN ____________________________________________________ D-8 ____________________________________________________ Geodetic control point abbreviations (Continued) ____________________________________________________ GABLE GAB GENERAL GEN GEODETIC GEOD GEOGRAPHIC GEOG GEOLOGICAL GEOL GOVERNMENT GOVT GROWERS GROS HARBOR HBR HARDWARE HDWE HEADQUARTERS HQ HEIGHTS HTS HIGHWAY HWY HISTORICAL HIST HOSPITAL HOSP HOUSE HSE HYDRO HYD IMMACULATE IMM IMPLEMENT IMPL IMPORT IMP INCINERATOR INCIN INCORPORATED INC INDEPENDENT IND INDUSTRIAL INDL INDUSTRY INDY INFIRMARY INFIRM INSTITUTE INST INSTITUTION INSTN INSURANCE INS INTERNATIONAL INTL INTERSTATE INTST INTERSECT INT INVESTMENT INVT IRRIGATION IRRIG ISLAND IS JUNCTION JCT LABORATORY LAB LANDING LDG LATITUDE LAT LATTER DAY SAINTS LDS LEATHER LEA LEFT LT ** ____________________________________________________ **The abbreviations R, T, LT, and RT must be adjacent to at least one numeric character. D-9 ____________________________________________________ Geodetic control point abbreviations (Continued) __________________________________________________ LIGHT LT LIGHTHOUSE LH LOCAL LCL LOCATION LOC LOCATION MONUMENT (LM) LOC MON LOOKOUT LO LOOKOUT HOUSE LOH LOOKOUT TOWER LOT LONGITUDE LON LUMBER LUM LUTHERAN LUTH MACHINERY MACH MAGAZINE MAGZ MAGNETIC MAG MAINTENANCE MAINT MANUFACTURED MFD MANUFACTURING MFG MARK MK MARKET MKT MAST MST MEANDER MDR MEANDER CORNER (MC) MDR COR MERCHANDISE MDSE MERCANTILE MERC METHODIST METH METROPOLITAN MET MICROWAVE MV MILE or MILES MI MILEPOST MP MILITARY MIL MILLING MILL MONUMENT MON MOUNT MT MOUNTAIN MTN MUNICIPAL MUN MUSEUM MUS NATIONAL NAT NAVIGATION NAV NEAR NR NORTH N NORTHEAST NE NORTHWEST NW OBJECT OBJ OBSERVATION OBS ____________________________________________________ D-10 ____________________________________________________ Geodetic control point abbreviations (Continued) ____________________________________________________ OBSERVATORY OBSY OBSTRUCTION OBSTR OFFICE OFF ORDNANCE ORD ORGANIZATION ORG ORTHODOX ORTH PEAK PK PENINSULA PEN PETROLEUM PET PINNACLE PCLE PLANT PLT POINT PT POINT A PTA POINT OF CURVE POC POINT OF INTERSECTION PI POINT OF TANGENT POT POLICE POL POWER PWR POWERHOUSE PHSE PRESBYTERIAN PRESB PRIMARY PRIM PRIMARY TRAVERSE STATION PTS PRINTING PTG PROCESS PRCS PRODUCING PRODG PRODUCT PROD PROPERTIES PROP PROTESTANT PROT PUBLIC PUB PUBLISHING PUBG QUARTER QTR RADIO RAD RAILROAD RR RAILWAY RWY RANGE RGE RANGE (Township) R ** REAR RANGE RRGE REFERENCE REF REFERENCE MARK RM REFERENCE MONUMENT (RM) REF MON REFERENCE POINT RP ____________________________________________________ **The abbreviations R, T, LT, and RT must be adjacent to at least one numeric character. D-11 ____________________________________________________ Geodetic control point abbreviations (Continued) ____________________________________________________ REFINING REFG REFORMED REFM REFRIGERATING REFRIG RESET RST RIGHT RT ** RIGHT OF WAY ROW ROAD RD ROMAN ROM ROUTE RTE RUNWAY RNWY SAINT ST SANITARY SANIT SANITORIUM SAN SAVINGS SVGS SCHOOL SCH SCHOOLHOUSE SCHSE SCIENTIFIC SCI SECOND 2ND SECTION SEC SECTIONS SECS SEMINARY SEM SERVICE SERV SOCIETY SOC SOUTH S SOUTHEAST SE SOUTHWEST SW SPECIAL SPL SPECIAL MEANDER CORNER (SMC) SPL MDR COR SPIRE SP SQUARE SQ STACK STK STANDARD STD STANDARD CORNER (SC) SC STANDPIPE SPIPE STATION STA STEEPLE STPE STORAGE STGE STREET STR SUBURBAN SUBR SUPERINTENDENT SUPT TANK TK ____________________________________________________ **The abbreviations R, T, LT, and RT must be adjacent to at least one numeric character. D-12 ____________________________________________________ Geodetic control point abbreviations (Continued) ____________________________________________________ TANGENT TAN TANGENT OFFSET TOS TECHNICAL TECH TELEGRAPH TELG TELEPHONE TEL TELEVISION TV TEMP POINT A TP A TERMINAL TERM TERRITORY TERR THEOLOGICAL THEO THIRD 3RD TOWER TWR TOWNSHIP TWP TOWNSHIP (Tier) T ** TRACT TR TRANSCONTINENTAL TRANSCON TRANSMISSION TRANSM TRANSPORTATION TRANSP TRAVERSE TRAV TRAVERSE STATION TS TRIANGLE TRI TURNPIKE TPK UNITARIAN UNIT UNIVERSITY UNIV VACUUM VAC VERTEX VTX VILLAGE VIL WATER WT WEST W WAREHOUSE WHSE WINDMILL WMILL WITNESS CORNER (WC) WC WITNESS POST (WP), wood WP WITNESS POST, metal MWP WITNESS POST, fiberglass FWP ____________________________________________________ **The abbreviations R, T, LT, and RT must be adjacent to at least one numeric character. D-13 FORMATS Only NGS employees and agents may set brass disks and aluminum flanges precast with NGS logo. Such marks must be stamped with designations supplied by the agency. Each geodetic control point designation should be unique among all the designations located within a defined region. Format Page ________________________________________________________ Geodetic Control Points D-15 Tide Station Bench marks D-17 Staffs or ETG RMs at Tide or Water-Level Stations D-19 Water Level Station Bench Marks D-21 Airport Runways D-23 Political Boundaries D-24 Highways and Roads D-25 Railroads, Canals and Rivers D-26 Landmarks D-27 Township and Range Control Point Information D-28 ________________________________________________________ D-14 Geodetic control points __________________________________________________________________ ____________ FORMAT: NAME SPECIAL __________________________________________________________________ ____________ 1. NAME A. The following method is generally used for naming vertical control points (bench marks). The first mark established in a state is designated "A", then "B" and so on through the alphabet, except the letters "I" and "O" which are not used because they are too easily confused with the numbers "1" and "O". The next series of marks is identified as "A 1", "B 1", etc.; then "A 2", "B 2", etc., and so on through the alphabet. In some cases, more than one letter is used to distinguish between bench marks that have accidentally been given the same name in the same state. B. The following method is generally used for naming a horizontal control point (triangulation or traverse). The name should serve not only to identify the station but to suggest the local geographic location or feature. The name should be used only once within a county and preferably a given state. Therefore, use sufficient variety to avoid duplication. A short name is desirable, but if a longer name is required to properly serve the purpose, it should be used. In those cases where a well known geographical feature in the vicinity is used, or the name of a local landowner, the name should be spelled correctly. 2. SPECIAL USE A. These terms are used with vertical control points to distinguish between names used more than once in a state or to indicate disturbance of the original bench mark (e.g., "RESET"). B. These terms are used with horizontal control points to explain a local use or disturbance to the original mark or its designation. __________________________________________________________________ __________ D-15 Examples: Geodetic control points -------------------------------------------- NAME SPECIAL -------------------------------------------- Station | Number | Use --------------------+-----------+----------- A | | L | 690 | L | 690 | RESET YY | 1150 | C | 1244 | X LEON | | LEON | | ECC LEON | | RESET LEON | RM 1 | LEON | RM 2 | LEON | AZ MK | LEON | AZ MK | RESET LEON | AZ MK | PTA LEON | AZ MK 2 | LEON 2 | | LEON 2 | RM 3 | LEON 2 | RM 4 | LEON 2 | AZ MK | LEON 2 | AZ MK 2 | -------------------------------------------- D-16 Tide station bench marks __________________________________________________________________ ____________ FORMAT: LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL __________________________________________________________________ ____________ 1. LOCATION Code and Station A. The location has two parts, the first part, the CODE, is a 3-digit State code given for each geographical region. B. The second part of the location, the STATION NUMBER, is an unique 4-digit number assigned to a particular tide station within a given geographical area. 2. OBJECT Identification A. The MARK USE gives information on the nature of the object which was used. B. The PUBLICATION NAME is used to give the proper identification of theobject. In most cases, this field should be based on the stamping. If there is no stamping, use the name given in the tidal publication. In either case, this field is subject to the guidelines given in this Annex. 3. SPECIAL Use This term is used to explain a local use or disturbance to the original mark. NOTE: If other types of marks are used in tidal surveys, see other format rules for their primary designations; and add aliases according to the following examples: Mark type DS (Triangulation Station Mark) Stamping BREACH 1963 Primary designation BREACH Alias 866 5552 TIDAL Mark type DB (Bench Mark Disk) Stamping V 163 RESET 1984 Primary designation V 163 RESET Alias 872 9871 TIDAL _________________________________________________________________ _____________ D-17 Examples Tide station bench marks set before or about 1976 -------------------------------------------------------------- LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL -------------------------------------------------------------- Code | Station | Mark | Identification | Use State | No. | use | Publication name | --------+------------ +-------+----------------------+--------- 866 | 1684 | TIDAL | HB 1 | 857 | 4680 | TIDAL | BASIC | 872 | 0030 | TIDAL | 37 | RESET 944 | 0886 | TIDAL | USE 5 | -------------------------------------------------------------- Tide station bench marks set after about 1976 - ------------------------------------------------------------- LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL - ------------------------------------------------------- ------ Code | Station | Identification | Mark | Use State | No. | Publication name | use | -------------------------------------------------------------- 872 | 0051 | D | TIDAL | 872 | 9554 | C | TIDAL | RESET -------------------------------------------------------------- D-18 Staffs or electric tape gage (ETG) reading marks at tide or water-level stations _________________________________________________________________ _____________ FORMAT: TEMPORAL LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL _________________________________________________________________ _____________ 1. TEMPORAL Reference The Temporal Reference is identified by setting the term "TBM" in front of the location. 2. LOCATION Code and Station A. The location has two parts, the first, the CODE, is either a 3-digit STATE number code for a State or a 3-digit CUTTER code for defining a part of a lake or channel. B. The second part of the location, the STATION NUMBER, is an unique 4-digit number assigned to a particular tide or water level station within a given geographical area. 3. OBJECT Identification The Object Identification gives information on the nature of the object that was used. 4. SPECIAL Use These terms are used to indicate the graduation of the tide or water level staff on which the level rod was placed. _________________________________________________________________ _____________ D-19 Examples Staffs located at tide stations ------------ --------------------------------------------------------------- TEMPORAL LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- Reference | Code | Station | Identification|Use | State | No. || ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- TBM | 872 | 2029 | STAFF | 6 FT | | || ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- Electric (or "zero electric") tape gage reading marks at tide stations ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- TEMPORAL LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- Reference | Code | Station | Identification | Use | State | No. || -----------+--------+-----------+------------------------------+- ---------- TBM | 872 | 9678 | ETG READ MK | | | || ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- Staffs located at water level stations ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- TEMPORAL LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- Reference | Code | Station | Identification | Use | Cutter | No. | | -----------+--------+-----------+------------------------------+- ---------- TBM | 906 | 3000 | STAFF | 6 FT | | || ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- Electric tape gage (ETG) reading marks at water level stations ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- TEMPORAL | LOCATION | OBJECT| SPECIAL -----------+--------+-----------+------------------------------+- ---------- Reference | Code | Station | Identification | Use | Cutter | No. | | -----------+--------+-----------+------------------------------+- ---------- TBM | 907 | 5099 | ETG READ MK | | | || ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- D-20 Water level station bench marks ______________________________________________________________________ ________ FORMAT: LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL ______________________________________________________________________ ________ 1. LOCATION Code and Station A. The first part of the location is the 3-digit code for defining a part of a lake or channel within the CUTTER Code System. B. The second part of the location, the STATION NUMBER, is a unique 4-digit number assigned to the water level station within a given geographical area. 2. OBJECT Identification In most cases, this field should be based on the stamping. If there is no stamping, use the name given in the water level publication. In either case, this field is subject to the guidelines given in this annex. 3. SPECIAL Use These character strings are used to explain some local use or disturbance to the original mark. NOTE: If other types of marks are used in water level surveys, see other format rules for their primary designation and add an alias according to the following example: Mark type F (flange-encased rod) Stamping C 234 1980 (on logo cap) Primary designation C 234 Alias 906 3087 _________________________________________________________________ _____________ D-21 Examples Water level station bench marks set before or about 1976 ------------------------------------------------------------- ----- LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL ------------------------------------------------------------- ----- Code | Station | Identification | Use Cutter | No | | --------+-----------+---------------------------+------------ - 907 | 5098 | ROAD A | 907 | 5098 | ROAD A | RESET ------------------------------------------------------------- ----- Water level station bench marks set after about 1976 ----------------------------------------------------------------- - LOCATION OBJECT SPECIAL ------------------------------------------------------------- ----- Code | Station | Identification | Use Cutter | No. | | ------------------------------------------------------------- ----- 907 | 5085 | F | 907 | 5085 | F | RESET ------------------------------------------------------------- ----- D-22 Airport runways _________________________________________________________________ _____________ FORMAT: ALIGNMENT OBJECT LOCATION SPECIAL _________________________________________________________________ _____________ 1. ALIGNMENT Survey Name Use the proper NAME of the town, city, or a geographic location within the area for the airport. 2. OBJECT Identification Enter the type of alignment object, in this case it is the airport RUNWAY. 3. LOCATION Station (Runway Number) and Tangent Offset (TOS) A. The location has two parts, the first part is called the runway number and should be a 2-digit numerical value. These two digits are taken from the first two digits of the 3-digit runway (measured from north) azimuth, i.e., 01, 13, 22, or 34 which were taken from the azimuths of 010, 130, 220, and 340 respectively. B. The second part of the location, the tangent offset (TOS), is the location of the control point in question with respect to the center of the alignment, that is, the distance (in meters/feet) either left or right. 4. SPECIAL Use Terms such as A PT, ECC, HUB, PTA, RESET, and TP A are used to explain a local use or disturbance to the original mark. _________________________________________________________________ _____________ Examples Airport runways ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- ALIGNMENT OBJECT LOCATION SPECIAL ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- Survey name | Identification | Station | TOS | Use ---------------------+------------------+---------+--------- +-------------- KENNEWICK AIRPORT | | | | KENNEWICK AIRPORT | | | | ECC KENNEWICK AIRPORT | | | | RESET KENNEWICK APT AZ MK | | | | KENNEWICK APT | RUNWAY | 00 | OFFSET | HUB KENNEWICK APT | RUNWAY | 36 | CL | KENNEWICK APT | RNWY | 02 | CL | KENNEWICK APT | RNWY | 20 | CL | ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---------- D-23 Political boundaries _________________________________________________________________ _____________ FORMAT: ALIGNMENT OBJECT DESIGNATE POLITICAL SPECIAL _________________________________________________________________ _____________ 1. ALIGNMENT Survey The term BOUNDARY is used when two or more participants are in common or adjacent to an alignment. 2. OBJECT Identification Enter the type of alignment object, such as name, station, miles, mileposts, monuments, reference points, etc. 3. DESIGNATE Reference The designate reference is used to identify the unique number, letters, or symbols that describe the control point. 4. POLITICAL Participants A. All participants in common or adjacent to the alignment boundary are listed in alphabetical order. B. The political participants to be selected and entered first will be by the following order: international, federal, reservations, state, county, municipal, and private. C. The selection order will provide the correct entries for the country/state and county fields used within the NGS data base. 5. SPECIAL Use Terms such as A PT, ECC, HUB, PTA, RESET, and TP A are used to explain a local use or disturbance to the original mark. _________________________________________________________________ _____________ Examples Political boundaries - ----------------------------------------------------------------- ---- ALIGNMENT OBJECT DESIGNATE POLITICAL SPECIAL ----------------------------------------------------------------- ----- Survey | Identification | Reference | Participants | Use -----------|--- ----------------|-----------|---------------|---------- BOUNDARY | MONUMENT | 84 A | MX US | RESET BOUNDARY | MILEPOST | 360 | ND SD | BOUNDARY | TRAVERSE STATION | 110 A | CD US | ECC BOUNDARY | ARC STONE | 14 | DE PA | RESET BOUNDARY | CORNER STONE | 2 | MD PA | BOUNDARY | TANGENT STONE | 1 | DE MD | BOUNDARY | INTERSECT STONE | OFFSET | DE PA | BOUNDARY | POINT | 24 | CD US | BOUNDARY | REFERENCE POINT | 22 | AZ CA | ----------------------------------------------------------------- ----- D-24 Highways and roads _________________________________________________________________ _____________ FORMAT: ALIGNMENT OBJECT LOCATION SPECIAL _________________________________________________________________ _____________ 1. ALIGNMENT Survey Name A. Use the term Ixxx for all Interstate highways. B. Use the term HIGHWAY for all Federal highways. C. Use the term ROUTE for all State highways. D. Use the term ROAD for all county roads. E. Use the municipality name for all local streets, avenues, boulevards, pikes, roads, etc. 2. OBJECT Identification A. Enter the type of alignment object, such as the name and station, miles, mileposts, monuments, reference points, etc. B. Or enter the proper name of the alignment, such as the name of the city street. 3. LOCATION Station and Tangent Offset A. The location uses two parts, the first part is called the stationing. This part should be, for most cases, a numeric value. B. The second part of the location, the tangent offset (TOS), is the location of the point in question with respect to the center of the alignment, that is, the distance (in meters/feet) either left or right. 4. SPECIAL Use Terms such as A PT, ECC, HUB, PTA, RESET, and TP A are used to explain a local use or disturbance to the original mark. _________________________________________________________________ _____________ Examples Highways and roads ----------------------------------------------------------------- ----- ALIGNMENT OBJECT LOCATION SPECIAL ----------------------------------------------------------------- ----- Survey name | Identification | Station | TOS | Use ---------------|------------------|-------------|----------- |--------- I495 | MILEPOST | 99.387 | | ECC HIGHWAY 50 | STATION | 1234+00 | CL | ROUTE 355 | STATION MARK | 233+16 | 50LT | ROUTE 193 | REFERENCE POINT | 21+00 | POC | ROAD 2786 | MILEPOST | 37.3 | | RESET ROCKVILLE | MAPLE AVE STA | 1+32 | 39RT | ROCKVILLE | MAPLE AVE STA | 2+50 | POT | PASCO | MAIN STREET | PI 9 | | ----------------------------------------------------------------- ----- D-25 Railroads, canals and rivers _________________________________________________________________ _____________ FORMAT: ALIGNMENT OBJECT LOCATION SPECIAL _________________________________________________________________ _____________ 1. ALIGNMENT Survey A. The terms RAILROAD or RAILWAY for alignments which follow these right-of-ways. B. Use the characters CANAL or REACH for those man made waterways. C. Use the characters RIVER for all natural waterways. 2. OBJECT Identification Enter the type of alignment object, such as name, station, miles, mileposts, monuments, reference points, etc. 3. LOCATION Station and Tangent Offset A. The location uses two parts, the first part is called the stationing. This part should be, for most cases, a numeric value. B. The second part of the location, the tangent offset (TOS), is the location of the point in question with respect to the center of the alignment, that is, the distance (in meters/feet) either left or right. 4. SPECIAL Use Terms such as A PT, ECC, HUB, PTA, RESET, and TP A are used to explain a local use or disturbance to the original mark. _________________________________________________________________ _____________ Examples Railroads, canals and rivers ----------------------------------------------------------------- - ALIGNMENT OBJECT LOCATION SPECIAL ----------------------------------------------------------------- - Survey | Identification | Station | TOS | Use -----------|-----------------|--------------|----- ------|--------- RAILROAD | MILEPOST | 347.8 | CL | RESET RAILWAY | MILEPOST | 216.455 | OFFSET | REACH | 1 | 22+00 | 400LT | ECC REACH | 1 | PI 2 | | REACH | 3 | 295+00 | 400LT | RIVER | SNAKE MILEPOST | 37.3 | | -------- ---------------------------------------------------------- D-26 Landmarks _________________________________________________________________ _____________ FORMAT: LOCATION OWNERSHIP OBJECT SPECIAL _________________________________________________________________ _____________ 1. LOCATION A. The general area in which the landmark is located should be used, such as the nearest city, town, or local geographic area. B. However, some landmarks by the nature of their name alone will be enough to give a general location, e.g. STATUE OF LIBERTY (New York), SEARS TOWER (Chicago), and SEATTLE SPACE NEEDLE (Seattle). 2. OWNERSHIP A. The ownership should be the proper name of the existing owner at the time the landmark was positioned. Later recovery information will reflect the changes of ownership. B. If the ownership is a political group, such as a state or county, do not include the name of the state or county. 3. OBJECT Identification For a landmark, enter a general name in order to identify it. 4. SPECIAL Target The special target is used to uniquely identify the exact object sighted as the landmark. _________________________________________________________________ _____________ Examples Landmarks ----------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- LOCATION | OWNERSHIP | OBJECT | SPECIAL | +------------------------ +-------------- | | Identification | Target -------------+------------------------+------ ------------------+-------------- ASHLAND | MUNICIPAL | AIRPORT | BEACON BETHESDA | GREEK ORTHODOX | CHURCH | CROSS CARSON CITY | STATE POLICE | RADIO STATION | MAST FRANKLIN | COUNTY | HOSPITAL | FLAGPOLE KEY WEST | FORT MONROE | BATTERY | RED LIGHT LAS VEGAS | | TV STATION KLAS | MAST LOVELOCK | | RADIO STATION KOB 893 | MAST NEW YORK | PORT AUTHORITY | BUILDING | FLAGPOLE PASCO | COUNTY | COURTHOUSE | DOME POTOMAC | ST MARKS CATHOLIC | CHURCH | SPIRE ROCKVILLE | HUGHES AIRCRAFT | BUILDING | APEX ROCKVILLE | MUNICIPAL | GAS TANK | FINIAL ROCKVILLE | MUNICIPAL | WATER TANK | BALL ROCKVILLE | MUNICIPAL | STANDPIPE | FINIAL SALEM | 1ST METHODIST | CHURCH | WEST SPIRE SALEM | STATE | HOSPITAL CLOCK | APEX WINNEMUCCA | | RADIO STATION KWNA | MAST ----------------------------------------------------------------- ------------- D-27 Township and range control point information _________________________________________________________________ _____________ FORMAT: TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION LOCATION _________________________________________________________________ _____________ Department of Interior, Bureau of Land Management disks are always marked by stamping them so as to be read looking north while standing on the south side. This relationship gives the viewer a pictorial or graphical representation of the physical relationship of the existing subdivision of the land under survey. The south and east boundaries of each township, for the most part, are the controlling sides, whereas north and west township boundaries will close onto the controlling standard parallel to the north and the guide meridian to the west of it respectively. 1. TOWNSHIP A. One Township # Indicate the Township containing the identified survey monument. B. Two Townships ## (read from south to north) (1) List southernmost FIRST (one with lowest latitude) (2) List northernmost SECOND (one with higher latitude) 2. RANGE A. One Range # Indicate the Range containing the identified survey monument. B. Two Ranges ## (read from west to east) (1) List Range on the left FIRST (western most) (2) List Range on the right SECOND (eastern most) 3. SECTION A. Arrange and list all sections to be included, in a string of increasing section numbers. B. For Township surveys which are incomplete, show the identification (see part 4) as a Cardinal Corner of the "One" lowest section where the subdivision survey has been completed. 4. LOCATION - Identification of a Subdivision Survey Point A. Standard Corner S C B. Closing Corner C C C. Meander Corner M C D. Quarter-Section Corner 1/4 COR E. Location Monument L M F. Angle Point A P G. Witness Corner W C H. Cardinal Corner *** I. Identification as Found NIR S180 MP31 _________________________________________________________________ _____________ ***Use Lowest Section Number Completed. D-28 | | | | | | | | 4TH STD PARALLEL NORTH (96 miles) | + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- +---------------------------+------ N | | | | | | | | | | O | F S 3 4 5| | | | T16N |6 R | I E R T T| | | | R24E |T T | R C D H H| | | | |H H | S O |------|------|------|------| | T N | | G| | | | |G | D | | U| | | | T15N |U | | | | I| | | | R24E |I P | | | | | D| | | | |D R | E|------|------+******+------|E I | | | * * | N | M| | * T14N * T14N |M C | E| | * R23E * R24E |E I | R| | * * |R P | I|------|------+******+------|I A | D| | | | |D L | I| T13N | T13N | T13N | T13N |I | | | | | A| R21E | R22E | R23E | R24E |A | | | | | N| | | | |N M + -- + -- + -- + -- + -- +---------------------------+------ E | 3RD STD PARALLEL NORTH (72 miles) | R | | | I | D + -- + -- + -- I | SECOND STD PARALLEL NORTH (48 miles) A | N | + -- + -- + -- | FIRST STD PARALLEL NORTH (24 miles) | | + -- + -- BASE LINE |\ S | \ (INITIAL POINT) O | U | T | FIRST STD PARALLEL SOUTH (24 miles) H + -- + -- + -- | Figure D.1 - Layout of Standard Parallels and Guide Meridians. D-29 T15N R22E | T15N R23E | T15N R24E 36 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 | 3 | | | | | | | --------- +******+******+******+******+******+******+ ---------- * | | | | | * * | | | | | * 1 * 6 | 5 | 4 | 3 | 2 | 1 * 6 * | | | | | * * | | | | | * -- +------+------+------+------+------+------+ -- * | | | | | * * | | | | | * 12 * 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 * 7 * | | | | | * * | | | | | * -- +------+------+------+------+------+------+ -- * | | | | | * * | | | | | * 13 * 18 | 17 | 16 | 15 | 14 | 13 * 18 * | | | | * T14N * | | T14N | | * T14N R22E -- +------+------+--- R23E ----+------+------+ -- R24E * | | | | * * | | | | | * 24 * 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 * 19 * | | | | | * * | | | | | * -- +------+------+------+------+------+------+ -- * | | | | | * * | | | | | * 25 * 30 | 29 | 28 | 27 | 26 | 25 * 30 * | | | | | * * | | | | | * -- +------+------+------+------+------+------+ -- * | | | | | * * | | | | | * 36 * 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 | 35 | 36 * 31 * | | | | | * * | | | | | * ----------+******+******+******+******+******+******+----------- | | | | | | | 1 | 6 5 4 3 2 1 | 6 T13N R22E | T13N R23E | T13N R24E Figure D.2 - T14N R23E SECS (1 - 36) as shown in Figure D.1. D-30 T14N R23E SEC 33 | SEC 34 | SEC 35 | | --------(A)---------(B)---------(C)-------- | | SEC 4 | SEC 3 | SEC 2 T13N R23E T13N R23E SEC 33 | SEC 34 | SEC 35 | | -----+-(D)---------(E)-------+-(F)---- 3RD STD PARALLEL NORTH (X) (Y) SEC 4 | SEC 3 | SEC 2 T12N R23E Figure D.3 - Designations for East/West Boundary Corners. Examples ---------------------------------------------------------------- TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION LOCATION ---------------------------------------------------------------- A T13 14N | R23E | SECS 3 4 33 34 | B T13 14N | R23E | SECS 3 34 | 1/4 COR C T13 14N | R23E | SECS 2 3 34 35 | D T13N | R23E | SECS 33 34 | SC or D T13N | R23E | SEC 33 | SE COR E T13N | R23E | SEC 34 | 1/4 COR F T13N | R23E | SECS 34 35 | SC or F T13N | R23E | SEC 34 | SE COR X T12N | R23E | SECS 3 4 | CC Y T12N | R23E | SECS 2 3 | CC ---------------------------------------------------------------- D-31 T17N R24E | T17N R25SE S 36 | S 31 --- 4TH STD PARALLEL NORTH ------+---(L)---- (Y) S 1 | S 6 --(K)- S 12 | S 7 --(J)- T16N R24E | T16N R25E --------(I)-------- T15N R24E | T15N R25E --------(H)-------- T14N R24E | T14N R25E --------(G)-------- S 1 | S 6 --(F)- S 12 | S 7 --(E)- S 13 | S 18 T13N R24E --(D)- T13N R25E S 24 | S 19 --(C)- S 25 | S 30 --(B)- S 36 | S 31 --- 3RD STD PARALLEL NORTH ---+--(A)-------- (X) S 1 | S 6 T12N R24E -(W)- T12N R25E | Figure D-4 - Designations for North/South Boundary Corners. Examples ----------------------------------------------------------- TOWNSHIP RANGE SECTION LOCATION ----------------------------------------------------------- W T12N | R24 25E | SECS 1 6 7 12 | X T12N | R24 25E | SECS 1 6 | CC A T13N | R24 25E | SECS 31 36 | SC B T13N | R24 25E | SECS 25 30 31 36| C T13N | R24 25E | SECS 19 24 25 30| D T13N | R24 25E | SECS 13 18 19 24| E T13N | R24 25E | SECS 7 12 13 18 | F T13N | R24 25E | SECS 1 6 7 12 | G T13 14N | R24 25E | SECS 1 6 31 36 | H T14 15N | R24 25E | SECS 1 6 31 36 | I T15 16N | R24 25E | SECS 1 6 31 36 | J T16N | R24 25E | SECS 7 12 13 18 | K T16N | R24 25E | SECS 1 6 7 12 | Y T16N | R24 25E | SECS 1 6 | CC L T17N | R24 25E | SECS 31 36 | SC ----------------------------------------------------------- D-32 ANNEX E STATION ORDER-AND-TYPE (OT) CODES This ANNEX contains lists of the various types of horizontal control points with the corresponding two-character Order-and-Type (OT) Codes. These codes are used to classify every horizontal control point according to the general order of accuracy of the main-scheme network of which it is a part and according to the surveying method by which the point is positioned. The use of the OT Codes is explained in Chapter 2, pages 2-35 thru 2-38. The first character (i.e., the "order code") of the OT Code indicates the order of accuracy of the main-scheme network of which the horizontal control point in question is a part or to which it is connected. It also indicates whether the horizontal control point is permanently marked and recoverable (e.g., a monumented station or a landmark) or not permanently marked and hence nonrecoverable (e.g., an auxiliary point): ORDER CODES OF RECOVERABLE POINTS: A - Order A Interferometric Positioning B - Order B Interferometric Positioning 0 - Trans-Continental Traverse (TCT) 1 - lst-Order Survey Scheme 2 - 2nd-Order (Class I and Class II) Survey Scheme 3 - 3rd-Order (Class I and Class II) Survey Scheme 4 - Lower-Than-3rd-Order Survey Scheme and Supplemental Unmonumented Recoverable Landmarks (see p. E-4) ORDER CODES OF NONRECOVERABLE POINTS: 5 - lst-Order Survey Scheme 6 - 2nd-Order (Class I and Class II) Survey Scheme 7 - 3rd-Order (Class I and Class II) Survey Scheme 8 - Lower-Than-3rd-Order Survey Scheme The second code (i.e., the "type code") of the OT Code indicates the type of the (primary) surveying method by which the horizontal control point is positioned. It also shows whether the horizontal control point in question is a main-scheme station (i.e., one which is essential to the survey scheme) or a supplemental station (i.e., one which is incidental to the survey scheme): TYPE CODES OF MAIN-SCHEME STATIONS: 1 - Positioned Primarily by Triangulation (or by Intersection) 2 - Positioned Primarily by Trilateration 3 - Positioned Primarily by Traverse A - Positioned Primarily by Interferometric Satellite Relative Positioning E-1 TYPE CODES OF SUPPLEMENTAL STATIONS: 4 - Positioned Primarily by Triangulation 5 - Positioned Primarily by Trilateration 6 - Positioned Primarily by Traverse 7 - Positioned by Intersection (Note: 1 if Main-Scheme Station) 8 - Positioned by Resection B - Positioned Primarily by Interferometric Satellite Relative Positioning ORDER-AND-TYPE (OT) CODES OF RECOVERABLE HORIZONTAL CONTROL POINTS - monumented (or otherwise permanently marked) stations, published as indicated. SURVEY PROCEDURES STATION TYPE OT PUBLISHE D ************************** ************ ** **** **** * MONUMENTED STATIONS POSITIONED BY GPS GPS Procedures Main-Scheme AA AA-Order GPS Procedures Main-Scheme BA B-Order GPS Procedures Supplemental BB B- Order STATIONS OF THE TRANS-CONTINENTAL TRAVERSE (TCT) TCT Procedures Main-Scheme * 03 lst- Order TCT Procedures Supplemental ** 06 lst-Order MONUMENTED STATIONS POSITIONED PRIMARILY BY TRIANGULATION lst-Order Main-Scheme 11 lst-Order lst-Order Supplemental 14 2nd- Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 21 2nd-Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Supplemental 24 3rd- Order 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 31 3rd- Order Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 41 Low- Order MONUMENTED STATIONS POSITIONED PRIMARILY BY TRILATERATION lst-Order Main-Scheme 12 lst-Order lst-Order Supplemental 15 2nd- Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 22 2nd-Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Supplemental 25 2nd- Order 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 32 3rd- Order Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 42 Low- Order MONUMENTED STATIONS POSITIONED PRIMARILY BY TRAVERSE lst-Order Main-Scheme 13 lst-Order lst-Order Supplemental 16 2nd- Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 23 2nd-Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Supplemental 26 2nd- Order 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 33 3rd- Order Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 43 Low- Order ------------------------------------------------------------------ --------- * Main-Scheme Station - one which is essential to the survey scheme. ** Supplemental Station - one which is incidental to the survey scheme. E-2 SURVEY PROCEDURES STATION TYPE OT PUBLISHED ************************** ************ ** ********* MONUMENTED STATIONS POSITIONED BY INTERSECTION lst-Order Main-Scheme 11 lst-Order lst-Order Supplemental 17 2nd- Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 21 2nd-Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Supplemental 27 3rd-Order 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 37 3rd-Order Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 47 Low- Order MONUMENTED STATIONS POSITIONED BY RESECTION lst-Order All Stations 18 2nd- Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 28 2nd-Order 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 38 3rd-Order Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 48 Low- Order ORDER-AND-TYPE (OT) CODES OF NONRECOVERABLE HORIZONTAL CONTROL POINTS -temporary or auxiliary points, not permanently marked, which must be carried in the files for network integrity purposes. These horizontal control points will not be published. SURVEY PROCEDURES STATION TYPE OT ************************* ************ ** STATIONS OF THE TRANS-CONTINENTAL TRAVERSE (TCT) - must be monumented. UNMARKED STATIONS POSITIONED PRIMARILY BY TRIANGULATION lst-Order Main-Scheme* 51 lst-Order Supplemental** 54 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 61 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Supplemental 64 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 71 Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 81 UNMARKED STATIONS POSITIONED PRIMARILY BY TRILATERATION 1st-Order Main-Scheme 52 1st-Order Supplemental 55 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 62 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Supplemental 65 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 72 Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 82 ------------------------------------------------------------------ ------ * Main-Scheme Station - one which is essential to the survey scheme. ** Supplemental Station - one which is incidental to the survey scheme. E-3 SURVEY PROCEDURES STATION TYPE OT ************************** ************ ** UNMARKED STATIONS POSITIONED PRIMARILY BY TRAVERSE 1st-Order Main-Scheme 53 1st-Order Supplemental 56 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 63 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Supplemental 66 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 73 Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 83 UNMARKED STATIONS POSITIONED BY INTERSECTION lst-Order Main-Scheme 51 lst-Order Supplemental 57 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 61 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Supplemental 67 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 77 Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 87 UNMARKED STATIONS POSITIONED BY RESECTION lst-Order All Stations 58 2nd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 68 3rd-Order (Class I or II) All Stations 78 Lower-Than-3rd-Order All Stations 88 ORDER-AND-TYPE (OT) CODES OF UNMONUMENTED RECOVERABLE LANDMARKS - normally positioned as supplemental low-accuracy control points, possibly used as main-scheme triangulation stations (e.g., a well-defined church spire used as the unoccupied center of a central-point figure in a triangulation network), published as indicated. SURVEY PROCEDURES STATION TYPE OT PUBLISHED ************************* ************ ** ********* LANDMARKS USED AS MAIN-SCHEME TRIANGULATION STATIONS lst-Order Main-Scheme 11 lst- Order 2nd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 21 2nd-Order 3rd-Order (Class I or II) Main-Scheme 31 3rd-Order Lower-Than-3rd-Order Main-Scheme 41 Low- Order LANDMARKS POSITIONED AS SUPPLEMENTAL CONTROL POINTS Any-Order Traverse Supplemental 43 Low- Order Any-Order Intersection Supplemental 47 Low- Order Any-Order Resection Supplemental 48 Low- Order E-4 ANNEX F NGS SURVEY EQUIPMENT CODES 000-099 - Gravity Instruments and Satellite Systems 100-199 - Theodolites and Transits 200-299 - Leveling Instruments 300-399 - Leveling Rods and Staffs 400-499 - Steel and Invar Tapes 500-599 - Lightwave Distance-Measuring Equipment 600-699 - Infrared Distance-Measuring Equipment 700-799 - Microwave Distance-Measuring Equipment 800-899 - Total Station-Measuring Equipment 900-999 - Other Miscellaneous Surveying Equipment The purpose of the National Geodetic Survey (NGS) Survey Equipment Code is to provide a three-digit identifier for each item of survey equipment commonly used in connection with horizontal and vertical control surveys in the United States. The code has been devised in such a manner that the first digit of the three-digit identifier would indicate a specific category of survey equipment. Accordingly, there are ten broad survey equipment categories, the first of which (000-099) is reserved for gravity instruments and satellite systems, and the last (900-999) is reserved for miscellaneous survey equipment which does not fit into any of the specific categories. The ten survey equipment categories are listed above. Within each category, specific items and/or classes of survey equipment have been grouped into subcategories and assigned unique three- digit code numbers. The grouping of survey equipment into subcategories is intended to reflect the level of accuracy attained in common usage of the specific items or classes of survey equipment in question and not necessarily their intrinsic or potential accuracy. In each category and subcategory, a code is provided for items of survey equipment which do not appear among the items listed or which are not specifically identified. The respective lists of survey equipment are not all-inclusive, and series of numbers have been skipped in each category and/or subcategory to allow for additions. F-1 CODE MANUFACTURER INSTRUMENT MODEL OR TYPE **** ************ ************************ 000-099 - GRAVITY INSTRUMENTS AND SATELLITE SYSTEMS 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� 000 Unspecified Unknown Instrument or System 001-009 - Reserved for Absolute Gravity Devices 010-029 - Gravimeters 010 Unspecified Gravimeter 011 Frost Frost Gravimeter 012 North American North American Gravimeter 013 LaCoste-Romberg Early Models 014 LaCoste-Romberg G-Meter 015 LaCoste-Romberg D-Meter 016 Worden Unspecified 017 Worden Uncompensated Model 018 Worden Temperature-Compensated Model 019 Scintrex CG-2 030-049 - Doppler Satellite Tracking Systems 030 Unspecified Doppler Satellite Tracking System 031 Magnavox Geoceiver or Geoceiver II 032 JMR JMR-1 033 ITT ITT 5500 034 Magnavox MX-702A 035 APL Tranet 036 Canadian Marconi CMA 722A 037 Canadian Marconi CMA 722B 038 Magnavox MX-1502 050-099 - GPS Satellite Tracking Systems 050 Unspecified GPS Satellite Tracking System 051 Western Atlas Intl. MacrometerR V1000 052 Western Atlas Intl. MacrometerTM II 053 Texas Instruments, Inc. TI-4100 (GESAR Software) 054 Texas Instruments, Inc. TI-4100 (TI EPROM Software) 055 Trimble Navigation, Ltd. 4000 series 056 Leica-Wild-Magnavox WM101/WM102/GPS-System 200 057 ISTAC, Inc. Model 2002TM 058 EDO Canada, Ltd. EDO JMR GeoTrak 059 Motorola, Inc. Eagle series 060 Norstar Instruments, Ltd. Norstar 1000 061 SERCEL Inc.- USA TR5S, NR101, NR104 062 Western Atlas Intl. MINI-MACTM F-2 CODE MANUFACTURER INSTRUMENT MODEL OR TYPE **** ************ ************************ 050-099 - GPS Satellite Tracking Systems - Continued 063 Ashtech, Inc. XII series 064 Allen Osborne Assoc., Inc. Rogue series 065 NovAtel Commun., Ltd. NovAtel GPSCardTM 066 Topcon America Corp. GP-R1, GP-R1D 067 Del Norte Technology, Inc. 1008,1012 068 Magellan NAV5000 PRO 100-199 - THEODOLITES AND TRANSITS 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴 100 Unspecified Theodolite or Transit 101-119 - Instruments of Geodetic Astronomy 101 Various Zenith Telescope 102 Various Meridian Telescope, Transit, or Circle 103 Various Bamberg-Type Astronomic Transit 104 Wild T-4 105 Kern DKM3-A 106 Gigas-Askania TPR 107 Zeiss/Jena Theo-Q02 120-139 - First-Order (Geodetic) Theodolites 120 Unspecified 0."1, 0."2, 0."5 Direct- Reading Theodolite 121 Various Ramsden-Type 30, 24, 12-inch Theodolite 122 Various USC&GS Parkhurst 123 Wild T-3 124 Kern DKM3 125 CTS/Vickers Geodetic Tavistock 126 Hilger-Watts Microptic No. 3 140-159 - Second-Order (Universal) Theodolites 140 Unspecified 1", 2", 5" Direct-Reading Theodolite 141 Various USC&GS 7-inch Repeating Theodolite 142 Wild T-2 or T-2E 143 Kern DKM2 or DKM2-A 144 CTS/Vickers V-400 Series 145 Hilger-Watts Microptic No. 2 146 Dietzgen/Askania A2 or A2E 147 Zeiss/Oberkochen Th2 148 Zeiss/Jena Theo-010 or Theo-OlOA 149 Nikon NT-3 or NT-5 150 Sokkisha TM-lA 151 Geotec TH-01 F-3 CODE MANUFACTURER INSTRUMENT MODEL OR TYPE **** ************ ************************ 160-169 - Third-Order (Construction) Theodolites 160 Unspecified Construction Theodolite or Transit 161 Various 10" Direct-Reading Theodolite or Transit 162 Various 20" Direct-Reading Theodolite or Transit 163 Various 30" Direct-Reading Theodolite or Transit 164 Various 1' Direct-Reading Theodolite or Transit 170-179 - 30' or Coarser Angulation Devices 170 Unspecified 30' or Coarser Angulation Device 171 Various 30' or Coarser Theodolite or Transit 172 Various 30' or Coarser Compass Device 173 Various 30' or Coarser Protractor 180-199 - Gyroscopic Theodolites 180 Unspecified Gyro-Theodolite 200-299 - LEVELING INSTRUMENTS 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴 200 Unspecified Leveling Instrument 210-249 - Precise (Geodetic) Levels 210 Unspecified Precise Level 211-230 - Precise Spirit (Bubble-Vial) Levels 211 Various USC&GS Fischer 212 USC&GS Stampfer-Type (1877-1899) 213 Buff & Berger Van Orden or Mendenhall 214 Various Kern-Type (US Engineers) 215 Zeiss Ni-III or Ni-A 216 Zeiss/Jena Ni-004 217 Wild N-3 218 Kern NK3-M 219 Breithaupt NABON 220 Fennel Precise Level 221 Hilger-Watts Precise Level 222 CTS/Vickers Geodetic Level 223 Sokkisha PL-5 224 Keuffel & Esser Precise Level F-4 CODE MANUFACTURER INSTRUMENT MODEL OR TYPE **** ************ ************************ 231-249 - Precise Compensator (Self-Aligning) Levels 231 Zeiss/Oberkochen Nil 232 Zeiss/Oberkochen Ni2 233 Zeiss/Jena Ni-002 234 Zeiss/Jena Ni-007 235 Wild NA-2 or NAK-2 236 Salmoiraghi 5190 237 MOM Ni-A31 238 Sokkisha B-1 239 Kern GK2-A 240 Topcon AT-D2 241 Zeiss Ni-005A 242 Leica/Wild NA2000 or NA2002 Digital Level 243 Leica/Wild NA3000 Digital Level 250-289 - Engineer's (Universal) Levels 250 Unspecified Engineer's Level 251-270 - Engineer's Spirit (Bubble-Vial) Levels 251 Various 18-inch Dumpy-Type Level 252 Various 18-inch Wye-Type Level 253 Zeiss Ni-II or Ni-B 254 Zeiss/Jena Ni-030 255 Wild N-2 or NK-2 256 Kern NK3 257 Kern NK2 258 Kern GK23 259 Breithaupt NAKRE 260 Fennel Engineer's Level 261 Hilger-Watts Engineer's Level 262 CTS/Vickers Engineer's Level 263 Salmoiraghi 5160 Series 264 Nikon S2 265 Sokkisha TTL-5 or TTL-6 266 Geotec L-11 or L-21 271-289 - Engineer's Compensator (Self-Aligning) Levels 271 Zeiss/Oberkochen Ni22 272 Zeiss/Jena Ni-025 273 Kern GKl-A 274 Breithaupt AUTOM or AUCIR 275 Fennel AUING 276 Hilger-Watts AUTOSET 277 Salmoiraghi 5173, 5175, or 5180 278 Ertel INA 279 Nikon AE Series 280 Sokkisha B-2 281 Geotec AL-2 or AL-23 282 Sokkisha C-1 F-5 CODE MANUFACTURER INSTRUMENT MODEL OR TYPE **** ************ ************************ 290-299 - Builder's (Construction) Levels 290 Unspecified Builder's Level 291 Various Builder's Dumpy-Type Spirit Level 292 Various Builder's Tilting Spirit Level 293 Various Builder's Compensator Level 300-399 - LEVELING RODS AND STAFFS 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴 300 Unspecified Leveling Rod or Staff 310-349 - Precise (Geodetic) Metal-Scale Rods 310 Unspecified Precise Metal-Scale Rod 311 USC&GS USC&GS Pre-Invar Rods 312 USC&GS Invar (Introduced in 1916) 313 Zeiss/Oberkochen Invar 314 Zeiss/Jena Invar 315 Wild Invar 316 Kern Invar 317 Breithaupt Invar 318 Fennel Invar 319 Hilger-Watts Invar 320 CTS/Vickers Nilex 321 Salmoiraghi Invar 322 Keuffel & Esser Invar 323 Gurley Invar 324 Renick Invar (checkerboard) 325 USGS Invar (Metal-Frame) 340 Nedo Invar 341 Nestler Invar 350-389 - Engineer's Wooden Rods and Staffs 350 Unspecified Engineer's Wooden Rod or Staff 351 Various US Engineers 12-foot Rigid Rod 352 Various US Geological Survey 12-foot Rigid Rod 390-399 - Builder's Rods and Staffs 390 Unspecified Builder's Rod or Staff 391 Various Philadelphia Rod 392 Various Chicago Rod 393 Various California Rod 394 Various 12-foot Folding Rod 395 Leica/Wild 3-piece Fiberglass (Bar-Code) Rod 396 Leica/Wild Invar (Bar-Code) Rod F-6 CODE MANUFACTURER INSTRUMENT MODEL OR TYPE **** ************ ************************ 400-499 - STEEL AND INVAR TAPES 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� 400 Unspecified Steel or Invar Tape 420-439 - Calibrated Invar Tapes 420 Unspecified Calibrated Invar Tape 421 Various 25-meter Calibrated Invar Tape 422 Various 50-meter Calibrated Invar Tape 423 Various 100-foot Calibrated Invar Tape 440-459 - Calibrated Steel Tapes 440 Unspecified Calibrated Steel Tape 441 Various 30-meter Calibrated Steel Tape 442 Various 100-foot Calibrated Steel Tape 443 Various 300-foot Calibrated Steel Tape 460-479 - Uncalibrated Steel Tapes 460 Unspecified Uncalibrated Steel Tape or Ruler 461 Various 30-meter Uncalibrated Steel Tape 462 Various 100-foot Uncalibrated Steel Tape 463 Various 300-foot Uncalibrated Steel Tape 500-599 - LIGHTWAVE DISTANCE-MEASURING EQUIPMENT 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴 500 Unspecified Lightwave Electro-Optical DME 501 AGA Geodimeter Model 1 502 AGA Geodimeter Model 2 or 2A 503 AGA Geodimeter Model 3 504 AGA Geodimeter Model 4A, 4B, or 4D 505 AGA Geodimeter Model 4L or 4L 10A 506 AGA Geodimeter Model 6 507 AGA Geodimeter Model 6A 508 AGA Geodimeter Model 6B 509 AGA Geodimeter Model 6BL 510 AGA Geodimeter Model 7T 511 AGA Geodimeter Model 700 or 710 512 AGA Geodimeter Model 76 or 78 513 AGA Geodimeter Model 8 531 Keuffel & Esser LSE Ranger I, II, or III 532 Keuffel & Esser LSE Ranger IV 533 Keuffel & Esser LSE Ranger V 534 Keuffel & Esser LSE Rangemaster 535 Keuffel & Esser Rangemaster II 536 Keuffel & Esser Uniranger F-7 CODE MANUFACTURER INSTRUMENT MODEL OR TYPE **** ************ ************************ 500-599 - LIGHTWAVE DISTANCE-MEASURING EQUIPMENT - CONTINUED 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴 541 Spectra-Physics Geodolite 3G 542 Spectra-Physics Transitlite LT-3 551 Kern ME-3000 Mekometer 561 Cubic Percision Rangemaster III 562 Cubic Percision Ranger V-A 571 Leitz Red 2L 600-699 - INFRARED DISTANCE-MEASURING EQUIPMENT 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� 600 Unspecified Infrared Electro-Optical DME 601 AGA Geodimeter Model 12 or 12A 602 AGA Geodimeter Model 78,110,114,116 603 AGA Geodimeter Model 210 or 220 604 AGA Geodimeter Model 120 or 216 605 AGA Geodimeter Model 6000 606 AGA Geodimeter Model 14 or 14A 607 AGA Geodimeter Model 112 or 122 611 Plessey Tellurometer CD-6 612 Plessey Tellurometer MA-100 613 Plessey Tellurometer MA-200 616 Lietz Red Mini 2 617 Lietz Red 2A 621 Wild Distomat DI-3 Series 622 Wild Distomat DI-10 Series 623 Wild Distomat DI-4L 624 Wild Distomat DI-5 or DI-5S 625 Wild DI 1000 or 1000L 626 Wild DI 2000 627 Wild DI 3000 (time-pulse) 628 Leica/Wild DI 2002 629 Leica/Wild DI 1600 631 Kern DM-500 632 Kern DM-1000 or DM-2000 633 Kern DM 104 or DM 150 634 Kern DM 503 or DM 550 635 Kern DM 504 641 Zeiss/Oberkochen SM 11 or RegElta 14 642 Zeiss/Oberkochen Eldi Series 643 Zeiss/Oberkochen SM 4 651 Keuffel & Esser LSE Microranger or Microranger II 652 Keuffel & Esser LSE Autoranger 661 Hewlett-Packard 3800A or 3800B 662 Hewlett-Packard 3805 or 3810 663 Hewlett-Packard 3808A 667 Pentax MD-14 or MD-20 671 Cubic Precision Cubitape DM-60 672 Cubic Precision HDM-70 F-8 CODE MANUFACTURER INSTRUMENT MODEL OR TYPE **** ************ ************************ 600-699 - INFRARED DISTANCE-MEASURING EQUIPMENT - CONTINUED 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� 673 Cubic Precision DM-80 or DM-81 674 Cubic Precision AutoRanger II 675 Cubic Precision Beetle 500 or 500S 676 Cubic Precision Beetle 1000 or l000S 681 Carrol & Reed Akkuranger Mark I 685 Topcon DM-C2 686 Topcon DM-A2 or DM-A3 687 Topcon DM-S2 or DM-S3 688 Topcon GTS-2R 693 Nikon ND 20 or ND 21 or ND 26 694 Nikon ND 30 or ND 31 700-799 - MICROWAVE DISTANCE-MEASURING EQUIPMENT 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴 700 Unspecified Microwave Electro-Magnetic DME 701 Plessey Tellurometer MRA-1 702 Plessey Tellurometer MRA-2 703 Plessey Tellurometer MRA-3 704 Plessey Tellurometer MRA-4 705 Plessey Tellurometer MRA-5 709 Plessey Tellurometer CA-1000 731 Wild Distomat DI-50 732 Wild Distomat DI-60 741 Cubic Electrotape DM-20 751 Fairchild Microchain 800-899 - TOTAL STATION-MEASURING EQUIPMENT 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� 800 Unspecified Total Station 801-860 - Self Contained Instruments 801 Leitz SDM3F or SDM3FR 802 Leitz SET 2 803 Leitz SET 3 804 Leitz SET 4 810 Nikon NTD-4 811 Nikon NTD-2S 812 Nikon DTM1 813 Nikon DTM5 816 Geotronics AB Geodimeter 142 817 AGA Geodimeter 140 821 Pentax PX20D 822 Pentax PX10D 823 Pentax PX06D 824 Pentax PTS-10 F-9 CODE MANUFACTURER INSTRUMENT MODEL OR TYPE **** ************ ************************ 801-860 - Self Contained Instruments - Continued 825 Pentax PTS-1110 826 Pentax PTS-1105 830 Topcon GTS or GTS-2R 831 Topcon GTS-3B or GTS-3C 832 Topcon ET-1 or ET-2 833 Topcon GTS-4A or GTS-4B 840 Wild TC1600 841 Wild TC2000 842 Leica/Wild TC2002 850 Zeiss ELTA 3 851 Zeiss ELTA 4 856 Hewlett-Packard 3820A 861-899 - Modular Instruments 861 Kern E1/DM504 862 Kern E2/DM504 871 Leitz DT2/Red Mini 2 872 Leitz DT2/Red 2A or Red 2L 881 Wild T1000 882 Wild T1600 883 Wild T2000 or T2000S 884 Wild T2002 885 Leica/Wild T3000 900-999 - OTHER MISCELLANEOUS SURVEYING EQUIPMENT 袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴袴� 900 Unspecified Miscellaneous Surveying Equipment F-10 ANNEX G ELLIPSOID HEIGHT ORDER-AND-CLASS (OC) CODES This annex contains ellipsoid height Order and Class (OC) codes. These two-digit codes are used to classify each ellipsoid height value observed and adjusted at horizontal control points. The first character of the OC code indicates the order and the second character the class, in accordance with the following draft standards for classifying ellipsoid height determinations: b = Maximum Height OC Code Classification Difference Accuracy 11 First Order, Class I 0.5 12 First Order, Class II 0.7 21 Second Order, Class I 1.0 22 Second Order, Class II 1.3 31 Third Order, Class I 2.0 32 Third Order, Class II 3.0 41 Fourth Order, Class I 6.0 42 Fourth Order, Class II 15.0 51 Fifth Order, Class I 30.0 52 Fifth Order, Class II 60.0 The ellipsoid height difference accuracy (b) is computed from a minimally constrained, correctly weighted, least squares adjustment by the formula: b = s / sqrt(d) where: d = horizontal distance in kilometers between control points. s = propagated standard deviation of ellipsoid height difference in millimeters between control points obtained from the least squares adjustment. The following table lists the standard errors of ellipsoid height differences at various distances: Standard Error (mm) OC Code Distance (km) 11 12 21 22 31 32 41 42 51 52 1 .5 .7 1.0 1.3 2 3 6 15 30 60 5 1.1 1.6 2.2 2.9 4.5 6.7 13 34 67 134 10 1.6 2.2 3.2 4.1 6.3 9.5 19 47 95 190 25 2.5 3.5 5.0 6.5 10 15 30 75 150 300 50 3.5 4.9 7.1 9.2 14 21 42 106 212 424 75 4.3 6.1 8.7 11 17 26 52 130 260 520 100 5.0 7.0 10 13 20 30 60 150 300 600 G-1 INTENTIONALLY BLANK G-2 ANNEX I SUMMARY OF CODES USED IN GEODETIC SURVEY POINT DESCRIPTIONS This annex contains lists of codes that are used in the preparation of station descriptions and recovery notes pertaining to geodetic control points. The use of these codes is explained in Chapter 3, entitled GEODETIC SURVEY POINT DESCRIPTIVE (GEOD DESC) DATA. DR CODE - used to identify the descriptive data by type. ENTRY DEFINITION D An original description of a newly set mark. R Everything else (includes recovered, not recovered, destroyed, andthe first report to NGS of a pre-existing mark not in the NGS data base). RECOVERY TYPE CODE (optional) - used to classify recovery descriptions relative to existing information residing in the agency data base. ENTRY DEFINITION F A full recovery description of a survey point which you think is not included in the NGS Data Base. M A recovery description which does not contain a complete textual description of the mark, but may contain updates or modifications to the most current description. This is used when a mark is destroyed or not recovered, or when the text of the previous description of this mark in the NGS data base requires no update (i.e., the text is in accord with current practice, and the situation at the mark has not changed). T A complete re-description of a mark which is included in the NGS data base. SPECIAL APPLICATIONS CODE - used to represent certain specialized information about the control point. ENTRY DEFINITION F Fault monitoring site N Site not suitable for receiving satellite signals O Other (see descriptive text) P Site determined suitable for receiving satellite signals in connection with geodetic surveys T Tidal station I-1 SETTING CODE - used to complement all MARKER TYPE CODES except Landmark stations. SHALLOW SETTINGS (LESS THAN 10 FT DEEP) DEFAULT STABILITY CODE 00 - setting not listed - see description D 01 - unspecified shallow D 02 - driven into the ground D 03 - imbedded in the ground D 04 - surrounded by a mass of concrete D 05 - set into the top of an irregular mass of concrete D 07 - set into the top of a round concrete monument C 08 - set into the top of a square concrete monument C set into the top of a prefabricated concrete post ... 09 - ... imbedded in the ground D 10 - ... surrounded by a mass of concrete D 11 - ... imbedded in a mass of concrete C set into a prefabricated concrete block ... 12 - ... imbedded in the ground D 13 - ... surrounded by a mass of concrete D 14 - ... imbedded in a mass of concrete C 15 - a metal rod driven into the ground D 16 - a metal rod with base plate buried/screwed into the ground C set into the top of a metal pipe ... 17 - ... driven into the ground D 18 - ... imbedded in the ground D 19 - ... surrounded by a mass of concrete D 20 - ... imbedded in a mass of concrete C set in concrete at the center of a clay tile pipe ... 21 - ... fastened to a wooden pile driven into marsh D 22 - ... imbedded in the ground D 23 - ... surrounded by a mass of concrete D 24 - ... imbedded in a mass of concrete C SETTINGS IN STRUCTURES 30 - light structures (other than listed below) D 31 - pavements (street, sidewalk, curb, apron, etc.) D 32 - retaining walls, etc.= concrete ledge C 33 - piles and poles (e.g. spike in utility pole) D 34 - footings/foundation walls of small/medium structures C 35 - mat foundations, etc. = concrete slab C 36 - massive structures (other than listed below) B 37 - massive retaining walls B 38 - abutments and piers of large bridges B 39 - tunnels B 40 - massive structures with deep foundations A 41 - large structures with foundations on bedrock A UNSLEEVED DEEP SETTINGS (10 FT. + ) 45 - unspecified depth C 46 - copper-clad steel rod B 47 - galvanized steel pipe B 48 - galvanized steel rod B 49 - stainless steel rod B 50 - aluminum alloy rod B I-2 SLEEVED DEEP SETTINGS (10 FT. +) DEFAULT STABILITY CODE 55 - unspecified pipe/rod in sleeve B 56 - copper-clad steel rod in sleeve B 57 - galvanized steel pipe in sleeve A 58 - galvanized steel rod in sleeve A 59 - stainless steel rod in sleeve A 60 - aluminum alloy rod in sleeve A SETTINGS IN ROCKS OR BOULDERS 65 - unspecified rock B 66 - in rock outcrop A 67 - set into a drill hole in rock outcrop A 68 - ... and marked by a chiseled cross A 69 - ... and marked by a chiseled triangle A 70 - ... and marked by a chiseled circle A 71 - ... and marked by a chiseled square A 73 - in a rock ledge A 74 - set into a drill hole in a rock ledge A 75 - ... at the intersection of two chiseled lines A 76 - ... and marked by a chiseled triangle A 77 - ... and marked by a chiseled circle A 78 - ... and marked by a chiseled square A 80 - in a boulder C 81 - set into a drill hole in a boulder C 82 - ... and marked by a chiseled cross C 83 - ... and marked by a chiseled triangle C 84 - ... and marked by a chiseled circle C 85 - ... and marked by a chiseled square C 87 - in a partially exposed boulder C 88 - set into a drill hole in a partially exposed boulder C 89 - ... and marked by a chiseled cross C 90 - ... and marked by a chiseled triangle C 91 - ... and marked by a chiseled circle C 92 - ... and marked by a chiseled square C 93 - in bedrock A 94 - set in a drill hole in bedrock A set into a mass of concrete ... 95 - ... in a depression in rock outcrop A 96 - ... in a depression in a rock ledge A 97 - ... in a depression in a boulder C 98 - ... in a depression in a partially exposed boulder C 99 - ... in a depression in the bedrock A I-3 MARKER TYPE CODES - (Not for Landmark stations) A - aluminum marker (other than a disk) E - earthenware pot B - bolt F - flange-encased rod C - cap-and-bolt pair G - glass bottle DA - astro pier H - drill hole DB - bench mark disk I - metal rod DD - survey disk J - earthenware jug DE - traverse station disk K - clay tile pipe DG - gravity station disk L - gravity plug DH - horizontal control disk M - ammo shell casing DJ - tidal station disk N - nail DK - gravity reference mark disk O - chiseled circle DM - magnetic station disk P - pipe cap DO - unspecified disk type (see text) Q - chiseled square DP - base line pier disk R - rivet DQ - calibration base line disk S - spike DR - reference mark disk T - chiseled triangle DS - triangulation station disk U - concrete post DT - topographic station disk V - stone monument DU - boundary marker disk W - unmonumented DV - vertical control disk X - chiseled cross DW - NOS hydrographic survey disk Y - drill hole in brick DZ - azimuth mark disk Z - see description I-4 MARKER TYPE CODES (Landmark stations) Landmarks Tanks and Towers: Not Listed: 00 - see description 51 - tank 52 - standpipe tank Natural Objects: 53 - elevated tank 54 - water tower 01 - lone tree 55 - tower 02 - conspicuous rock 56 - skeleton tower 03 - mountain peak 57 - lookout tower 04 - rock pinnacle 58 - control tower 05 - rock awash Waterfront Landmarks Miscellaneous and Visual Aids Landmarks: to Navigation: 61 - pole 11 - piling 62 - flagpole 12 - dolphin 63 - stack 13 - lighthouse 64 - silo 14 - navigation light 65 - grain elevator 15 - range marker 66 - windmill 16 - daybeacon 67 - oil derrick 17 - flag tower 68 - commercial sign 18 - signal mast 69 - regulatory sign 70 - monument Aeronautical and 71 - boundary monument Electronic Aids 72 - cairn to Navigation: 73 - lookout house 74 - large cross 21 - airport beacon 75 - belfry 22 - airway beacon 23 - VOR antenna Features of 24 - RBN antenna a Building: 25 - radar antenna 26 - spherical radome 81 - gable 27 - radio range mast 82 - finial 28 - LORAN mast 83 - flagstaff 84 - lightning rod Broadcast and 85 - chimney Communications 86 - cupola Facilities: 87 - dome 88 - observatory dome 41 - antenna mast 89 - spire 42 - radio/TV mast 90 - church spire 43 - radio/TV tower 91 - church cross 44 - microwave mast 92 - antenna 45 - microwave tower 93 - microwave antenna 94 - rooftop ventilator 95 - rooftop blockhouse I-5 MAGNETIC CODE - used to indicate the magnetic property of the mark or monument. A - steel rod adjacent to monument B - bar magnet imbedded in monument H - bar magnet set in drill hole I - marker is a steel rod M - marker equipped with bar magnet N - no magnetic material O - other - see description P - marker is a steel pipe R - steel rod imbedded in monument S - steel spike imbedded in monument T - steel spike adjacent to monument TRANSPORTATION CODE - used to indicate the mode of transportation used (or to be used) to reach the station or to reach the location where packing begins, if packing to the station site is required. A - light airplane B - boat C - car (or station wagon) F - float airplane H - helicopter O - other (see descriptive text) P - light truck (pickup, carryall, etc.) T - truck (larger than 3/4 ton) W - tracked vehicle (Weasel, Snowcat, etc.) X - four-wheel drive vehicle AGENCY CODE - used to indicate the type of survey organization which established or recovered the geodetic control point. A - National Agencies B - Inter-State or Inter-Province Agencies C - State, Province, Commonwealth, and Territorial Agencies D - County Agencies E - Municipal Agencies (Cities) F - Inter-City and Inter-County Agencies G - Railroads H - Utility and Natural Resource Companies I - Surveying, Engineering, and Construction Industry J - Educational Institutions K - Professional and Amateur Associations L - Miscellaneous Commercial or Private Firms M - Non-Specific Designators CONDITION CODE - used to indicate the condition of the monument or mark each time the geodetic control point is recovered. G - Good N - Not Recovered, Not Found P - Poor, Disturbed, Mutilated, Requires Maintenance X - Destroyed (See Note Below) I-6 STABILITY CODE - may be entered in the *26* coded record to override the software default codes in the descriptions for publication. CODE DEFINITION A Monuments of the most reliable nature, expected to hold their elevations very well. B Monuments which generally hold their elevations fairly well. C Monuments which may be affected by surface ground movements. D Monuments of questionable or unknown vertical stability. I-7 INTENTIONALLY BLANK I-8 ANNEX K PROJECT REPORT INSTRUCTIONS Information concerning data preparation and transmittal to NGS is found in Chapter 1, HORIZONTAL CONTROL (HZTL) DATA, in Chapter 5, VERTICAL CONTROL (VERT) DATA, and in Chapter 9, GRAVITY CONTROL (GRAV) DATA. The section titled "Media for Submitting Data" describes procedures for packaging of the data as well as information required in the letter of transmittal pertaining to the floppy disks or magnetic tape. The transmittal letter should inventory the total contents of the shipment. In addition, special instructions for submitting GPS relative positioning data to the NGS are provided in ANNEX L. The most important supporting document that should be included with the shipment is the project report. The project report is the permanent hardcopy record that summarizes project accomplishments. It describes the general project goals and the equipment and procedures employed to meet specific conditions and requirements. The report provides information useful for verification and adjustment, including detailed explanation of unusual or special features of the project. The recommended content of a project report follows. The project sketch is an attachment to the report. For projects totally or partially supported by NGS, a different report may be required. Report Outline for a Horizontal Control Project I. Title page. List the type of report (Horizontal Control), order-class of survey, project title including the state, any appropriate identifying control number, beginning and ending dates of field work, agency name, and the name of the project director (supervisor). The project title should include the locality of the survey (e.g., Brainerd to Crosby, MN). II. The report should address the following topics: A. Location. Briefly describe the project area, indicating each state and the counties in which the project is located. B. Scope 1. Purpose. State the purpose of the survey and the extent to which the requirements were satisfied. 2. Specifications. State the specifications which were followed and the methods used. 3. Monumentation. Describe the monumentation that was established and recovered. K-1 4. Instrumentation. List the instruments and equipment used. For EDM, describe the instrument calibration and how the calibration and refractive index corrections were applied. Include model and serial numbers of all instrumentation. 5. Special equipment. List any special equipment used. Examples include Bilby towers, helicopters, wooden stands, Peck towers, etc. 6. Existing control. List all existing horizontal control contained in the project area, NGS-published or otherwise. For NGS control, list the quadrangle and station numbers. Also, include any bench marks used to control the elevations. For existing horizontal control not connected to the new survey, include an explanation of why connections were not made. C. Comments (THIS IS THE MOST IMPORTANT SECTION OF THE REPORT!) 1. Reconnaissance. When a reconnaissance plan was submitted and approved by NGS prior to beginning the field measurements, describe any changes from the original reconnaissance and the reasons for the changes. 2. Specifications. Describe any deviations from the specifica- tions used and the reason for such deviations. 3. Computations. Describe which computations were performed, the coordinate system used (e.g., latitude and longitude, state plane, or local rectangular grid), and what type of adjustment, if any, was performed. 4. Problems. Describe any problems encountered such as: moved or "suspect" marks, bad check angles, and poor position, azimuth, and length checks. 5. Recommendations. Describe any recommendations for future field measurements and/or recomputation of published data. D. Statistics 1. Points. List the number of points positioned grouped by type of mark such as: new main scheme, old main scheme, and/or landmark stations. 2. Observations. List the number of observations and their precision grouped by type of observation such as: horizontal directions, zenith distances, vertical angles, distances, and astronomic azimuths. K-2 3. Closures a. Triangle. List the number of triangles, the average triangle closure, and the maximum triangle closure. For the maximum triangle closure, identify the three vertices. b. Traverse. For each traverse closure, identify the traverse segment and list the azimuth closure, the position closure, the total length, the number of courses, and the minimum course length. 4. Reoccupations. List any reoccupied stations, the lines reobserved, the reason for the remeasurement. 5. Check measurements. List comparisons between previously observed angles (check angles) and/or distances with current observations. Also, list the average and maximum disagreements. 6. Fixed measurements. List comparisons between computed observations (computed from existing coordinate data) and current observations. Also, list the average and maximum disagreements. E. Status 1. Records. Describe the current status and future disposition of the station and observation records. If submitted to NGS, they will be archived in a Federal records center. 2. Contact. Provide the name and telephone number of a person to contact regarding questions which may arise during NGS processing of the data. III. Attachment to the report. Include as an attachment to the project report an original and three copies of a sketch of the project area. The sketch must show station names and lines which were observed for angles and distances. To ensure that reproductions and film re- ductions of sketches are of optimum quality, sketches should not be drawn on maps. Although linen, mylar or vellum are desirable, it is not required. A 24" x 36" sketch is preferred, but the size should not exceed 36" x 48". An overview of the project geometry is one objective of the sketch, and, therefore, a scaled drawing with tick marks is required. Symbols and notations explained in C&GS Special Publication 247, (1959: pp. 6,191, and 192) are suggested. The names of main scheme stations will be placed adjacent to the station symbol. Supplemental stations may be numbered for reference to a list of names. Submitting agency or organization name should appear in a title block. The sketch may be handlettered. K-3 Report Outline for a Vertical Control Project I. Title page. List the type of report (Vertical Control), order and class of survey, project title including the state, any appropriate identifying number (for projects that have been assigned HGZ accession numbers by NGS, the numbers should be listed on the title page), beginning and ending dates of both mark setting and leveling, agency name, and the name of the project director (supervisor). The project title should include the locality of the project. II. The report should address the following topics: A. Location. Briefly describe the project area, including state or states in which it is located. Note the number of lines, their general configuration, and their total distance. B. Scope 1. Purpose. State the purpose of the survey and the extent to which the requirements were satisfied. 2. Specifications. State the specifications which were followed and the methods used. 3. Monumentation. Describe the monumentation that was established and recovered. 4. Instrumentation. Describe the equipment, including a list of instruments, rods (including calibration information), and recording equipment. Include model and serial numbers of all equipment and the dates they were in use. Note the reasons for return of equipment for repairs or adjustment. For rod calibrations, cite which previously submitted calibration data are to be used to process the project. If none were submitted previously, include such calibration data with the leveling data submitted with this report. C. Comments (THIS IS THE MOST IMPORTANT SECTION OF THE REPORT!) 1. Reconnaissance. If a reconnaissance plan was submitted and approved by NGS prior to beginning the field measurements, describe any changes from the original reconnaissance and the reasons for the changes. 2. Specifications. Describe any deviations from the specifications used and the reason for such deviations. K-4 3. Routes. Briefly describe each line, including line number or other identification, topography and climate, features of the routing such as control point spacing and frequency of connections, unusual points leveled, unusual procedures, river or valley crossings, and ties established. 4. Problems. Describe all problems encountered, such as: moved or "suspect" marks, systematic new- minus-old comparisons, poor ground or atmospheric conditions, etc. 5. Recommendations. Mention specific sections that required additional work as a result of preliminary analysis. Describe areas which may require additional leveling in the future. D. 1. Closures. List loop closures for all loops of concurrent surveys. State the accumulated forward-backward difference for each line. 2. Check-measurements. Compute and list new-minus-old tabulations for all releveling of previously leveled lines. Also, list the average and maximum disagreements. 3. Progress. (Needed only if submitting organization is supported by NGS funding and/or equipment). Total progress along lines, double-run progress, single-run progress, total distance leveled, distance leveled as reruns, and number of sections. 4. Reruns. For all sections that were releveled for any reason other than those exceeding the tolerance limit, list the sections and the reasons for releveling. E. Status 1. Records. Describe the current status and future disposition of the station and observation records. If submitted to NGS, they will be archived in a Federal records center. 2. Contact. Provide the name and telephone number of a person to contact regarding questions which may arise during NGS processing of the data. III. Attachments to the report. Include as an attachment to the report a simple sketch of the project area showing completed lines, junctions, and loops. A section of the State Index Map of Control Leveling is sufficient with progress marked and lines clearly labeled. Also, attach copies of sketches showing loop closure computations. Report Outline for a GPS Control Project (See ANNEX L beginning on page L-6) K-5 Assistance and Mailing Information The point of contact at NGS for questions concerning the Input Formats and Specifications of the National Geodetic Survey Data Base is: Mr. Sherrill Snellgrove National Geodetic Survey Division NOAA, N/CG124 1315 East-West Highway, Station 8460 Silver Spring, Maryland 20910-3282 Telephone: (301) 713-3187 GPS, classical horizontal, and/or classical vertical data sent to NGS via U.S. Postal Service, United Parcel Service or similar commercial carrier should be addressed: Chief, National Geodetic Survey Division NOAA, N/CG17x2 1315 East-West Highway, Station 8200 Silver Spring, Maryland 20910-3282 REFERENCE Gossett, F.R., 1950, rev. 1959: Manual of geodetic triangulation. C&GS Special Publication 247, 344 pp. National Geodetic Information Branch, NGS, NOAA, Rockville, MD 20852. K-6 ANNEX L GUIDELINES FOR SUBMITTING GPS RELATIVE POSITIONING DATA Global Positioning System (GPS) relative positioning data submitted to the National Geodetic Survey (NGS) of the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration for inclusion in the National Geodetic Reference System (NGRS) must meet the following requirements. 1.0 GPS RAW OBSERVATIONS (R-files): The raw GPS observations will be sent to NGS in a format specified by NGS at the time of submission. Each R-file consists of the set (one or more data files) of raw GPS data for each unique (independent) occupation of a station. For example, if there were four receivers observing during each of five sessions a total of 20 raw data sets would be collected. 2.0 GPS VECTOR SOLUTIONS (G-file): The unadjusted vectors will be submitted in the format specified in ANNEX N. Submit one G-file for each GPS survey project. The G-file may be generated from one of the following: (1) a subroutine of the GPS vector processing software; (2) a stand-alone program that reads the printer output file of the vector processing software; or (3) software that prompts the user for keyboard entries such as CR8G (NGS 1988). The G-file contains such information as: (1) From/to station identification (2) Vector coordinate differences (DX, DY, DZ), standard deviations, correlations (or covariance data) (3) Name of processing software and version (4) Date of solution (5) Source of the ephemerides (6) Coordinate system (datum) for the vectors (7) Method of reduction (i.e., fixed or adjusted orbit solutions, single session or network reduction mode, and single or dual frequencies). When processing data from two stations at a time, the technique is called the "single" vector processing method. If one uses this method for data compiled in the G-file, the G-file may include all possible unique combinations (independent and dependent) of the vectors. With this method there will be n(n-1)/2 possible vectors for each observing session, where n is the number of receivers simultaneously observing during the session. If only the (n-1) independent vectors are submitted, then every effort must be made to submit the shortest vectors since these are most likely to be the results of fixed integer bias solutions. If processing all data collected during an independent observing session in a combined multiple vector solution the computation is called the "session" processing method. The session G-file entry would include results for the (n-1) independent vectors, where n is equal to the number of receivers collecting data simultaneously during the unique observing session. L-1 If processing multiple sessions in a combined solution the result is called a "network" solution. The G-file would contain (s-1) independent vectors from each network solution, where s is the total number of unique stations incorporated in the solution. The vectors generated in the "fixed orbit" solution mode using either the "broadcast" (predicted) or "precise" (post fit) ephemerides will be referenced to the satellite or fiducial station coordinate system. The current broadcast ephemeris coordinate system is known as the World Geodetic System 1984 (WGS 84) (DMA 1987). All analyses submitted to NGS, including minimally constrained or "free" adjustments, will be completed in the WGS 84 system or an internationally recognized coordinate system. 3.0 GPS PROJECT AND STATION OCCUPATION DATA FILE (B-file): Submit one B-file for each project. It may be created by using a program like CR8BB (NGS 1990). The software functions independently of the type of receivers used during the project. The B-file contains information related to the project (such as name, location, etc.) and information for each station occupation [such as observer's initials, model and serial number of equipment, best estimates for the station coordinates, weather data, antenna height measurements (vertical), station name, operator comments, receiver time-offset measurements (if applicable), etc.]. B-file formats are described in Volume I, Chapter 2. 4.0 STATION DESCRIPTION FILE (D-file): Create one D-file for each GPS project. This file contains descriptive or recovery information for each station visited during the GPS survey. It would include any points connected to the GPS survey using conventional horizontal surveying and/or differential leveling techniques, and miscellaneous reports for NGRS points visited but not occupied during the GPS survey. Submit the file in agreement with the format described in volume I, Chapter 3 and annexes C, D and I. New descriptions should be created using program DESC which is part of a set of programs called DDPROC (NGS 1992). Descriptive data for existing NGRS points in a project area should be requested from NGS prior to starting reconnaissance. The data can be downloaded from the NGS data base and converted to a form usable by the DESC program for updating purposes. 5.0 HORIZONTAL CONNECTION SURVEY DATA FILE (T-file): A T-file must be created and submitted with the GPS project if the project includes any surveys observed with conventional (terrestrial) horizontal surveying techniques. For example, if an existing station was not a suitable GPS site and an offset point was used, the data compiled in the T-file would be for the horizontal tie between the two points. The T-file may be created with MTEN (NGS 1991b). T-file formats are described in volume I, chapters 1 and 2. 6.0 VERTICAL CONNECTION SURVEY DATA FILE (L-file): If the GPS survey project includes observations using conventional differential leveling techniques, an L-file must be created and submitted with the GPS project data. For example, if a bench mark could not be occupied directly with a GPS receiver system and an offset point was set, part of the data entered connecting the two points together would be for the leveling observations between the two points. L-2 If only one NGRS vertical point (bench mark) was leveled to at a GPS station site, the leveling data will be considered part of the GPS survey. If a good two-bench mark tie is made to the NGS Vertical control network, the leveling will be considered as a vertical control survey. Formats for these data are in Volume II. Create the L-file with NGS software called PCvOBS (NGS 1989). Note that this program is to be used in place of program MTEN. 7.0 ANALYSIS AND ADJUSTMENT DATA: 7.1 Loop misclosures and differences in repeat vector measurements will be computed and evaluated to check for blunders or significant errors in vectors. They are also used to obtain initial estimates of the consistency of the GPS survey network. They will be done in agreement with the "Office Procedures" of the "Geometric Accuracy Standards and Specifications for GPS Relative Positioning Surveys" (FGCC 1989). Note that these checks are not an indication of accuracy but rather a measure of precision or repeatability. Particular attention shall be given to detection of possible blunders caused by antenna offset measurements (vertical) and/or centering errors (horizontal). A tabulation of the results of the loop misclosures and repeat vector comparisons will be included in the project report. The loop misclosures may be evaluated with NGS software called LOOP (NGS 1991a) or its equivalent. 7.2 A minimally constrained (free) least squares, three dimensional (3D) adjustment (one station arbitrarily selected and held equal to known, i.e published, NGRS coordinates) will be completed in accordance with the "Office Procedures" of the "Geometric Accuracy Standards and Specifications for GPS Relative Positioning Surveys" (FGCC 1989). Submit a computer listing (burst and bound) that shall clearly include at least the following: (a) Input vector component data. (Depending on adjustment software used, this may include variance-covariance data.) (b) The "a priori" standard errors used if variance-covariance data were not used. (c) Station list with name (abbreviated as appropriate), project unique four-character identification code, project unique numeric code used in adjustment, initial coordinates (latitude, longitude, and height above ellipsoid), and the fixed station specified. (d) Adjusted vectors with residuals (v) and normalized residuals (v'). (e) "A posteriori" variance of unit weight of the adjustment. (f) Adjusted coordinates for each station including the station held fixed in the "free" adjustment. (g) Datum for the satellite coordinate system (e.g., WGS 84). (h) The reference ellipsoid used in the adjustment. (e.g. WGS 84 or GRS 80) (i) Other appropriate data or statistics. The estimate of the variance factor ("a posteriori" variance of unit weight) should be less than 2 in the "free" (minimally constrained) adjustment. It may range between 1 and 16 or more depending upon how close the variance estimates for the vector components of the vector solutions are to the true values. L-3 Estimates which are optimistic (i.e., too small) will result in higher variance factor values. Show clearly the name and version of the 3D adjustment software used. 7.3 A constrained 3D adjustment shall be submitted if project specifications require the computation of adjusted coordinates for the new points in relation to the local datum. A constrained adjustment for a project in North or Central America involves adjusting the GPS vector data while constraining stations to the existing network of NGS published horizontal coordinate data in the North American Datum of 1983 (NAD 1983) system and NGS published vertical data in the North American Vertical Datum of 1988 (NAVD 1988) system or their successors. The unknown orthometric heights will be determined by the most appropriate method for achieving the specified accuracy standard for the project. This will usually involve one of two methods. The first method incorporates "a priori" geoidal undulation data in the 3D adjustment while holding fixed the orthometric heights for stations with known values (determined by differential leveling techniques). The source for the geoidal separation data (e.g., GEOID 93) must be given. This includes the name of software, version, and data used for computing the geoidal separation. The second method for determining orthometric heights from GPS vector data involves performing 3D adjustments using no geoidal undulation data. In this method, the orthometric heights are held fixed while using zero values for the geoid height above the ellipsoid in the 3D adjustment. This forces the GPS network to fit to the geoidal surface. The success of achieving the specified accuracy standard for the orthometric heights at the points with unknown values will depend upon the flatness of the geoid in the project area and the distribution of the stations with known orthometric heights. This method is discussed in more detail in the article "On the use of GPS vectors in densification adjustments" (Vincenty 1987). A tabulated listing of stations and fixed and adjusted coordinate values must be provided. The project report must give a description of the method used to estimate the orthometric heights. 8.0 PROJECT SKETCH: A sketch will be drawn in black ink on white paper showing all stations occupied during the GPS survey. The sketch will have a border drawn around the edge and must include grid ticks for latitude and longitude. Use the following standard symbols for the stations: (a) Squares for existing vertical network control (b) Open triangles for existing horizontal control stations (c) Open triangles within squares for existing horizontal/vertical stations (d) Closed triangles for GPS stations (e) Circles for stations occupied during previous GPS projects A "D" next to the station symbol will be used to indicate a Doppler station that has point-position coordinates determined using "precise" ephemerides. (Contact NGS for a list of Doppler stations with "precise" ephemerides point position coordinates located in North America.) L-4 Besides the stations occupied, the sketch should show other stations of the existing network located within or near the project area. Specify in the project report whether any attempt was made to recover these stations. The report must state why the recovered stations were not occupied. To show a station that was not recovered use "NR" next to that station's symbol. The sketch shall include a boxed-in legend that gives: (a) project name (b) general locality (c) name of group making observations (d) project leader (e) month/year (from-to) (f) scale of sketch On a copy of the sketch, form closed loops of all (if practical) "independent" (non-trivial) GPS vectors measured. Show vectors common to an observing session with different line types (dashed, dotted, etc., or other clear graphic depiction). Show, next to one or more of the independent lines for each session, the observing day number/session designation (e.g., 242B, 321C, 3331, 3332, etc.). Survey points will be shown in an inset sketch when they are too close together to be depicted clearly on the network sketch. The project sketch(es) will be included with the project report. 9.0 PROJECT REPORT: The project report will be submitted in a binder with the project name on the front of the binder and will be structured in the following manner: I. Introduction A. Purpose - Describe the purpose for which the survey was conducted. Show the name of the organization for which the survey was performed. B. Time Period - State the arrival and departure dates for the field crew and dates of first and last observing sessions. C. Point of Contact - Supply the name, phone number, and mailing address of the point of contact within the submitting organization. Supply the same information for all organizations which participated in the survey. D. Accuracy standards - Provide the accuracy standards (vertical and horizontal) specified for the project. II. Location - Describe the geographic location and scope of the project in general terms. III. Conditions Affecting Progress - Specify equipment failures, climate, scope of project, site accessibility, reconnaissance, malfunctioning satellites, etc. IV. Field Work A. Chronology - Give a brief description of the progression of the project. L-5 B. Instrumentation - Describe the make, model, and serial number of each receiver used on the project. C. Deviation from Instructions - Describe any deviation from the procedures and specifications stated in the project instructions. Specify all stations which were eccentrically occupied and state why the station(s) could not be directly occupied. V. Data Processing Performed - Describe the data processing that was done. Include tasks such as transferring of data to different storage media, data quality checking, station descriptions, vector determinations, and closure computations. Specify the ephemeris type [broadcast (predicted) or precise (post fit)] and the source. Complete the following sections as appropriate: A. Software Used - Specify all software by program name and version number which was used to acquire, manage, reduce, adjust, and submit field data. If the project data were reduced or acquired with different versions of a program, specify which version was used with which block of data. B. Rejected Data - Specify observing sessions which were rejected and reobserved. Include the reason(s) why the data from a particular session were rejected. C. Equipment - Describe by manufacturer, model number, and serial number all receivers used to collect the data. Indicate any equipment failures which may have degraded the quality of data and/or vector determinations which were retained. Specify the data or vectors by station and session, and the failed equipment by component and serial number. Indicate data rejected because of equipment failure in section B above. D. Weather - Tabulate required meteorological observations for the survey and include a copy with this report. List all observing sessions which occurred during periods of changing or severe weather conditions such as passing fronts, storms, etc. A simple table listing the sessions influenced and the weather condition will suffice. E. Adjustment - Discuss in detail the type(s) of adjustment(s)performed. Show weighting technique used, station(s) constrained, method used to estimate orthometric heights and existence of independent sub-networks. Discuss possible weaknesses or distortions found or suspected in the NGRS. F. Closures - Tabulate the results of all loop misclosure computations. Include the vectors used, vector length, maximum closure error in each component, and average closure error in each component. Tabulate closure component error in terms of Cartesian coordinates (XYZ) and in terms of the local terrestrial system [N,E,U (north, east, up)]. Also, tabulate comparisons of repeat vectors observed indicating vector length, and maximum and average closure for each vector component. Closures will be stated in both meters and parts per million. L-6 VI. Statistics A. Stations Occupied - List station names and give total stationsoccupied based on each of the following categories: 1. Existent NGRS horizontal stations 2. Existent NGRS vertical stations 3. Existent NGRS horizontal/vertical stations 4. Stations established 5. Stations previously occupied with GPS B. Base lines Observed - Compute the total number of independent (non-trivial) vectors observed during the project. Each observing session cannot have more than (N - 1) independent vectors, where N = number of receivers. For example, if a project included 10 observing sessions and 4 receivers were used during each session, a total of 10(4-1) = 30 independent vectors would have been observed. C. Provide the total number of observing days and total number of sessions. For example, if the total number of observing days was 5 and there were 2 sessions conducted each observing day, then the total number of observing sessions was 5 x 2 = 10. VII. Comments and Recommendations Include noteworthy comments and recommendations regarding the execution of the GPS survey for this project (or future projects) not found elsewhere in the project report. VIII. Attachments and Enclosures A. Station List - Include a table which lists the station name, four- character station identifier, coordinates, elevation, session(s) occupied, and station type for all stations occupied. The list will be alphabetical by four-character identifier. See "Planning GPS Surveys" for instructions on preparation of station lists (NGS 1986). B. Field Project Sketch - Attach a copy of the project sketch. If there are multiple copies of the sketch showing different data, attach a copy of each. See "Planning GPS Surveys" for instructions on preparation of survey sketches (NGS 1986). C. Project Instructions - Attach a copy of the instructions and/or contract under which this project was performed. Also include any revisions or changes to the instructions or specifications. D. Field Logs - Provide original or clear copies of field survey notes, record books, and observation logs. When appropriate, this will include Log of Time Offset Measurements and Log of Surface Meteorological Measurements. E. Equipment Failure Logs - Include with the report a failure log for any equipment used to gather data which failed anytime during the project. The log will state the name of the component, serial number, date of failure and nature of failure. L-7 F. Project Observing Schedule - Prepare a list which summarizes the following: observing day numbers/session letters, four- character station identifiers, start and stop dates and times (UTC), satellites observed (PRN numbers), receiver serial numbers, antenna offset measurements, remarks, etc. ******************************************************************** **** * * * All data and material submitted must be neat and legible (typed or * * clearly written in black ink). DO NOT SEND THE ONLY COPY OF ANY * * PAPER RECORDS OR DIGITAL DATA FILES. * * * ******************************************************************** **** 10.0 PROJECT SUBMISSION CHECKLIST: Exhibit A is a form that may be used to check for completeness when submitting GPS project data to the National Geodetic Survey. 11.0 DATA TRANSMISSION MEDIA: All computer-generated digital data files must be submitted to the NGS in digital form on media approved by NGS at time of submission. If you have questions concerning the above requirements, please contact: Ms. Madeline White National Geodetic Survey Division NOAA, N/CG144 1315 East-West Highway, Station 8342 Silver Spring, Maryland 20910-3282 Telephone: (301) 713-3211 L-8 EXHIBIT A PROJECT SUBMISSION CHECKLIST GPS PROJECTS Project Title: _____________________________________________ Accession Number: _____________________________________________ Submitting Agency: _____________________________________________ Observing Agency: _____________________________________________ Receiver Type: _____________________________________________ PACKAGE CONTENTS Project Report and Attachments Required For ( ) Project Report All Projects ( ) Project Sketch All Projects ( ) Project Instructions or Contract Specifications All Projects ( ) Final Station List All Projects ( ) Station Visibility Diagrams All Projects ( ) Final Observing Schedule All Projects ( ) Observation Logs All Projects ( ) Equipment Failure Logs NGS Projects ( ) Loop Misclosures or Adjustment Analysis All Projects ( ) Minimally Constrained Adjustment All Projects ( ) Constrained Adjustment If Specified ( ) Meteorological Instrument Comparison Logs If Specified ( ) Photographs of Views from Stations If Specified ( ) Photographs or Rubbings of Station Marks All Projects ( ) COMPGB Output (Validation program-B/G file) All Projects ( ) OBSDES Output (Validation program-D-file) All Projects Digitized Data Files ( ) Diskettes ( ) Other:_________________ ( ) Raw Phase Data (R-files) All Projects ( ) Base Line Vectors (G-file) All Projects ( ) Project and Station Occupation Data (B-file) All Projects ( ) Descriptions or Recovery Notes (D-file) All Projects ( ) Terrestrial Horizontal Observations (T-file) If Applicable ( ) Differential Leveling Observations (L-file) If Applicable Comments - Enter on the reverse side of this form. Org Code Name Date Received by: ______________________________________________________ Reviewed by: ______________________________________________________ Reviewed by: ______________________________________________________ L-9 REFERENCES: Defense Mapping Agency, 1987: Department of Defense World Geodetic System 1984 - its definition and relationships with local geodetic systems. DMA Technical Report, DMA TR 8350.2, 30 September 1987, Washington, DC, 121 pp. Federal Geodetic Control Committee, 1989: Geometric Accuracy Standards and Specifications for GPS Relative Positioning Surveys, version 5.0: May 11, 1988, reprinted with corrections August 1, 1989, 48 pp. National Geodetic Survey, 1992: "Program DDPROC and Documentation," version 2.0: December 10, 1992. National Geodetic Survey, 1991a: "Program LOOP and Documentation," version 4.03: January 18, 1991. National Geodetic Survey, 1991b: "MTEN4, A System for Use with the National Geodetic Survey Data Base Input Formats and Specifications", version 20: December, 1991. National Geodetic Survey, 1990: "Guidelines for Digitizing GPS Project and Station Occupation Information using program CR8BB," version 3.21: July 26, 1990. National Geodetic Survey, 1989: "PCvOBS Software and Documentation," version 2.00: October 10, 1989. National Geodetic Survey, 1988: "Program CR8G and Documentation," version 1.1: December 27, 1988. National Geodetic Survey, 1986: "Planning GPS Surveys," version 2, September 26, 1986 (NGS preliminary document). Vincenty, T., 1987: "On the use of GPS vectors in densification adjustments," Surveying and Mapping (Journal of the American Congress on Surveying and Mapping), Vol. 47, No. 2, pp. 103-108. NOTE: All National Geodetic Survey and Federal Geodetic Control Subcommittee publications are available from: NOAA, National Geodetic Information Branch, N/CG174 1315 East-West Highway, Room 9202 Silver Spring, MD 20910-3282. phone: 301-713-3242 fax: 301-713-4172 L-10 ANNEX N GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM DATA TRANSFER FORMAT (G-FILE) This annex contains information about the Global Positioning System (GPS) Data Transfer Format (G-File) records. The G-File consists of eight 80-column record types that are used to document the results of the computation of relative vectors, expressed as components, from simultaneously observed GPS phase measurements. There may be only one G-file for a project. Each G-file must contain one Project Record (A) and one or more Session Header Records (B). A Session Header Record (B) is required for each individually processed vector or each simultaneously processed group of vectors (session) at three or more survey points. Each Session Header Record is followed by one or more Vector (C) and/or Long Vector (F) Records, Correlation (D) or Covariance (E) Records, optional Coordinate (G) Records, and optional and/or required Station Information (H) Records. Vector and Long Vector Records contain relative vector components between two survey points. Correlation Records contain the off-diagonal elements only of the correlation matrix for the vector components in a session. Covariance Records contain the off-diagonal elements only of the covariance matrix for the vector components in a session. The records for a simultaneously processed vector set may only contain correlation or covariance records but not a mix of the two. A Long Vector Record may only be used when a vector component is larger than +/- 999,999.9999 meters. The Coordinate (G) Records may be used to record, for informational purposes within the G-file, the coordinates of survey points held fixed during the vector computations or to provide location information regarding the G-file. Relative vectors are required even if coordinates are included. Station Information Records are used to document differing conditions or solution types for vectors within a session. The Station Information Record (H) is required only when an external time standard is used with a receiver, when a comment needs to be made about a station occupation, or when information about a station occupation or vector solution is not the same as for all other stations or vectors in a session. Multiple H records are allowed. This annex documents the record formats, provides an explanation of the fields within each record, and gives G-file examples using the various record types. CC-1 CODE RECORD TYPE A Project Record (The A record is required) B Session Header Record (The B record is required) C Vector Record (The C record is required) D Correlation Record (Either the D record or the E Covariance Record E record is required) F Long Vector Record G Coordinate/Absolute Position Record (optional) H Station Information Record N-1 Project Record 01-01 A 02-03 Job Code (Chapter 1) Alpha 04-07 Year, Start of Project (local) (CCYY) Integer 08-09 Month, Start of Project (local) (MM) Integer 10-11 Day, Start of Project (local) (DD) Integer 12-15 Year, End of Project (local) (CCYY) Integer 16-17 Month, End of Project (local) (MM) Integer 18-19 Day, End of Project (local) (DD) Integer 20-78 Title of project Alpha 79-80 Reserved Session Header Record 01-01 B 02-05 Year, First Actual Measurement (UTC) (CCYY) Integer 06-07 Month, First Actual Measurement (UTC) (MM) Integer 08-09 Day, First Actual Measurement (UTC) (DD) Integer 10-13 Time, First Actual Measurement (UTC) (HHMM) Integer 14-17 Year, Last Actual Measurement (UTC) (CCYY) Integer 18-19 Month, Last Actual Measurement (UTC) (MM) Integer 20-21 Day, Last Actual Measurement (UTC) (DD) Integer 22-25 Time, Last Actual Measurement (UTC) (HHMM) Integer 26-27 Number of Vectors in the Session Integer 28-42 Software Name & Version Alpha 43-47 Orbit Source (agency) Alpha 48-51 Orbit accuracy estimate (XXX.x meters) Implied Decimal 52-53 Solution coordinate system code (table, N-6) Integer 54-55 Solution meteorological use code (table, N-6) Integer 56-57 Solution ionosphere use code (table, N-6) Integer 58-59 Solution time parameter use code (table, N-6) Integer 60-60 Nominal accuracy code (table, N-8) Integer 61-66 Processing agency code (Annex C) Alpha 67-70 Year of Processing (CCYY) Integer 71-72 Month of processing (MM) Integer 73-74 Day of processing (DD) Integer 75-80 Solution Type (table, N-7) Alpha Note: Columns 52 through 80 of Record B assume all stations use identical observing and computation procedures. If this is not the case use Record H to record the differences for each of those stations which vary from those conditions noted on the B record. N-2 Vector Record 01-01 C 02-05 Origin Station Serial Number (ssn) (vector tail) Integer 06-09 Differential Station Serial Number (vector head) Integer 10-20 Delta X (XXXXXXX.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 21-25 Standard Deviation (X.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 26-36 Delta Y (XXXXXXX.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 37-41 Standard Deviation (X.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 42-52 Delta Z (XXXXXXX.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 53-57 Standard Deviation (X.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 58-58 Rejection Code (use upper case R to reject) Alpha 59-68 Origin Station Data Media Identifier (See page N-6) 69-78 Differential Station Data Media Identifier (See page N-6) 79-80 Reserved Note: Standard deviation values must be positive, non-zero numbers. Correlation Record 01-01 D 02-04 Row Index Number Integer 05-07 Column Index Number Integer 08-16 Correlation (XX.xxxxxxx) Implied Decimal 17-19 Row Index Number Integer 20-22 Column Index Number Integer 23-31 Correlation (XX.xxxxxxx) Implied Decimal 32-34 Row Index Number Integer 35-37 Column Index Number Integer 38-46 Correlation (XX.xxxxxxx) Implied Decimal 47-49 Row Index Number Integer 50-52 Column Index Number Integer 53-61 Correlation (XX.xxxxxxx) Implied Decimal 62-64 Row Index Number Integer 65-67 Column Index Number Integer 68-76 Correlation (XX.xxxxxxx) Implied Decimal 77-80 Reserved Note: This record is to record the off-diagonal correlates only from the session (or vector) correlation matrix. Since the correlation matrix is symmetric about the diagonal only the upper or the lower half should be recorded. N-3 Covariance Record 01-01 E 02-04 Row Index Number Integer 05-07 Column Index Number Integer 08-19 Covariance (XXXX.xxxxxxxx meters2) Implied Decimal 20-22 Row Index Number Integer 23-25 Column Index Number Integer 26-37 Covariance (XXXX.xxxxxxxx meters2) Implied Decimal 38-40 Row Index Number Integer 41-43 Column Index Number Integer 44-55 Covariance (XXXX.xxxxxxxx meters2) Implied Decimal 56-58 Row Index Number Integer 59-61 Column Index Number Integer 62-73 Covariance (XXXX.xxxxxxxx meters2) Implied Decimal 74-80 Reserved Note: This record is to record the off-diagonal covariances only from the vector variance-covariance matrix. The square root of the diagonal elements, the component standard deviations, are recorded on records C and F. Since the variance-covariance matrix is symmetric about the diagonal only the upper or the lower half should be recorded. Long Vector Record 01-01 F 02-05 Origin Station Serial Number (ssn) (vector tail) Integer 06-09 Differential Station Serial Number (vector head) Integer 10-22 Delta X (XXXXXXXXX.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 23-27 Standard Deviation (X.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 28-40 Delta Y (XXXXXXXXX.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 41-45 Standard Deviation (X.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 46-58 Delta Z (XXXXXXXXX.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 59-63 Standard Deviation (X.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 64-64 Rejection Code (use upper case R to reject) Alpha 65-65 Origin station manufacturer code (N-6) 66-68 Origin station UTC day of year of occupation (DDD) Integer 69-69 Origin station year of occupation (Y) UTC Integer 70-70 Origin station session indicator Alpha 71-71 Differential station manufacturer code (N-6) 72-74 Differential station day of year (DDD) UTC Integer 75-75 Differential station year of occupation (Y) UTC Integer 76-76 Differential station session indicator Alpha 77-80 Reserved Note: Standard deviation values must be positive, non-zero numbers. N-4 Coordinate Record 01-01 G 02-02 Blank 03-03 Record usage code K - see below 04-05 Blank 06-09 Station Serial Number 10-10 Blank 11-14 Optional "short" station name - see below 15-15 Blank 16-20 Coordinate frame designator (e.g. NAD 83, WGS 84, NAD 27, WGS 72, ITR 90, etc.; inquire for additions) 21-21 Blank 22-33 X coordinate (XXXXXXXX.xxxx meters) Implied Decimal 34-34 Blank 35-46 Y coordinate (YYYYYYYY.yyyy meters) Implied Decimal 47-47 Blank 48-59 Z coordinate (ZZZZZZZZ.zzzz meters) Implied Decimal 60-60 Blank 61-64 Sigma X (SS.ss m) blank if unknown or greater than 99.99 m 65-65 Blank 66-69 Sigma Y (SS.ss m) blank if unknown or greater than 99.99 m 70-70 Blank 71-74 Sigma Z (SS.ss m) blank if unknown or greater than 99.99 m 75-80 Reserved K = 0 or blank indicates that the position is approximate and has no particular interpretation. K = 1 indicates that these are exact coordinates (to 0.1 mm) used during the processing of the G-file vectors. The 4 character "short" name, if used, should be the same abbreviation used elsewhere in the G-file or other related data files. Station Information Record 01-01 H 02-05 Station Serial Number (ssn) Integer 06-09 Four Character Identifier Alpha 10-11 External frequency standard code (table, N-8) 12-13 Vector meteorological use code (table, N-6) 14-15 Vector time parameter use code (table, N-6) 16-17 Vector ionosphere use code (table, N-6) 18-23 Vector Solution type (table, N-7) 24-78 Comments Alpha 79-80 Reserved Use comment field to record clarifying information or instrument type if noted as "other" in Data Media Identifier. N-5 CODE TABLES Solution Coordinate Reference System Codes 01 -- WGS 72 Precise (post-fit) Ephemeris 02 -- WGS 84 Precise (post-fit) Ephemeris 03 -- WGS 72 Broadcast (Predicted) Ephemeris 04 -- WGS 84 Broadcast (Predicted) Ephemeris 05 -- ITRF 89 Epoch 1988.0 (International Earth Rotation Service Terrestrial Reference Frame 1989, epoch 1988.0 [July 1989]) 06 -- PNEOS 90 (Provisional National Earth Orientation Service Terrestrial Reference Frame 1990 [March 1991]) 07 -- NEOS 90 Epoch 1988.0 [July 1991] 08 -- ITRF 91 Epoch 1988.0 [July 1992] 09 -- Scripps Institute of Oceanography-Massachusetts Institute of Technology (SIO-MIT) 1992, epoch 1992.5 [September 1992] 10 -- ITRF 91 Epoch 1992.6 11 -- ITRF 92 Epoch 1994.0 [January 1994] Solution Meteorological Use Codes 01 -- Default values used (model used) 02 -- Observed meteorological data used 03 -- Water vapor radiometer used Solution Ionosphere Use Code 01 -- None 02 -- Dual frequency ionospheric correction used 03 -- Ionospheric model used Solution Time Parameter Use Codes 01 -- Observed time synchronization data used 02 -- Time parameters solved for in data reduction Data Media Identifier Required format: ADDDYSCCCC where, A is one of the following characters which indicates the manufacturer of the receiver used for the observation: A = Ashtech, Inc; C = Topcon Corp; D = Del Norte Technology, Inc; G = Allen Osborne Associates, Inc; I = Istac, Inc; L = MINI-MACR; M = MACROMETERR; N = Norstar Instruments Ltd; O = Motorola, Inc; R = Trimble Navigation, Ltd; S = SERCEL, Inc; T = Texas Instruments, Inc; V = NovAtel Communications Ltd; W = Leica Heerbrugg AG/Wild Heerbrugg/Magnavox, Inc; X = other DDD is the day of the year of the first data epoch (UTC) Y is the last digit of the year of the first data epoch (UTC) S is an alphanumeric designation of the session CCCC is the project unique, four character abbreviation of a station designation N-6 CODE TABLES (continued) Solution Type Use Codes + L1TD-- L1SDFL L1DDFL IFDDFL OTDDFL K1DDFX + L2TD-- L1SDFX L1DDFX IFDDFX OTDDFX K2DDFX + IFTD-- L1SDPF L1DDPF IFDDPF OTDDPF KIDDFX + WLTD-- KWDDFX L2DDFL WLDDFL P1DDFX L2DDFX WLDDFX P2DDFX L2DDPF WLDDPF PIDDFX PWDDFX Where: L1 = Frequency 1 L2 = Frequency 2 IF = Ionosphere Free Combination (Static) * WL = Wide Lane Combination (Static or Rapid Static)** OT = Other (Explain in Station Information Record) K1 = L1 Kinematic Observation (Single visit, continuous lock - also known as Continuous Kinematic, Stop and Go Kinematic, or On-the-Fly Kinematic) K2 = L2 Kinematic KI = Ionosphere Free Combination Kinematic * KW = Wide Lane Combination Kinematic ** P1 = L1 Pseudo-kinematic (Two or more visits, intermittent lock - also known as Pseudo- static, Intermittent Static or Reoccupation techniques) P2 = L2 Pseudo-kinematic PI = Ionosphere Free Combination Pseudo-kinematic * PW = Wide Lane Combination Pseudo-kinematic ** TD = Triple Difference Solution DD = Double Difference Solution SD = Single Difference Solution FL = Float (real number) estimate of biases FX = Fixed integer estimate of biases PF = Partial, fixed integer estimate of biases (Not all integer biases determinable). + Triple Difference Solutions have no integer ambiguities, leave trailing columns blank. * IF = ionosphere free = {f21/(f21 - f22)}L1 - {f1f2/(f21 - f22)}L2 ** WL = wide lane = L1 - L2 Where, f1 = 1575.42 mHz, f2 = 1227.60 mHz, and L1 and L2 are phase measurements in units of cycles. N-7 CODE TABLES (continued) External Frequency Standard 01 -- No external frequency standard used 02 -- Rubidium frequency standard used 03 -- Cesium frequency standard used 04 -- Hydrogen Maser frequency standard used 05 -- External crystal frequency standard used 06 -- Other (Comment in Station Information Record) Vector Nominal Accuracy Codes Order/Class 4 -- Intended accuracy 100 ppm plus 5.0 cm 3 3 -- Intended accuracy 50 ppm plus 3.0 cm 2-II 2 -- Intended accuracy 20 ppm plus 2.0 cm 2-I 5 -- Intended accuracy 10 ppm plus 1.0 cm 1 6 -- Intended accuracy 1 ppm plus 0.8 cm B 7 -- Intended accuracy 0.1 ppm plus 0.5 cm A 8 -- Intended accuracy 0.01 ppm plus 0.3 cm AA N-8 PROJECT RECORD 1 2 3 4 11 12 19 20 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴커 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴켸 RECORD JOB C C Y Y M M D D C C Y Y M M D D PROJECT TITLE TYPE CODE START END (A) PROJECT PROJECT 78 79 80 旼컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 旼쩡� 읕컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴컴� 읕좔� PROJECT TITLE CONTINUED ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- GROUP HEADER RECORD 1 2 9 10 13 14 21 22 25 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� RECORD C C Y Y M M D D H H M M C C Y Y M M D D H H M M TYPE DATE OF FIRST TIME OF FIRST DATE OF LAST TIME OF LAST (B) OBSERVATION OBSERVATION OBSERVATION OBSERVATION 26 27 28 42 43 47 48 51 52 53 54 55 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔�.읕� 읕좔� 읕좔� NUMBER SOFTWARE ID ORBIT X X X x COORDINATE MET. OF AND VERSION SOURCE ORBIT ACCURACY SYSTEM USE VECTORS (METERS) CODE CODE 56 57 58 59 60 61 66 67 74 75 80 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� IONOSPHERE TIME PARAMETER ACCURACY PROCESSING C C Y Y M M D D SOLUTION USE CODE CODE CODE AGENCY PROCESSING DATE CODE N-9 VECTOR RECORD 1 2 5 6 9 10 20 21 25 26 36 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� 읕�.읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� RECORD ORIGIN DIFFERENTIAL X X X X X X X x x x x X x x x x X X X X X X X x x x x TYPE SSN SSN DELTA X SIGMA X DELTA Y (C) (METERS) (METERS) (METERS) 37 41 42 52 53 57 58 59 68 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕�.읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� 읕�.읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� X x x x x X X X X X X X x x x x X x x x x REJECT ORIGIN STATION DATA SIGMA Y DELTA Z SIGMA Z CODE MEDIA IDENTIFIER (METERS) (METERS) (METERS) 69 78 79 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔� DIFFERENTIAL STATION BLANK DATA MEDIA IDENTIFIER N-10 CORRELATION RECORD 1 2 4 5 7 8 16 17 19 20 22 23 31 32 34 旼� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 읕� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� RECORD ROW COLUMN X X x x x x x x x ROW COLUMN X X x x x x x x x ROW TYPE INDEX INDEX CORRELATION INDEX INDEX CORRELATION INDEX (D) NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. 35 37 38 46 47 49 50 52 53 61 62 64 65 67 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔�.읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� COLUMN X X x x x x x x x ROW COLUMN X X x x x x x x x ROW COLUMN INDEX CORRELATION INDEX INDEX CORRELATION INDEX INDEX NO. NO. NO. NO. NO. 68 76 77 80 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴� 읕좔�.읕좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴� X X x x x x x x x BLANK CORRELATION N-11 COVARIANCE RECORD 1 2 4 5 7 8 19 20 22 23 25 旼� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 읕� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� RECORD ROW COLUMN X X X X x x x x x x x x ROW COLUMN TYPE INDEX INDEX COVARIANCE INDEX INDEX (E) NO. NO. (METERS2) NO. NO. 26 37 38 40 41 43 44 55 56 58 59 61 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕좔좔� 읕좔좔� X X X X x x x x x x x x ROW COLUMN X X X X x x x x x x x x ROW COLUMN COVARIANCE INDEX INDEX COVARIANCE INDEX INDEX (METERS2) NO. NO. (METERS2) NO. NO. 62 73 74 80 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴컴컴� 읕좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� 읕컴컴컴� X X X X x x x x x x x x BLANK COVARIANCE (METERS2) N-12 LONG VECTOR RECORD 1 2 5 6 9 10 22 23 27 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� 읕�.읕좔좔좔� RECORD ORIGIN DIFFERENTIAL X X X X X X X X X x x x x X x x x x TYPE SSN SSN DELTA X SIGMA X (F) (METERS) (METERS) 28 40 41 45 46 58 59 63 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� 읕�.읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� 읕�.읕좔좔좔� X X X X X X X X X x x x x X x x x x X X X X X X X X X x x x x X x x x x DELTA Y SIGMA Y DELTA Z SIGMA Z (METERS) (METERS) (METERS) (METERS) 64 65 66 70 71 72 76 77 80 旼� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼컴커 읕� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕컴켸 REJECT ORIG D D D Y S DIFF D D D Y S BLANK CODE INST ORIGIN DAY INST DIFFERENTIAL CODE IDENTIFIER CODE IDENTIFIER N-13 COORDINATE RECORD (Optional) 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 14 15 16 20 21 旼� 旼� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 읕� 읕� 읕� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔� 읕� RECORD BLANK K BLANK STATION BLANK SHORT BLANK COORDINATE BLANK TYPE (0,1) SERIAL NAME FRAME (G) NUMBER DESIGNATOR 22 33 34 35 46 47 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� 읕� X X X X X X X X x x x x BLANK Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y y y y y BLANK X COORDINATE (METERS) Y COORDINATE (METERS) 48 59 60 61 64 65 66 69 70 71 74 75 80 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼컴� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔�.읕좔좔좔� 읕� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕� 읕좔�.읕좔� 읕컴� Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z z z z z BLANK SIGMA X BLANK SIGMA Y BLANK SIGMA Z BLANK Z COORDINATE (METERS) (METERS) (METERS) (METERS) N-14 STATION INFORMATION RECORD 1 2 5 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 23 旼� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡� 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔좔좔� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔� 읕좔좔좔좔좔� RECORD STATION FOUR EXT. MET. TIME ION. SOLUTION TYPE SERIAL CHARACTER FREQ. USE PARAM. USE TYPE (H) NUMBER IDENTIFIER CODE CODE CODE CODE 24 78 旼쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡쩡� 읕좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔좔� COMMENT FIELD 79 80 旼쩡� 읕좔� BLANK N-15 G-FILE EXAMPLES Below are fragments from six independent, simulated GPS Data Transfer Format files (G-FILEs). There is one Project record (A) per G-file. Each session vector set, or individually computed vector in a multi-receiver session, requires a Session Record (B). Each vector requires at least one Vector Record (C) or Long Vector Record (F). Vector Records with Coordinate Records must follow the same Session Record. Station Information (H) Records are required as circumstances dictate and may be optionally added where not required. These records must be followed by sufficient Correlation (D) or Covariance Records (E) to express all off-diagonal correlation or covariance terms in the matrix half provided from the session computation. Correlation and Covariance Records may not be intermixed. 1. Project (A), Session (B), Vector (C), and Correlation (D) records for a single vector between two stations in a two receiver session or individually computed vector in a multi-receiver session. AKS1989061619890810 B19890622210419890623003201OMNI21JUL89 BDCST200040101025NGS 19890919L1DDFX C02860255 22818804 691 517712752 1665 621497962 1259 M1739APACIM1739AK60A D 1 2 -1507832 1 3 -1653265 2 3 -9400487 2. Project (A), Session (B), Vector (C), and Correlation (D) records for a three-receiver (two vector) session computed simultaneously in session mode. AA21989061619890810 B198907191920198907192022020MNI21JUL89 NSWC 200020202026NGS 19891010IFDDFL C02520251 2090836 21 3595939 80 5412122 45 T1735BTOLPT1735BIO35 C02520250 -42878920 42 -19024426 93 -28455946 69 T1735BTOLP71735BIO17 D 1 2 -3449463 1 3 -169254 1 4 -7443040 1 5 -3452654 1 6 1753975 D 2 3 -7698120 2 4 -6329835 2 5 1258498 2 6 8573493 3 4 -6485385 D 3 5 -6084380 3 6 -477478 4 5 -6124087 4 6 -3864367 5 6 8630812 Note: If a multi-receiver session is computed as if all possible vectors are independent, then there would be Session, Vector, and Correlation records for each vector in the session. Thus, the record sequence would be A, B, C, D, B, C, D, B, C, D, etc. The Session records would be nearly identical to the multi-receiver example except that start and stop times could vary with each vector. The number of vectors indicated on each Session Record would be one, i.e., there would be a Session Record for each vector and the cross correlation terms between vectors would not exist. N-16 3. Project (A), Session (B), Vector (C), and Correlation (D) Records for a five-receiver (four vector) session computed simultaneously in session mode. AW11989061619890810 B19890718192419890718225204OMNI21JUL89 BDCST 200020202025NGS 19891003L1DDFL C03000287 5764741 77 1459095 44 2345097 54 R1765ASMILR1765ANEOP C03000223 -52521873 47 -229406 101 -1142670 75 R1765ASMILR1765ACESZ C03000305 -42878920 42 -19024426 93 -28455945 69 R1765ASMILR1765AX042 C03000240 7097171 69 -1171456 40 -1443438 46 R1765ASMILR1765AG042 D 1 2 -7621157 1 3 -6268111 1 4 1032188 1 5 -7397468 1 6 2749723 D 1 7 -7716473 1 8 -6339150 1 9 1294594 1 10 -2396473 1 11 -2753742 D 1 12 -5804898 2 3 -791184 2 4 -6108347 2 5 -1739462 2 6 9010327 D 2 7 -7729301 2 8 -6463718 2 9 1526641 2 10 -3826492 2 11 3610736 D 2 12 -6449538 3 4 170894 3 5 -6299216 3 6 -1003847 3 7 -5307149 D 3 8 -7680811 3 9 -6477668 3 10 1506536 3 11 -9537262 3 12 -1836426 D 4 5 -6154878 4 6 -248020 4 7 -6087715 4 8 -1633847 4 9 6354725 D 4 10 -7804602 4 11 -6047825 4 12 1262026 5 6 3746287 5 7 -7243634 D 5 8 -6110139 5 9 -321344 5 10 -6165227 5 11 8362528 5 12 9162533 D 6 7 -5971690 6 8 -516393 6 9 -6136978 6 10 -9354622 6 11 1535474 D 6 12 -5920223 7 8 -559594 7 9 -6153794 7 10 2645373 7 11 -5373742 D 7 12 -5527744 8 9 -7793107 8 10 1043462 8 11 5378213 8 12 -2564522 D 9 10 -5371777 9 11 -7908942 9 12 1046883 10 11 8354256 10 12 -3372634 D 11 12 7153372 4. Project (A), Session (B), Vector (C), and Covariance (E) Records for a three-receiver (two vector) session computed simultaneously in session mode. AC51989061619890810 B198907191920198907192022020MNI21JUL89 NSWC 200020202026NGS 19891010WLDDPF C02520251 2090836 21 3595939 80 5412122 45 T1735BTOLPT1735BIO35 C02520250 -42878920 42 -19024426 93 -28455946 69 T1735BTOLPT1735BIO17 E 1 2 -3449231 1 3 169013 1 4 -7443219 1 5 - 3452017 E 1 6 -1753648 2 3 7698884 2 4 -6329438 2 5 1258689 E 2 6 8573027 3 4 -6485903 3 5 -6084227 3 6 - 477369 E 4 5 6124824 4 6 -3864711 5 6 8630682 5. Project (A), Session (B), Long Vector (F), and Correlation (D) Records for a three-receiver (two vector) session computed simultaneously in session mode. AM31989061619890810 B199003121920199003122022030MNI21JUL89 NSWC 200050202027NGS 19900605IFDDPF F02520251 -7398138095 62 -611028070 140 -759539795 81 R0710AR0710A F02520210 -28097365450 2 6537703840 2 1612488880 2 R0710AR0710A D 1 2 -3449463 1 3 -169254 1 4 -7443040 1 5 -3452654 1 6 1753975 D 2 3 -7698120 2 4 -6329835 2 5 1258498 2 6 8573493 3 4 -6485385 D 3 5 -6084380 3 6 -477478 4 5 -6124087 4 6 -3864367 5 6 8630812 N-17 6. Project (A), Session (B), Vector (C), Coordinate (G), Station Information (H), and Correlation (D) Records for a five-receiver session computed simultaneously. AG41989061619890810 B19921019162019921019202204OMNI06JAN93 NGS 50090202027NGS 19930115IFDDFX C02520251 -121666909 30 157350726 56 117976050 41 R2932ANORDR2932ASECO C02520250 -418472429 32 247232117 60 8372071 44 R2932ANORDR2932ABURR C02520253 -553950607 35 500052515 64 221106176 48 R2932ANORDR2932AFIGU C02520254 -289152973 31 300310186 55 183697838 42 R2932ANORDR2932APINE G 1 0252 NORD SIO92 -25711011350 -45925184360 35928923390 010 010 010 H0252NORD01020202IFDDFXREFERENCE STATION D 1 2 -7621157 1 3 -6268111 1 4 1032188 1 5 -7397468 1 6 2749723 D 1 7 -7716473 1 8 -6339150 1 9 1294594 1 10 -2396473 1 11 -2753742 D 1 12 -5804898 2 3 -791184 2 4 -6108347 2 5 -1739462 2 6 9010327 D 2 7 -7729301 2 8 -6463718 2 9 1526641 2 10 -3826492 2 11 3610736 D 2 12 -6449538 3 4 170894 3 5 -6299216 3 6 -1003847 3 7 -5307149 D 3 8 -7680811 3 9 -6477668 3 10 1506536 3 11 -9537262 3 12 -1836426 D 4 5 -6154878 4 6 -248020 4 7 -6087715 4 8 -1633847 4 9 6354725 D 4 10 -7804602 4 11 -6047825 4 12 1262026 5 6 3746287 5 7 -7243634 D 5 8 -6110139 5 9 -321344 5 10 -6165227 5 11 8362528 5 12 9162533 D 6 7 -5971690 6 8 -516393 6 9 -6136978 6 10 -9354622 6 11 1535474 D 6 12 -5920223 7 8 -559594 7 9 -6153794 7 10 2645373 7 11 -5373742 D 7 12 -5527744 8 9 -7793107 8 10 1043462 8 11 5378213 8 12 -2564522 D 9 10 -5371777 9 11 -7908942 9 12 1046883 10 11 8354256 10 12 -3372634 D 11 12 7153372 N-18